411-9001-048.15.37-BTS 8000 Manual

Wireless Service Provider Solutions
S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance

Manual
PE/DCL/DD/0048 15.37/EN Standard April 2005
411--9001--048
Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks
< 48 > : S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance Manual
S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance Manual
Document number: PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Document status: Standard
Document issue: 15.37/EN
Product release: GSM/BSS V15.0.1
Date: April 2005
Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved
Originated in France
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL:
The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel Networks. Except as specifically authorized in
writing by Nortel Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information contained herein confidential and
shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation,
operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in
any form without prior written consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo,
the NORTEL Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, BSC6000, S2000, S4000, S8000.
GSM is a trademark of France Telecom.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential iii
S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance Manual Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks
PUBLICATION HISTORY
System release: GSM/BSS V15.0.1 Maintenance Load
April 2005
Issue 15.37/EN Standard
Updated section 6.2.53, replacement of a power amp module.
February 2005
Issue 15.36/EN Preliminary
Removed references to kit NTQA17DB from section 6.2.71.
Modified kit references in section 6.2.72.
January 2005
Updated with review comments.
Included new graphics in chapter 2 of S8000 indoor.
For CR1037428, updated replacement procedures for the DACS control assembly,
to include settings for SW2, H1.
CR 1023851, updated preventive maintenance procedures in chapter 5.
November 2004
CR 1021003 Modified DACS Preventive Maintenance section
CR 924785--02 -- Modified replacement procedure for an AC box circuit breaker
(S8000 Outdoor BTS).
System release: GSM/BSS V15.0
Publication History
Nortel Networks Confidential
iv
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Standard 15.37/EN April 2005 Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks
November 2004
Removed incorrect procedure: Replacement of the PSU
CR 1019786 -- Removed references to S12000.
CR 1021003 -- Updated DACS Preventive Maintenance section.
September 2004
CR Q00942352 -- Added HePA information to section 2.
August 2004
CR Q00936841 -- Added CAB117 information to Section 5.
July 2004
Removed references to (POMAN)
July 2004
Updated for Helmsman release
June 2004
Updated the document for CRQ00926790 -- updated DACS control information in
Section 6 and Section 8 with input from CR and email.
June 2004
Updated the document for CR 915131.
Updated chapters 6 and 8 with reviewer comments
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential v
May 2004
The following figures were edited in the document:
Figure 2--22 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 4
of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Figure 2--23 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 5
Figure 2--40 S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D coupling)
Figure 2--41 S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the modules
Figure 2--42 S8003 Indoor BTS: modules numbering
Figure 2--43 S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer + Tx Filter
Figure 3--9 --48V power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS
Figure 3--10 --48 V Power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)
Figure 3--13 Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS --48V power supply
Figure 5--4 Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning protector
Figure 5--15 Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure
(battery cabinet)
Updated with CR Q00858075 -- PEC codes and board compatability.
Updated according to the following features:
25621: High Power PA (60W) -- GSM 900
24878: S8003 for 1800 and E--GSM without ASCI
March 2004
The following changes were made in the document:
Updated the Personnel and equipment safety section
Removed BRC in the documentation
Removed the term DRX--ND3 when it is referred to as a new functionality. Left
only the terms DRX and eDRX when the information is not specific to
DRX--ND3 module.
Updated the elements numbering in paragraph 2.2.7
Updated table 2--9, table 2--11, table 2--32, table 2--35 for LN--combiner location
Publication History
vi
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Added in section 3.2.3.4 Storage of batteries
Updated paragraph 6.2.2, Replacement of CMCF board, when using EDGE
Added paragraph 6.2.30, Replacement of the auto--reset DACS heater
thermostat
Updated paragraph 6.2.35, Replacement of DRX module and Product reference
Added References for GTW board in paragraph 6.2.6
Added Product references for RF--combiner module (DP, H2D or H4D) in
paragraph 6.2.61
Updated paragraph 6.2.66 Replacement of the single--phase AC lightning
protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)
Removed the DACS and Low Noise DACS installation from chapter 8 DACS
and Low Noise DACS Technical Manual
Moved DACS and LowNoise DACS maintenance from chapter 8 to Preventive
Maintenance Chapter 5. Maintenance instructions have been completed.
Added a note in Troubleshooting paragraph 8.2.3.1, on the new Procedure
Replacement of the auto--reset DACS heater thermostat in chapter 6 paragraph
6.2.30.
Editorial updates after peer review
January 2004
Issue 15.02/EN Draft
The document was updated for the following features:
Chapter 2 the maximum number of DRX--ND3 was added in section 2.3.2.1,
2.3.3.1, and 2.3.4.1.
December 2003
The document was updated for the following features:
23068 -- DRX--ND3 introduction and differentiation
24467 -- R--GSM DRX ND3
24119 -- Network identification of CMCF Phase 1 and Phase 2
The following chapters, sections, and paragraphs were updated:
Throughout the guide, the termDRXwas used to refer to all types of DRXexcept
where it is necessary to distinguish between the different types (that is, DRX,
eDRX, or DRX--ND3)
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential vii
Chapter 2 Description of the cabinets, a note about DRX types was added in
Paragraph 2.2.1 Introduction
Throughout Chapter 2, the DRX--ND3 was added
Chapter 3 Description of a Start--up, a note about DRX types was added in
paragraph 3.1 Introduction
Throughout Chapter 6, the term DRX was used instead of eDRX or DRX--ND3
Paragraph 6.2.35 Replacement of a DRX module (S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000
Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS), a note about DRX types was added. PEC
codes for DRX module for R--GSM--110dBm and eDRX module for R--GSM
were removed.
Paragraph 6.2.52 Replacement of a power amplifier (PA) module (S8000
Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS), PECcode for PAfor
GSM (GSM--R and 900) was removed
Paragraph 6.2.62 Replacement of a RF--combiner module (DP, H2D or H4D)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS), PEC codes
for R--GSMRF--Combiner Module Duplexer LNAand R--GSMDIPLEXERV2
were removed.
System release: GSM/BSS V14.3
October 2003
Updated according the following features:
24396: e--PA 1800 for S8000 and S12000
24397: e--PA 900 for S8000 and S12000
24381: e--PA 1900 for S8000 and S12000
24382: e--PA 850 for S8000 and S12000
24981: e--PA 1900 redesign for S8000 and S12000
24982: e--PA 850 redesign for S8000 and S12000
22179: H2D coupling covering E+P GSM (25 MHz)
22183: S8000 configurations supporting E+P GSM (1st set)
22187: E--GSM/E+P GSM S8000 indoor configuration (H2D)
22188: S8000 configurations supporting E+P GSM (2nd set)
August 2003
Publication History
viii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Updated the mains power supply figure of the S8000 outdoor BTS with ACbox
Updated the GIPS without ADU CPC code
Updated the ADU replacement sheet
CR Q00673780: Add caution in DACS filter replacement procedure
Updated according the following features:
20470: S8000 ind/out up to 3S888 / H2D (1 or 2) + H4D with PA (CMCC)
20468: S8000 ind/out up to 2 S666 / D(1 or 2) + H2D(1 or 2) with PA(CUTC,
CMCC, Microcell)
24399: eDRX 900 for S8000 and S12000
Updated to include S8003 Indoor BTS, feature 24389.
April 2003
CRQ00605784_01: Update the ground fault interrupter CPCcodes according to
the different AC main versions
Update the description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with CBCF
Remove the S8000 indoor BTS products description
Update the rectifiers rule tables according the S8000 configuration
Update the On--site checking procedure following the GIPS introduction
(chapter 4)
Update the preventive maintenance tables
Update the replacement procedure of the internal battery circuit breaker (S8000
Outdoor BTS) following the GIPS introduction
Update the ADU replacement procedure
Update the 680W rectifier description
Update the 680W rectifier filler codes
Add the replacement procedure of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)
Add the replacement procedure of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
GIPS)
Add the replacement procedure of the surge protector (S8000 Oudoor BTS with
GIPS)
January 2003
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential ix
Updated TIL procedures Main RX Connector Alarm and Diversity RX
Connector Alarm (chapter 7)
Updated Figure 7--1 Installation for the TX Test Procedure (chapter 7)
CR Q00206331: Add of the re--activation of the Low Noise DACS thermostat
procedure
CR Q00535124: Modify the lightning protector of the 48 V box reference
CR Q00535131: Upgrade the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 outdoor) references
CR Q00517911: Modify the DSC board characteristics
CR Q00571775: Specify the single phase and tri--phase AC lightning protector
references
Add the power on / off procedure of a S8000 BTS Outdoor with GIPS.
Modify the battery circuit breaker reference
Add the GIPS specific actions throughout the document
Add the ADU replacement procedure
Add the circuit breakers of the ADU replacement procedure
Add the 680W rectifier replacement procedure
December 2002
The following changes were made throughout the document:
Add of the re--activation of the DACS thermostat procedure
Update paragraph 6.2.58 Replacement of a RF--combiner module (DP, H2Dor
H4D)
Update paragraph 6.2.64 Replacement of a Tx--filter module (TX--F)
Add cautions regards the correct locking of the cabinet hoods in chapter 5 and 6
Upgrade according to the following feature:
PR1505: S8000/S12000 High Power PA (60W)
Add RF--Combiner H4D module PEC and CPC codes and description
Add the GIPS module and the associated AC box description (chapter 2)
Describe the replacement procedure of the single and the tri--phase lightning
protector replacement kit (paragraph 6.2.61 and 6.2.63)
Change the chapter 1 title into How to use this manual
Publication History
x
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Updated chapter 7 (TIL) to include new alarms and incorporate review
comments
October 2002
Update after internal review:
Minor editorial update carried out on all chapters.
August 2002
System release: GSM/BSS V13
August 2002
Update of Battery discharge times (Chapter 3)
Introduction of 850 MHz and new FRUs, ePA, eDRX 850, ...
(Chapters 2 and 6) according to EC 10309859
Introduction of lighting protector kit and of new door gaskets (Chapters 5 and 6)
March 2002
Introduction of ePA codes, update of GTW codes
July 2001
Minor editorial update
October 2000
Modification for V13.0 system release
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential xi
System release: GSM/BSS V12
September 2001
The following changes were made in individual chapters:
Chapters 5 and 6:
update of CPC and PEC codes
introduction of new FRUs in testing and replacement procedures
new replacement procedures for external batteries
new replacement procedures for 75 ohms kit
June 2001
Update for V12.4C system release.
Chapters 2, 3, 5 and 6: triphase AC box type 5 and tri--phase AC lightning
protector type 4/5
Chapter 2: New configurations
Chapters 2, 5 6: Battery polarities cf. battery cabinet
Chapters 2, 5 6: New hood for S8000 BTS
Chapter 6:
BRC module
new cositing combiners
SR 30319838: Replacement of external battery cabinet circuit breakers
Update codes for 75Wbox
All chapters: New eDRX module
September 2000
Introduction of a battery cabinet (chapters 2, 3, 5 and 6).
June 2000
Update for V12 system release after review (PE/DCL/GES/201).
The following change was made in individual chapters:
Chapter 5 and chapter 6, updated for SR30321012 (update of the product
references of AC boxes and AC lightning protectors)
Publication History
xii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
April 2000
Update for V12 system release.
integration of the triphase AC box type 4
integration of the cavities
Chapter 7 Appendix: DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual :
minor terminology update
Chapter 3 and chapter 6, updated for CSREE00342 (the LOC LEDis the LC
LED)
Chapter 6, updated for CSRGV00043 (the DRX is reset before unlocking the
DRX)
November 1999
Minor editorial update.
November 1999
Update for V12 system release after review.
November 1999
Integration of the Low Noise DACS.
Adaptation for the Standard DACS.
new hood for the BTS with DACS (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
new door gaskets or hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential xiii
Chapter 6 Replacement procedures:
new procedure Replacement of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
adaptation of the procedures Replacement of the DACS control assembly
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) and Replacement of the DACS twin blower (S8000
Outdoor BTS)
product reference change for the power supplyrack of the seven--rectifier type
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Chapter 7 Appendix: DACS and LowNoise DACS technical manual, updated
after platform validation:
new paragraph Low Noise DACS technical manual
September 1999
The following change was made in individual chapters:
Chapter 5 Preventive maintenance procedures and chapter 6 Replacement
procedures, updated after platform validation:
modified procedures
added intervention time, tools required, impact of the replacement on the
service, equipment location
Chapter 4, updated for SR30111897 (S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply
hierarchy)
June 1999
Update for V12 system release after review (PE/DCL/GES/169), Chapters 1, 3 to
7, and 9.
Publication History
xiv
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
March 1999
Deletion of Chapter 5 (fault numbers are now described in NTP < 39 >).
Update for SR30101332 (S8000 Indoor BTS power supply hierarchy with BCF),
Chapter 4.
Update for SR30102463 (CBCF subsystem), Chapter 4.
Update for SR30101736 (DRX replacement procedure), Chapter 7.
Former versions of this document refer to obsolete BSS system versions. Therefore, the
publication history is not applicable.
Publication History Nortel Networks Confidential xv
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Table of contents
xvi
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
About this document 0--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applicability 0--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience 0--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites for use 0--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documents 0--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How this document is organized 0--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typographic conventions 0--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vocabulary conventions 0--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory information 0--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety regulations 0--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 How to use this manual 1--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Introduction 1--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Corrective maintenance 1--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Preventive maintenance 1--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3 Intervention restrictions 1--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Description of the cabinets 2--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Presentation 2--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Composition of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Introduction 2--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the BCF 2--1 . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the CBCF 2--6 . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Description of an S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet 2--10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Description of an S8000 Outdoor external battery cabinet 2--11 . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS products 2--12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.7 Location 2--15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.8 Cross--reference between the equipment item and the replacement sheets for the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Composition of the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Introduction 2--54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the BCF 2--54 . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF 2--56 . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 Description of an S8000 Indoor extension cabinet 2--58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 Location 2--59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.6 Cross--reference between the equipment and the maintenance sheets for the
S8000 Indoor BTS 2--76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents Nortel Networks Confidential xvii
2.4 Composition of the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Introduction 2--86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Description of an S8003 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF 2--86 . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Description of the S8003 Indoor BTS products 2--87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Location 2--89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 Cross--reference between the equipment and the maintenance sheets for the
S8003 Indoor BTS 2--94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Description of a start--up 3--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Introduction 3--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply 3--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Power supplies 3--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Distribution of power supplies 3--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Batteries (optional) 3--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 S8000 Indoor BTS power supply 3--14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Power supplies 3--14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS power supply 3--18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Power supplies 3--18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS power--on/power--off 3--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Power--on 3--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Power--off 3--24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 S8000 Indoor BTS power--on/power--off 3--27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Power--on 3--27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Power--off 3--28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 S8003 Indoor BTS power--on/power--off 3--29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Power--on 3--29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Power--off 3--30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Start--up phases 3--31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Faults without alarms at the OMC--R 4--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction 4--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Fault location 4--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 BTS state 4--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 On--site checking procedures 4--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
xviii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4.2.3 On--site checking procedures for S8003 BTS 4--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Preventive maintenance procedures 5--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction 5--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Presentation 5--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Test schedule 5--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Replacement schedule 5--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule 5--7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.5 Description of a preventive maintenance procedure sheet 5--10 . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 On--site checks 5--11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Preliminary checks before performing preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . .
5--11
5.2.2 Final checks after having performed preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . .
5--13
5.3 Check at the OMC--R 5--14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 Preliminary checks before performing preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . .
5--14
5.3.2 Final checks after having performed preventive maintenance procedures . . . . . . .
5--14
5.4 Preventive maintenance procedure sheets 5--15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Test of the AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--15 . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Test of the AC lightning protectors (battery cabinet) 5--35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 Test of the internal and external batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--39 . . . . .
5.4.4 Test of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 5--57 . .
5.4.5 Test of the door gasket or hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--63 . . . . . . .
5.4.6 Test of the external alarm primary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) . . . . .
5--70
5.4.7 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) . . .
5--74
5.4.8 Test of the ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--78 . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.9 Test of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--85
5.4.10 Test of the PCM lightning protectors (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 5--89 . . . . . . . . .
5.4.11 Test of the secondary lightning protector (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
5--93
5.4.12 Test of the fans (S8003 Indoor BTS) 5--100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.13 DACS Preventive Maintenance 5--104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Replacement procedures 6--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction 6--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Presentation 6--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents Nortel Networks Confidential xix
6.1.2 Description of a replacement procedure sheet 6--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 Preliminary operations 6--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 Ensure the hood of the outdoor cabinet is properly closed 6--6 . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.5 Tools 6--6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Replacement procedure sheets 6--7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Replacement of the ALCO board 6--11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Replacement of a CMCF board
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--14 . . .
6.2.3 Replacement of a CPCMI board
6.2.4 Replacement of a CSWM board 6--24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.5 Replacement of a DSC board 6--28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.6 Replacement of a GTW board 6--31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.7 Replacement of a PCMI board 6--34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.8 Replacement of the PSCMD board 6--38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.9 Replacement of the RECAL board
6.2.10 Replacement of a SYNC board 6--44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.11 Replacement of an AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--47 . . . .
6.2.12 Replacement of the ADU circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS) . . . . . .
6--68
6.2.13 Replacement of the AC breaker (battery cabinet) 6--69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.14 Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--72 . . . . . . . . .
6.2.15 Replacement and cleaning of the ACU filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--83 . . .
6.2.16 Replacement of the ACU or DACS gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--87 . . . .
6.2.17 Replacement of a base cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS) 6--92 . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.18 Replacement of a BCF cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS) 6--95 . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.19 Replacement of a BCF power supply 6--99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.20 Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--102 . . . .
6.2.21 Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--110 . . . . . . . . .
6.2.22 Replacement of the DACS brass bushing (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--115 . . . .
6.2.23 Replacement of the DACS capacitor (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--118 . . . . . . . . .
6.2.24 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--122 . .
6.2.25 Replacement of the DACS filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--145 . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.26 Replacement of the DACS air inlet clogged switch
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.27 Replacement of the DACS heater (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--153 . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.28 Replacement of the DACS thermistor (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--157 . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
xx
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.29 Replacement of the DACS thermostat (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--160 . . . . . . .
6.2.30 Replacement of the auto--reset DACS heater thermostat (S8000 Outdoor BTS) .
6--164
6.2.31 Replacement of the DACS (extended) transformer
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.32 Replacement of a DACS twin blower (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--172 . . . . . . . .
6.2.33 Replacement of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.34 Replacement of the door gasket
(S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.35 Repair or replacement of the door gaskets (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--207 . . . .
6.2.36 Replacement of a DRX module
6.2.37 Replacement of an external alarm primary lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) .
6--225
6.2.38 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.39 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA36GA 6--232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.40 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA92BB (SBS 60) 6--236 . . . . . . . .
6.2.41 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA92EA (SBS C11) 6--240 . . . . . . .
6.2.42 Replacement of the external battery circuit breaker (Battery cabinet NTQA36AA)
6--244
6.2.43 Replacement of the DC breaker (battery cabinet) 6--249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.44 Replacement of the fan filter (S8000 Indoor BTS) 6--252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.45 Replacement of an F--type converter
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--255 . . .
6.2.46 Replacement of a ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC mains box) .
6--258
6.2.47 Repair or replacement of the hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--268 . . . .
6.2.48 Replacement of the internal batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--274 . . . . . . . . .
6.2.49 Replacement of the internal battery circuit breaker
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.50 Replacement of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box (S8000 Outdoor BTS) . .
6--285
6.2.51 Replacement of a PCM lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--288 . . . .
6.2.52 Replacement of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet) 6--291 . . . . . . . . .
6.2.53 Replacement of a power amplifier (PA) module
6.2.54 Replacement of the power supply rack of the seven--rectifier type
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.55 Replacement of the power supply rack of the six--rectifier type (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
6--307
Table of contents Nortel Networks Confidential xxi
6.2.56 Replacement of a rectifier of the seven-- rectifier type (500W rectifier module)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.57 Replacement of a rectifier of the six--rectifier type (600W rectifier module)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.58 Replacement of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.59 Replacement of a rectifier of the GIPS (680W rectifier module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
6--328
6.2.60 Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)
6--331
6.2.61 Replacement of a (CC8) remote tunable cavity combiner (S8000 Indoor BTS) . . .
6--334
6.2.62 Replacement of a RF--combiner module (DP, H2D or H4D) (S8000 Outdoor BTS,
S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.63 Replacement of a Rx--splitter
6.2.64 Replacement of the secondary lightning protector (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS) 6--354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.65 Replacement of the ADU AC surge protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS) . .
6--357
6.2.66 Replacement of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS) 6--358 . .
6.2.67 Replacement of the single--phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
AC main box) 6--360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.68 Replacement of the thermostats (S8000 Outdoor BTS) 6--370 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.69 Replacement of the tri--phase AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC
main box) 6--373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.70 Replacement of a Tx--filter module (TX--F)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--381 . . .
6.2.71 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) . . .
6--386
6.2.72 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 BTS Outdoor) 6--390 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.73 Replacement of the air filter (S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.74 Replacement of a fan (S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.75 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC single phase lightning protector . .
6--403
6.2.76 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC three phase lightning protector . .
6--407
7 On--site TIL use 7--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Introduction 7--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Preliminary actions 7--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Actions at the OMC--R 7--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of contents
xxii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.2.2 On--site actions 7--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Corrective action sheets 7--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Alarm: High temperature alarm 7--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Alarm: High current alarm 7--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Alarm: Low power alarm 7--5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.4 Alarm: VSWR alarm 7--6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.5 Alarm: Automatic level control 7--8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.6 Alarm: PA power shutdown alarm 7--12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.7 Alarm: Main RX connector alarm 7--13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.8 Alarm: Diversity RX connector alarm 7--14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.9 Alarm: Diversity loss -- main channel alarm 7--15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.10 Alarm: Diversity loss -- diversity channel alarm 7--16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.11 Alarm: RX PLL alarm 7--17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.12 Alarm: TX alarm 7--18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.13 Alarm: BB filter alarm 7--20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 TX test 7--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Introduction 7--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 TX test procedure 7--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual 8--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 DACS technical manual 8--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Technical aspects 8--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 DACS operation 8--7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Troubleshooting 8--12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Low Noise DACS technical manual 8--17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Technical aspects 8--17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Low Noise DAC operation 8--21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Troubleshooting 8--27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidential xxiii
Figure 1--1 Corrective maintenance diagnostic 1--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--2 Guide to using the maintenance manual 1--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--1 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs) 2--16 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--2 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACS -- type 1) 2--17 . . .
Figure 2--3 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs -- type 2) 2--18 . . .
Figure 2--4 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs -- type 3) 2--19 . . .
Figure 2--5 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF 2--20
Figure 2--6 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the CBCF 2--21
Figure 2--7 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling . . . . . .
2--22
Figure 2--8 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D coupling .
2--23
Figure 2--9 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling . . . . . .
2--24
Figure 2--10 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D coupling .
2--25
Figure 2--11 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with tx--filter/duplexer
coupling 2--26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--12 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with tx--filter/duplexer
coupling 2--27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--13 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--28 . .
Figure 2--16 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--31 .
Figure 2--19 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--34 . . . . .
Figure 2--24 AC box / GIPS with E, F, or UK type user AC plug 2--39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--25 AC box / GIPS with US type user AC plug 2--40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--26 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)
2--41
Figure 2--27 External battery cabinet NTQA36AB of the S8000 outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries) . . . .
2--42
Figure 2--28 External battery cabinet NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11 batteries) 2--43
List of figures
xxiv
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 2--29 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet 2--60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--30 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet 2--61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--31 View of Open S8000 Indoor BTS 2--62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--32 Hinge of the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--33 Fan Unit of S8000 Indoor BTS 2--64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--34 Filter Holder of S8000 Indoor BTS 2--65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--35 Top View of the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--36 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF 2--67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--37 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H2D coupling . . . . . . .
2--68
Figure 2--38 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D coupling . . .
2--69
Figure 2--39 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H4D coupling . . . . . . .
2--70
Figure 2--40 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D coupling . . .
2--71
Figure 2--41 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with tx--filter/duplexer coupling
2--72
Figure 2--42 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with tx--filter/duplexer
coupling 2--73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--43 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with CC8 coupling . . . . . . .
2--74
Figure 2--44 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with CC8 coupling . . .
2--75
Figure 2--45 S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D coupling) 2--90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--46 S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the modules 2--91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--47 S8003 Indoor BTS: modules numbering 2--92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--48 S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer + Tx Filter 2--93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--1 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (single--phase) 3--5 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--2 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (split single--phase) 3--6 . . . . . . .
Figure 3--3 Mains power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS (tri--phase types 1, 2 and 3) 3--7
Figure 3--4 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (tri--phase type 4 or 5) 3--8 . . . .
Figure 3--5 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Single--phase) . . . .
3--9
Figure 3--6 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Split--phase) . . . . . .
3--10
Figure 3--7 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS (Tri--phase) . . . . . . .
3--11
Figure 3--8 --48 V Power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (BCF or CBCF) 3--12 . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidential xxv
Figure 3--9 --48V power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS 3--13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--10 --48 V Power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS (BCF or CBCF) 3--15 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--11 View of the --48 V power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS 3--16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--12 Wiring of the S8000 Indoor BTS --48 V power supply 3--17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--13 Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS --48V power supply 3--19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--14 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS 3--32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--15 Start--up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF 3--35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--16 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS using LEDs of the CBCF 3--37 . . . . . .
Figure 5--1 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures 5--12 . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--2 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUs 5--17
Figure 5--3 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS 5--18
Figure 5--4 Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--19
Figure 5--5 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--25 . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--6 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--7 View of the single--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
5--27
Figure 5--8 View of the single--phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--28
Figure 5--9 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--29 . . . . . . .
Figure 5--10 View of the split single--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--11 View of the split single--phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--12 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--32 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--13 View of the tri--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--14 View of the tri--phase AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--15 Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure (battery cabinet) 5--36 . . . .
Figure 5--16 Location of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet) 5--38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--17 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUS 5--41 . . .
Figure 5--18 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS 5--42 . . .
Figure 5--19 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries) 5--43
Figure 5--20 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries) 5--44 . . . .
Figure 5--21 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries) 5--45 . . .
Figure 5--22 Flowchart of the test procedure of the batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--46 .
Figure 5--23 View of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures
xxvi
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 5--25 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS
5--59
Figure 5--26 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet (S8003 Indoor BTS) 5--60 . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--27 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS 5--61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--28 Location of the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs
5--64
Figure 5--29 Location of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS 5--65 . . .
Figure 5--30 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . .
5--66
Figure 5--31 Flowchart of the test procedure of the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . .
5--68
Figure 5--32 Flowchart of the test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--33 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
5--73
Figure 5--34 Flowchart of the test procedure of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--35 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . .
5--77
Figure 5--36 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs . . . . .
5--79
Figure 5--37 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS . . . . . . . .
5--80
Figure 5--38 Flowchart of the test procedure of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS .
5--81
Figure 5--39 View of the single--phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--83
Figure 5--40 View of the tri--phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--84 . . .
Figure 5--41 Flowchart of the test procedure of the 48 V box lightning protector of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--42 View of the 48 V box lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--88 . . . . . .
Figure 5--43 Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--90
Figure 5--44 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--92 . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--45 Flowchart of the test procedure for the secondary lightning protectors (S8000 Indoor BTS
and S8003 Indoor BTS) 5--95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--46 Location of the secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS
5--97
Figure 5--47 Location of the secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the S8003 Indoor BTS
5--98
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidential xxvii
Figure 5--48 View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS . . .
5--99
Figure 5--49 Flowchart of the test procedure of the S8003 Indoor fans 5--101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--50 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet 5--102 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--51 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit 5--124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5--52 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 5--125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--1 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures 6--5 . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--2 ALCO board 6--13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--3 CMCF board 6--19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--4 CPCMI board (for GSM 900/1800)
(S8000 Outdoor/Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--5 CPCMI board (1900) 6--23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--6 CSWM board 6--27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--7 DSC board 6--30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--8 GTW board 6--33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--9 PCMI board (900/1800) 6--36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--10 PCMI board (1900) 6--37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--11 PSCMD board 6--40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--12 RECAL board 6--43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--13 SYNC board 6--46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--14 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--53 . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--15 Side view of the single--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--54 . . .
Figure 6--16 Side view of the single--phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
6--55
Figure 6--17 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--18 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--57 . . . . . . .
Figure 6--19 Side view of the split single--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . .
6--58
Figure 6--20 Side view of the split single--phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--59
Figure 6--21 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--60 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--22 Side view of the tri--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--61 . . . . . .
Figure 6--23 Side view of the tri--phase AC box type 2, type 3, type 4 or 5 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . .
6--62
Figure 6--24 Main circuit breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
6--63
Figure 6--25 Climatic system breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--64
List of figures
xxviii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--26 Climatic system breaker of the tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--65
Figure 6--27 Rectifier circuit breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS .
6--66
Figure 6--28 Rectifier circuit breaker of the tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--67
Figure 6--29 Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet) 6--71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--30 ACU climatic units of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--31 Climatic unit interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--77 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--32 Cable exit of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--33 Different sides of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--34 View of the ACU filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--35 View of the ACU gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--36 View of the DACS gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--37 Base cabinet ventilation rack of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--38 BCF cabinet ventilation of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--39 Top view of the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--40 BCF power supply 6--101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--41 DACS climatic system of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--42 DACS interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--43 View of the DACS of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--44 DACS actuator of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--45 DACS capacitor of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--46 DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--47 Control assembly of the Low noise DACS and of the DACS control kit of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--48 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS 6--138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--49 Wiring for the Standard DACS without DACS control kit nor DACS multispeed blower kit . .
6--139
Figure 6--50 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--51 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two multispeed blowers . . .
6--141
Figure 6--52 Wiring for the Standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for FAN B) 6--142
Figure 6--53 Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit 6--143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--54 Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS multispeed blower
(FAN A 6--144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--56 DACS air inlet switch of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--57 DACS heater of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidential xxix
Figure 6--58 DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--59 DACS transformer of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--61 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS 6--186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--62 Wiring for the standard DACS without control kit Nor multispeed blower kit 6--187 .
Figure 6--63 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--64 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two multispeed blowers . . .
6--189
Figure 6--65 Wiring for the standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for FAN B) 6--190 .
Figure 6--66 Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit 6--191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--67 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed blower (FAN A) . .
6--192
Figure 6--68 DACS twin blowers of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--69 DACS Control assembly of the Low noise and of the DACS control kit of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--70 Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--71 Cut of the gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--72 Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS 6--205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--73 View of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--74 Silicone deposit at a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--211 . . . . . . .
Figure 6--75 Front view of an inner corner of a door of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--212 . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--76 Front view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--213 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--77 Side view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--214 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--78 Front view of two door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--79 DRX module 6--223 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--80 eDRX module 6--224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--81 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
6--227
Figure 6--82 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . .
6--230
Figure 6--84 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries) 6--239 . . . .
Figure 6--85 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries) 6--243 . . .
Figure 6--86 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)
6--247
Figure 6--87 External battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--88 DC breaker of the battery cabinet 6--251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures
xxx
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--89 View of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS 6--254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--90 F--type converter 6--257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--91 Single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--92 Tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--93 View of the ground fault interrupter of the single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--264
Figure 6--94 View of the ground fault interrupter of the tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--265
Figure 6--95 Internal and external views of the tri--phase ground fault interrupter of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--266 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--96 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs 6--270 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--97 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS 6--271 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--98 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--99 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--100 Internal battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--282 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--101 View of the 48 V box lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--287 . . . . . . .
Figure 6--102 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--290 . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--103 Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet) 6--293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--104 Power amplifier (type 1) 6--297 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--105 Power amplifier (type 2) 6--298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--106 High Power Amplifier (HePA) 6--299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--107 Power supply rack (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--304 . . . . . .
Figure 6--109 Top view of the PCU (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--306 . . . . .
Figure 6--110 Power supply rack (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1) 6--310 . .
Figure 6--114 Top view of the PCU (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1) 6--314
Figure 6--115 Top view of the PCU (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 2) 6--315
Figure 6--117 Rectifier (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--118 Rectifier (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1) 6--321 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--119 GIPS 6--326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--120 View of the DCU 6--327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--121 680W rectifier of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures Nortel Networks Confidential xxxi
Figure 6--122 View of the ADU of the GIPS 6--333 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--123 Remote tunable cavity combiner (CC8) 6--337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--124 RF--combiner (duplexer)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--343 . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--125 RF--combiner (H2D)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS) 6--344 . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--126 RF--combiner (H4D with VSWR)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS) 6--345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--127 RF--combiner (H4D without VSWR)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS) 6--346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--128 Rx--splitter 6--352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--129 Higher and lower Rx--splitter 6--353 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--130 View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the S8000 Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS 6--356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--131 Single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--132 Single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . .
6--365
Figure 6--133 Single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . .
6--366
Figure 6--134 Split single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--135 Split single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS .
6--368
Figure 6--136 Split single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS .
6--369
Figure 6--137 Tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 6--378 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--138 Tri--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . .
6--379
Figure 6--139 Tri--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . .
6--380
Figure 6--140 Tx--filter 6--385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--141 S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top 6--388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--142 S8003 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top 6--389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--143 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module 6--392 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--144 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module 6--393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--145 View of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS 6--396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--146 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet 6--401 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--147 Removal of an S8003 Indoor fan from the fan tray 6--402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--148 Lightning protector cables 6--406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--149 Single phase AC lightning protector 6--406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of figures
xxxii
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--150 Lightning protector cables 6--410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6--151 Single phase AC lightning protector 6--410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7--1 Installation for the TX test procedure 7--23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8--1 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 8--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8--2 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit 8--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8--3 Re--activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 8--16 . . . . . . . .
Figure 8--4 Re--activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 8--31 . . . . . . . .
List of tables Nortel Networks Confidential xxxiii
Table 2--1 ACU climatic unit location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--2 DACS climatic system location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--3 DRX location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--4 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--45 . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--5 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--45 . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--6 External battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--7 F--type converter location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--8 Internal battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--9 H4D--LN--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--10 H4D--VSWR--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--47 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--11 LN--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--12 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--13 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--14 PA Power amplifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--15 Rectifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--16 TX--FILTER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--17 VSWR--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--18 ALCO board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--19 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--20 CSWM board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--21 DSC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--22 GTW board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--23 PCMI board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--24 SYNC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--25 CMCF board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--26 CPCMI board Location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--27 RECAL board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS 2--53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--28 DRX location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--29 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--77 . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--30 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--78 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--31 F--type converter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--32 H4D--LN--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--33 H4D--VSWR--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--34 Fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--35 LN--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--36 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of tables
xxxiv
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Table 2--37 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--38 PA power amplifier location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--39 TX--filter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--40 VSWR--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--41 ALCO board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--42 BCF fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--43 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--44 CSWM board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--45 DSC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--46 GTW board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--47 PCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--48 SYNC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--49 CMCF board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--50 CPCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--51 RECAL board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS 2--85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--52 DRX location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--53 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--94 . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--54 DRX main reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--94 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--55 F--type converter location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--56 LNA--combiner location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--57 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--58 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--59 PA power amplifier location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--60 CMCF board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--61 CPCMI board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--62 RECAL board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS 2--96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--1 Discharge times of the batteries 3--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--2 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2) 3--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--3 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2) 3--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--4 Charging times on the batteries 3--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--5 Storage duration depending of storage temperature 3--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--6 Fuse description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS 3--25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--7 Fuse description of the S8000 Indoor BTS 3--28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--8 Fuse description of the S8003 Indoor BTS 3--30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--1 Test performed twice a year 5--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--2 Tests performed once a year 5--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of tables Nortel Networks Confidential xxxv
Table 5--3 Replacements performed twice a year 5--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--4 Replacements performed once a year 5--4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--5 Replacements performed every four years 5--5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--6 Replacements performed every five years 5--5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--7 Replacement performed every six years 5--6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--8 Replacements performed every ten years 5--6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--9 Replacement performed every fifteen years 5--7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5--10 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8000 Outdoor BTS . . . . . . . .
5--8
Table 5--11 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8000 Indoor BTS 5--8
Table 5--12 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the S8003 Indoor BTS 5--9
Table 6--1 Prom Numbers on GTW Board 6--31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this document Nortel Networks Confidential 0--1
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
This document describes the corrective and preventive maintenance procedures
applicable to:
the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900
Applicability
This document is one of the maintenance documents concerning the Base
Transceiver Stations (BTS) type S8000 and S8003 of the cellular radio telephone
system.
This document applies to the V15.0.1 system release.
V15.0.1 features are not supported on the BSC2G. BSC2G functionality is kept on
BSCs running the 14.3 software load.
Audience
This document is intended for operations and maintenance personnel and for those
who want to knowthe principles of the corrective and preventive BTSmaintenance.
Prerequisites for use
The readers must be familiar with the following NTPs:
< 01 > : BSS Overview
< 51 > : TML (BTS) User Manual
< 63 > : S8000/S8002/S8003/S8006 BTS Reference Manual
< 103 > : Fault Number Description -- Volume 3 of 6: S8000, S8002, S8003
and S8006 BTS
Readers should also refer to the following NTPs:
< 07 > : BSS Operating Principles
< 101 > : Fault Number Description -- Volume 1 of 6: BSC and TCU
< 105 > : Fault Number Description -- Volume 5 of 6: Advanced Maintenance
Procedures
< 124 > : BSS Parameter Dictionary
< 125 > : Observation Counter Dictionary
About this document
0--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
< 129 >: OMC--R User Manual -- Volume 2 of 3: Configuration, Performance,
and Maintenance menus
< 130 > : OMC--R User Manual -- Volume 3 of 3: Security, Administration,
SMS--CB, and Help menus
Related documents
The NTPs listed in the above paragraph are quoted in the document.
How this document is organized
This document consists of eight chapters:
Chapter 1 How to use this manual describes how to use this maintenance
manual.
Chapter 2 Description of the cabinets of the S8000 and S8003 BTS provides a
brief description of the boards andmodules containedin S8000and S8003BTSs.
Chapter 3 Description of a start--up describes the procedure for starting up an
S8000 and S8003 BTS and for monitoring the BTS start--up. It also provides a
brief description of the BTS power supply.
Chapter 4 Location of faults without alarms at the OMC--R describes how to
locate faults when some components of the S8000 and S8003 BTS do not send
alarms to the OMC--R.
Chapter 5 Preventive maintenance procedures provides a guide for
maintenance personnel to perform preventive maintenance to the S8000 and
S8003 BTS. Preventive maintenance allows you to take recommended actions at
scheduled intervals to decrease the number of problems that can affect the BTS.
Chapter 6 Replacement procedures provides a guide for maintenance
personnel to perform replacement procedures to the S8000 and S8003 BTS.
Replacement procedures allow you to replace boards and modules of the BTS.
These procedures are applicable:
when an item of equipment is faulty
when an item of equipment has to be replaced according to the preventive
maintenance
Chapter 7 On--site TILuse provides a guide of actions to be taken in the case of
the fault number 1067 on some equipments of the S8000 and S8003 BTS.
Chapter 8 Appendix: DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manuals
provides a technical and operational description and describes troubleshooting.
Typographic conventions
Graphic conventions
The following symbols are used in flowcharts.
Start of the flowchart, showing a start point in the form of the
state of the subsystem or a fault number
Action to be taken by the operator
Condition
Action to be taken before or after the test
Pointer allowing the flowchart to be divided
Vocabulary conventions
The glossary is included in NTP <00>.
Regulatory information
Refer to NTP <01>.
About this document
0--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Safety regulations
Introduction
All the following steps must be taken during the various cabinet maintenance
procedures in order to guarantee personnel and equipment safety.
The following aspects must be taken into account:
general personnel safety instructions
equipment safety instructions
Precautionary messages
Caution, warning, and danger messages indicate the following possible risks:
CAUTION
Impact on the service and on the equipment
DANGER
Electric shock
DANGER
Environment and personnel protection
CAUTION
ESDS handling precautions
Personnel and equipment safety
General personnel safety instructions
The personnel must obey the safety instructions specific to the installation site:
rules concerning the premises (see instructions posted on site or in the building)
rules linked to the general personnel safety instructions
The personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work according to the
security standards.
The cabinets external mains power supply is switched off by switching off the
circuit breaker on the operator box.
Note: No work must be done on the cabinet internal wiring without first cuttingits
external mains power supply.
This BTS has been evaluated under IEEE C95.1 requirements, regarding safety
levels with respect to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields,
3 kHz to 300 GHz.
The leakage fields and equivalent power densities are orders of magnitude less than
the maximum permissible exposures (MPEs) given in the IEEE safety guidelines.
CAUTION
Working instructions
The personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work
according to the local security standards.
CAUTION
During every maintenance intervention, and especially when
handling the boards, the operator must wear an antistatic bracelet.
DANGER
Electric shock
Never replace a power supply when energized.
About this document
0--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment safety instructions
S8000 Outdoor BTS
The maintenance of an S8000 Outdoor BTS is possible up to --40C ( --40F).
ABTS with its doors open stays operational for three hours at --10C( --14F), and
for one hour at --40C ( --40F).
In the case of rainy or snowy weather, do not open the cabinet doors before firstly
setting up a tent.
In windy conditions, be careful when opening and closing cabinet doors to prevent
damage to equipment or harm to people. Hold doors firmly until you properly
secure the door latch mechanism. It is not recommended to do maintenance, when
the wind is over 70 km/h.
S8003 Indoor BTS
DANGER
Electric shock
Ensure that the unused power cable for the Type F power supply
module is capped and secured before powering up the S8003 BTS
and/or performing any maintenance procedure (see the following
figure).
Filler F--type converter 0
Cap
Ty--wrap
Power supply cable for F--type 0
Power supply cable (not used)
Note: The power supply cable that is not used must be capped and secured
About this document
0--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
How to use this manual Nortel Networks Confidential 1--1
1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 Corrective maintenance
The network maintenance is based on the graphical supervision of the network.
It is also based on the identification and the replacement of faulty items of
equipment, using the alarms and the notifications described in NTP <39>.
This process is divided into two steps:
locating and identifying the faulty items of equipment (see Figure 1--1),
replacing the faulty items of equipment, using the replacement procedures given
in this manual (see Figure 1--2)
When a faulty item of equipment sends an alarm to the OMC--R, this alarm is
identified by a fault number. NTP 128 gives the procedures associated with the
various fault numbers.
When a faulty item of equipment triggers several alarms, NTP <105> enables the
operator to locate this faulty item of equipment. It also helps the operator when an
abnormal operation occurs in a BTS, a TCU, a BSC, PCM links, or on any BTS
entities.
1.1.2 Preventive maintenance
The implementation of the preventive maintenance procedures is the responsibility
of each customer.
Preventive maintenance is used to periodically test the items of equipment that do
not directly trigger any alarm at the OMC--R. However, the execution of these
procedures may trigger alarms at the OMC--R.
This process is divided into two steps (see Figure 1--1):
the test procedures of the items of equipment
the replacement procedures of the items of equipment
All these procedures are described in this manual.
How to use this manual
1--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
1.1.3 Intervention restrictions
There may be a lapse of time between the identification of the alarmat the OMC--R
and the time the operator responsible for the intervention arrives at the site.
The operator must be synchronized with the OMC--R (by telephone) before an
on--site intervention, in the following cases:
isolating procedure
intervention because alarms are triggered at the OMC--R
completion of an on--site intervention
return to service procedure
How to use this manual Nortel Networks Confidential 1--3
Change of the
site state
The fault
number is
known
Multiple
alarms
Abnormal operation
of a BSC, a BTS or
links
Refer to NTP <105>
Detection of a problem
on the BSS
Perform the location
procedure(s)
described in NTP <32>.
Perform the procedure
associated with the fault
number described in NTP 32.
Perform the replacement
procedure described in
Chapter 6.
Consult the Index of
fault numbers in
NTP128 to find out which
page(s) describes the
corrective action for this
fault.
Consult NTP 32.
Choose the case
concerned by the
system state.
Figure 1--1 Corrective maintenance diagnostic
How to use this manual
1--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Start:
recommended test
schedule
Start:
recommended
replacement schedule
Localization
Identification
Diagnostic help
Is a replacement
required?
Procedure associated
with the fault number.
End
Preventive and corrective maintenance Fault number description
Replacement procedure
described in Chapter 6.
Yes
No
Start:
notifications and/or alarms
Test procedure described
in Chapter 5.
NTP 128 NTP < 48 >
Figure 1--2 Guide to using the maintenance manual
Description of the cabinets Nortel Networks Confidential 2--1
2 DESCRIPTION OF THE CABINETS
2.1 Presentation
A description of the cabinets is given for:
the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM 850, 900, 1800 and 1900
the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900, GSM 1800
2.2 Composition of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2.2.1 Introduction
The S8000 Outdoor BTS contains:
one base cabinet
one or two extension cabinets (used according to the configuration type)
one external battery cabinet (optional) per cabinet (base cabinet, extension
cabinet)
Note: There are two types of DRX: DRX and eDRX. The term DRX used alone
refers to the two types unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
For example, if only DRXappears in a sentence (or a diagram), this should
be interpreted as referring to the two types. However, if DRXand/or eDRX
appear in a sentence (or diagram), then the term DRXrefers just to the type
DRX.
2.2.2 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the BCF
The S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 2--1
and Figure 2--3):
one main compartment
one top compartment
2.2.2.1 Description of the main compartment
The maincompartment of the S8000Outdoor base cabinet contains, in its maximum
configuration, the following elements (see Figure 2--5, Figure 2--7,
Figure 2--9 and Figure 2--11):
one Base Common Functions (BCF) subsystem containing the following
elements:
Description of the cabinets
2--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
two Control and SWitching Modules (CSWM)
two GaTeWay boards (GTW)
two SYNChronization boards (SYNC)
four Data Signaling Concentration boards (DSC)
three PCM Interface boards (PCMI)
one Power Supply CoMmanD board (PSCMD)
two or three BCF power supplies 5 V/12 A
one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO)
eight TRXs, made up of:
eight DRXs or eDRXs
eight Power or High Power Amplifiers (PA or HePA)
Note: Eight HePA are supported with thermal and electrical constraints.
RF--combiner modules which can be six D RF--combiners, or six H2D
RF--combiners, or two H4D RF--combiners, or four TX--filters associated with
four D RF--combiners:
six D RF--combiners, each composed of:
one duplexer
one LNA--combiner module
one VSWR--combiner module (optional)
six H2D RF--combiners, each composed of:
one duplexer
one hybrid coupler
two H4D RF--combiners, each composed of:
one duplexer
three hybrid couplers
four TX--filters associated with four D RF--combiners:
four D RF--combiners, each composed of:
-- one duplexer
-- one LNA--combiner module
-- one VSWR--combiner module (optional)
four TX--filters, each composed of:
-- one TX--filter
one COMbiner InterCOnnection panel (COMICO)
two F--type converters (one is optional)
six reception couplers (Rx-splitters)
one power supply rack contains the following elements:
six rectifiers or seven rectifiers
one Power Control Unit (PCU)
or one GSM Integrated Power System (GIPS) containing the following
elements:
up to five rectifiers
one DC Distribution and Control Unit (DCU)
one AC Distribution Unit (ADU)
one high temperature thermostat located above the BCF
one low temperature thermostat located under the power supply rack
one single-phase, split single--phase or tri-phase AC box containing the
following elements:
single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 2--13 to Figure 2--15):
two supply filters
a main circuit breaker
a climatic system circuit breaker
a rectifier circuit breaker
one electrical outlet with differential (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
one AC lightning protector
one AC voltage supply indicator light (type 1)
two fuses (type 1)
split single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 2--16 to
Figure 2--18):
three supply filters
a main circuit breaker
a climatic system circuit breaker
2--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a rectifier circuit breaker
two electrical outlets with differential
one fuse (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
tri-phase AC box (types 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 see Figure 2--19 to 2--23 :
four supply filters
a general stop button
the ACU0 and ACU1 climatic system breakers (type 1) or the DACS
climatic system breaker (types 2, 3 and 4 )
the rectifier circuit breaker (types 1, 2 and 3) or three rectifier circuit
breakers (type 4)
one electrical outlet with differential (types 2, 3 and 4 ) or two ones (type 1)
or one AC box / GIPS:
single phase, split phase or three phase input terminal blocks
E, F, UKor US type user ACplug including an ACbreaker with a differential
device and surge protectors
lightning protection modules: (optional, depending on countries):
lightning protection modules type 1:
two ALPROboards maximum, each containing up to eight external alarm
secondary lightning protectors (ALarm PROtection: protection for the
ALCO board external alarms)
one PRIPRO board, containing up to eight primary lightning protectors
(PRImary PROtection: protection for the ALPRO boards)
up to twelve PCM lightning protectors
one external alarm connection box
one PCM connection module
Either lightning protection module type 1 or type 2 is used, no mixed module type
is allowed.
2.2.2.2 Description of the top compartment
The top compartment contains the following elements (see Figure 2--1
and Figure 2--3):
a set of internal batteries (optional)
one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS):
two ACUs (Air Conditioning Unit), each containing the following elements:
one compressor
two blowers, each made up of a condenser and an evaporator
one DACS, containing the following elements:
one filter
twin blowers
one transformer
one thermostat
air inlets and outlets
2--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.2.3 Description of an S8000 Outdoor base cabinet with the CBCF
The S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 2--1
and Figure 2--3):
one top compartment
The maincompartment of the S8000Outdoor base cabinet contains, in its maximum
one Compact BCF (CBCF) subsystem containing the following elements:
three Compact PCM Interface boards (CPCMI)
two Compact Main Common Functions boards (CMCF)
one interconnection BCF ICO board
one CBCF interconnection Back Panel module (CBP)
one REmote Control and ALarm board (RECAL)
eight DRXs or eDRXs
eight Power Amplifiers (PAs) type 1 or type 2 or ePAs or up to six HePA
Unlike the PA type 2, the PA type 1 contains a fuse and can contain a switch.
RF--combiner modules are six D RF--combiners, or six H2D RF--combiners, or
two H4D RF--combiners, or four TX--filters associated with four D
RF--combiners:
one duplexer
one duplexer
one hybrid coupler
one duplexer
four TX--filters associated with four D RF--combiners:
-- one duplexer
four TX--filters, each composed of:
-- one TX--filter
one power supply rack containing the following elements:
elements:
one high temperature thermostat located above the CBCF
one single-phase, split single--phase or tri-phase AC box containing the
following elements:
single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 2--13 to Figure 2--15):
two supply filters
the main circuit breaker
the climatic system circuit breaker
the rectifier circuit breaker
one electrical outlet with differential (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
two fuses (type 1)
2--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
split single-phase AC box (types 1, 2 and 3, see Figure 2--16 to
Figure 2--18):
three supply filters
the main circuit breaker
the climatic system circuit breaker
the rectifier circuit breaker
two electrical outlets with differential
one fuse (types 2 and 3) or two ones (type 1)
tri-phase AC box (types 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 see Figure 2--19 to 2--23 :
four supply filters
the general stop button
the ACU0 and ACU1 climatic system breakers (type 1) or the DACS
climatic system breaker (types 2, 3 and 4)
the rectifier circuit breaker (types 1, 2 and 3) or three rectifier circuit
breakers (type 4)
one electrical outlet with differential (types 2, 3 and 4) or two ones (type 1)
or one AC box / GIPS (S8000 outdoor only) (see Figure 2--24 and
Figure 2--25):
single phase, split phase or three phase input terminal blocks
E, F, UK or US type user AC plug including an AC breaker with differential
device and surge protectors
lightning protection modules:
two ALPRO boards, at the maximum, containing up to eight external
alarm secondary lightning protectors (ALarm PROtection: protection for
the RECAL board external alarms)
one PRIPRO board, containing up to eight primary lightning protectors
(PRImary PROtection: protection for the ALPRO boards)
up to twelve PCM lightning protectors
one external alarm connection box
one PCM connection module
The top compartment contains the following elements (see Figure 2--1
and Figure 2--3):
one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS):
two ACUs (Air Conditioning Unit), each containing the following elements:
one compressor
two blowers, each made up of a condenser and an evaporator
one DACS, containing mainly the following elements:
one filter
twin blowers
one transformer
one thermostat
air inlets and outlets
2--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.2.4 Description of an S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet
The extension cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTSand the base cabinet are alike with
the exception of the missing BCF or CBCF. A filling plate replaces the BCF or the
CBCF (see Figure 2--8, Figure 2--10, and Figure 2--12).
So the extension cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor base cabinet contains two
compartments:
one top compartment
The main compartment of the S8000 Outdoor extension cabinet, in its maximum
configuration, contains the following elements:
one filling plate which replaces the CBCF
one ALarmCOllecting board (ALCO) or one REmote Control and ALarmboard
(RECAL):
one ALCO board in the case of a base cabinet with the BCF
one RECAL board in the case of a base cabinet with the CBCF
eight DRXs or eDRXs
eight Power Amplifiers (PAs, ePAs or six HePA maximum)
two H4D RF--combiners, or four TX--filters associated with four D
RF--combiners
one power supply rack containing the following elements:
elements:
one high temperature thermostat located above the filling plate
one single-phase, split single-phase or tri-phase AC box (type 1, type 2, type 3,
type 4 or 5)
lightning protection modules
The top compartment contains the following elements:
one climatic unit system (ACUs or DACS), containing mainly the following
elements:
twin blowers
one filter
one transformer
one thermostat
if there is no ACU, see the section 2.2.3.2
the air inlets and outlets
2.2.5 Description of an S8000 Outdoor external battery cabinet
The battery cabinet (see Figure 2--26 to Figure 2--28) is designed for an external
usage and is made of:
up to four stacks of four batteries each
a battery thermal probe connected to the positive terminal of the second lower
string
a DC breaker to switch off the external battery backup of the BTS
an AC box providing mains directly from the operator box, containing an RF
filter, a current surge protector and a circuit breaker
a heating and ventilation unit triggered by a thermostat
two thermostats triggering a low and a high temperature alarm respectively
2--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.2.6 Description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS products
2.2.6.1 GSM frequency bands (GSM 900, 1800, 1900, 850, and 850/1900)
The S8000 Outdoor BTS contains eight DRX in maximum configuration. The
following configurations are in Single Band:
Coupling system Monocabinet Bicabinet Tricabinet
D
max 1S222
min. 1S000
D+TX--filter
max 1S444
min. 1O0D
max 2S444
min. 2S000
H2D
max 1O8 H2D
min. 1O0 H2D
max 2S88 H2D
min. 2S00 H2D
max 3S888 H2D
min. 3S000 H2D
max 1S44 H2D
min. 1S00 H2D
max 2S444 H2D
min. 2S000 H2D
max 1S332 H2D
min. 1S000 H2D
max 1S323 H2D
min. 1S003 H2D
max S233
min. S033
max 1S422
min. 1S400
max S242
min. S040
max S224
min. S004
max 2S448 H2D
min. 2S005 H2D
max 2S844 H2D
min. 2S500 H2D
H4D
max 1O8 H4D
min. 1O0 H4D
max 2S88 H4D
min. 2S00 H4D
max 3S888 H4D
min. 3S000 H4D
H2D/H4D
max 2S448 H2D/H4D
min. 2S000 H2D/H4D
H4D/H2D
max 2S844 H4D/H2D
min. 2S000 H4D/H2D
CC8
(indoor 18 only)
max 1O8 CC8
min. 1O1 CC8
max 2S88 CC8
min. 2S11 CC8
max 3S111 CC8
min. 3S111 CC8
The following configurations are in Dual Band:
D
max O2_2
min. 1S000
max S222_222
min. S000_000
max S2_2_2
min. O0_0
H2D+Rx+Filter
max S22_22
min. S00_00
D+TX+Filter
max O4_4
min. O0_0
max O4_4
min. O0_0
max S44_44
min. S00_00
max S444_444
min. S000_000
max S332_332
min. S000_000
H2 D
max S323_323
min. S003_003
max S233_233
min. S033_033
max O6_2
min. O5_0
max S6_2/6_2
min. S5_0/5_0
max S6_2/6_2/6_2
min. S5_0/5_0/5_0
max O5_3
min. 05_3
max S5_3/5_3
min. S5_3/5_3
max S5_3/5_3/5_3
min. S5_3/5_3/5_3
H2D/D
max S44_22
min. S0_0
max S444_222
min. S000_000
max O6_2
min. O5_0
max S6_2/6_2
min. S5_0/5_0
max S6_2/6_2/6_2
min. S5_0/5_0/5_0
H4D/H2D
max O5_3
min. 05_3
max S5_3/5_3
min. S5_3/5_3
max S5_3/5_3/5_3
min. S5_3/5_3/5_3
Note : Although most configurations are not completely equipped with DRXs, at
least one DRX must be installed on site when the configuration is set up.
2--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.2.6.2 GSM frequency band 850
GSM frequency band 850 -- single band
D
S111D
D
S222D
D+TX--filter S44 D + TX--filter S444 D + TX--filter
H2D S332 H2D
S44 H2D S444 H2D
S442 H2D
H4D
H2D/H4D
H4D/H2D
GSM frequency band 850/1900 -- dual band
D
O2_2D
D
S222_222D
D+TX--filter
H2D S332_332 H2D S4_4/4_4/4_4 H2D
O4_4 H2D S6_2/6_2/6_2 H2D
S44_44 H2D S5_3/5_3/5_3 H2D
S444_444 H2D
H2D/D
S44_22 H2D/D
H2D/D
S444_444 H2D
H2D/H4D
H4D/H2D
2.2.7 Location
The equipment is given a number according to its position in the cabinet, the type
of cabinet, andthe type of element (see Figure 2--1to Figure 2--26and Table 2--1
to Table 2--27).
The equipment number n starts with number Zero for the first equipment on the left
side of the cabinet. Next equipment number is equipment n+1 .
2--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Internal batteries (optional)
Top compartment
Main
compartment
Climatic system
(2 ACUs)
Air inlet
Plinth (optional)
Air outlets
Figure 2--1 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with ACUs)
Plinth (optional)
Air outlet
Top compartment
Main
compartment
Climatic system
(DACS)
Air inlet
Air outlet
Figure 2--2 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACS -- type 1)
2--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Air inlet
Top compartment
Main
compartment
Air outlet
Plinth (optional)
Climatic system (DACS)
Air outlet
Figure 2--3 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs -- type 2)
Air inlet
Top compartment
Main
compartment
Air outlet
Plinth (optional)
Climatic system (DACS)
Air outlet
Figure 2--4 Overview of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet (with DACs -- type 3)
2--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
.
12
3
0
2 0 0
01
1C
0
C
1
1
PAs (fuses
10A, 250V,
time delay)
RF--combiners
BCF converters
(fuses F4A, 4A,
250 V, time delay)
DRXs
RX--splitters
COMICO
AC box
User compartment
PA interconnections DRX interconnections
Battery circuit
breaker
DRX
INTERCO
fuses (F0--F7,
8x2A, 250V,
fast blow)
PA INTERCO
fuses (F0--F9,
10x10A, 250V,
time delay)
Fuses
(BCF : F01, 4A, 250V, time delay
USER : F02, 10A, 250V, time delay
ALCO : F03, 1A, 230V, time delay)
F--type
converters
Climatic system
Battery
compartment
User
intercon-
nections
Power system
compartment
BCF
Figure 2--5 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the BCF
PAs (fuses
10A, 250V,
time delay)
RF--combiners
CBCF
DRXs
RX--splitters
COMICO
Power system
compartment
AC box
User compartment
Battery circuit
breaker
DRX
INTERCO
fuses (F0--F7,
8x2A, 250V,
fast blow)
PA INTERCO
fuses (F0--F9,
10x10A, 250V,
time delay)
Fuses
(CBCF : F01, 4A, 250V, time delay
USER : F02, 10A, 250V, time delay
RECAL : F03, 1A, 250V, time delay)
F--type
converters
Filling plate
Climatic system
Battery
compartment
Figure 2--6 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with the CBCF
2--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
PAs
RF--combiners
BCF or CBCF
compartment (*)
DRXs
RX--splitters
COMICO
Power system
compartment
AC box
User compartment
F--type
converters
Climatic system
Battery
compartment
User
intercon-
nections
Filling plate
Note: (*) When the BCF is used:
the ALCO board replaces the RECAL board
the BCF replaces the CBCF module
RECAL (*)
Figure 2--7 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H2D
coupling
PAs
RF--combiners
DRXs
Rx--splitters
COMICO
AC box
User compartment
Power system
compartment
F--type
converters
Filling plate
Climatic system
(DACS)
Battery
compartment
RECAL (*)
(*) When the BCF is used in the base cabinet, the ALCO board replaces
the RECAL board.
User
intercon-
nections
Figure 2--8 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS extension cabinet with
H2D coupling
2--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Climatic system
Battery
compartment
F--type
converters
RF--combiners
COMICO
AC box
User compartment
RX--splitters
Power System
compartment
User
intercon-
nections
RECAL (*)
BCF or CBCF
compartment (*)
Filling plate
PAs
DRXs
Figure 2--9 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with H4D
coupling
PAs
Battery
compartment
User
intercon-
nections
Power system
compartment
Climatic system
(DACS)
User compartment
F--type
converters
RX--splitters
AC box
DRXs
RF--combiners
COMICO
Filling plate
RECAL (*)
the RECAL board.
H4D coupling
2--26
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RF--combiners
RX--splitters
AC box
User compartment
DRXs
Climatic system
PAs
Battery
compartment
F--type
converters
Power system
compartment
Filling plate
RECAL (*)
BCF or CBCF
compartment (*)
COMICO
User
intercon-
nections
Figure 2--11 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Outdoor BTS base cabinet with
tx--filter/duplexer coupling
PAs
RF--combiners
DRXs
RX--splitters
COMICO
AC box
User compartment
Power system
compartment
F--type
converters
Filling plate
Climatic system
(DACS)
Battery
compartment
User
intercon-
nections
RECAL (*)
the RECAL board.
2--28
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Climatic system circuit breaker
(30A)
Indicator fuse (F03, 300mA,
250V, time delay)
AC voltage input indicator
Main circuit breaker (70A)
Rectifier circuit breaker (30A)
AC voltage to the rectifiers
Ground
Cover
AC voltage to the climatic system
and the heaters
Fuse for the 6A electrical outlets
(F02, 250V, time delay)
Two electrical outlets with differential
(30 mA)
AC lightning protector
Alarm return to the ALCO or
RECAL board
Figure 2--13 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(25A)
Electrical outlet differential breaker
(6A -- 30 mA)
Alarm return to the ALCO
or RECAL board
Ground
Cover
and the heaters
Electrical outlet
2--30
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
(15A)
(6A -- 30 mA)
or RECAL board
Ground
Cover
and the heaters
Electrical outlet
and the heaters
(30A)
Indicator fuse (F03, 300mA,
250V, time delay)
AC voltage input indicator
Two electrical outlets with
incorporated differential (5 mA)
Ground
RECAL board
Figure 2--16 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--32
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
(25A)
Ground
RECAL board
and the heaters
(15A)
Ground
RECAL board
and the heaters
2--34
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
ACU0 circuit breaker (30A)
ACU1 circuit breaker (30A)
General stop button
Ground
and the heaters
Cover
Electrical outlets differential breaker
(10A -- 30mA)
Two electrical outlets
or RECAL board
Figure 2--19 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
DACS circuit breaker (25A)
General stop button
Ground
and the heaters
Cover
(10A -- 30mA)
Electrical outlet
or RECAL board
2--36
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
General stop button
Ground
and the heaters
Cover
(10A -- 30mA)
Electrical outlet
or RECAL board
General stop button
Ground
and the heaters
Cover
(10A -- 30mA)
Electrical outlet
or RECAL board
2--38
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Climatic system circuit breakers (15A)
General stop button
Rectifier circuit breakers (10A)
Ground
To rectifier
and the heaters
Differential breaker (10A)
Outlet (230V/10A)
or RECAL board
European AC
plug 230Vac
Differential circuit
breaker 6A/30mA
AC voltage to
the power system
compartment
AC input
terminal block
Figure 2--24 AC box / GIPS with E, F, or UK type user AC plug
2--40
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
US AC plug
5mA/120Vac
Indicator fuse 15A
AC voltage to
the power system
compartment
AC input
terminal block
Figure 2--25 AC box / GIPS with US type user AC plug
Battery string
Battery string
Battery string
Battery string
DC
panel
Heating and
ventilation unit
AC
panel
Plinth
AC breaker
DC breaker
HVU breaker
Figure 2--26 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries)
2--42
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DC
box
Nuts no. 2
Plinth
Nut no. 1
Clamp
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 5 1 bis
2 6 2 bis
3 7 3 bis
4 8 4 bis
Blue cable
Black cable
Figure 2--27 External battery cabinet NTQA36AB of the S8000 outdoor BTS (SBS 60
batteries)
DC
box
Plinth
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 1 bis 5
2 2 bis 6
3 3 bis 7
4 4 bis 8
Strap
Black cable
Blue cable
Lug no. 2
Clamp
Lug no. 1
Figure 2--28 External battery cabinet NTQA36BA of the S8000 BTS (SBS C11 batteries)
2--44
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.2.8 Cross--reference between the equipment item and the replacement
sheets for the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2.2.8.1 Common equipment to the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the BCF and to the S8000 Outdoor
BTS with the CBCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Cabinet Location Test sheet
Replacement
sheet
ACU cooling system
ACU cooling system
0
1
Base
Base
ACU cooler 0
ACU cooler 1
-- 6.2.14
Table 2--1 ACU climatic unit location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
DACS cooling system
DACS cooling system
DACS cooling system
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
DACS cooler 0
DACS cooler 1
DACS cooler 2
Chapter 8 6.2.20
Table 2--2 DACS climatic system location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--3 DRX location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
DRX_Diversity_Reception_Chain
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Diversity reception chain of DRX 0
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--4 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
DRX_Main_Reception_Chain
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Main reception chain of DRX 0
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--5 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--46
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Battery cabinet
Battery cabinet
Battery cabinet
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
Battery cabinet
Battery cabinet
Battery cabinet
5.4.3 6.2.39
Table 2--6 External battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
-- 6.2.45
Table 2--7 F--type converter location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Battery
Battery
Battery
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
Battery
Battery
Battery
5.4.3 6.2.48
Table 2--8 Internal battery location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--9 H4D--LN--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--10 H4D--VSWR--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--11 LN--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--48
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
D_Output_RX_Splitter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
D_Output_RX_Splitter of DRX 0
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--12 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
M_Output_RX_Splitter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
M_Output_RX_Splitter of DRX 0
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--13 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
-- 6.2.53
Table 2--14 PA Power amplifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Rectifier
Rectifier
Rectifier
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
Rectifier 48 V
Rectifier 48 V
Rectifier 48 V
--
6.2.57
or
6.2.56
Table 2--15 Rectifier location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--50
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Tx--filter of VSWR 0
-- 6.2.70
Table 2--16 TX--FILTER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--17 VSWR--COMBINER location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2.2.8.2 Equipment of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the BCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
ALCO
ALCO
ALCO
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
ALCO
ALCO
ALCO
-- 6.2.75
Table 2--18 ALCO board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Converter_BCF
Converter_BCF
Converter_BCF
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
BCF power supply 0
BCF power supply 1
BCF power supply 2
-- 6.2.19
Table 2--19 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CSWM
CSWM
0
1
Base
Base
CSWM A board
CSWM B board
-- 6.2.4
Table 2--20 CSWM board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
DSC
DSC
DSC
DSC
0
1
2
3
Base
Base
Base
Base
DSC 0
DSC 1
DSC 2
DSC 3
-- 6.2.5
Table 2--21 DSC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--52
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
GTW
GTW
0
1
Base
Base
GTW 0
GTW 1
-- 6.2.6
Table 2--22 GTW board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
PCMI
PCMI
PCMI
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
PCMI 0
PCMI 1
PCMI 2
-- 6.2.7
Table 2--23 PCMI board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
SYNC
SYNC
0
1
Base
Base
SYNC 0
SYNC 1
-- 6.2.10
Table 2--24 SYNC board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2.2.8.3 Equipment of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the CBCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CMCF
CMCF
0
1
Base
Base
CMCF 0
CMCF 1
-- 6.2.2
Table 2--25 CMCF board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CPCMI
CPCMI
CPCMI
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
CPCMI 0
CPCMI 1
CPCMI 2
-- 6.2.3
Table 2--26 CPCMI board Location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
RECAL
RECAL
RECAL
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
RECAL
RECAL
RECAL
-- 6.2.9
Table 2--27 RECAL board location in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
2--54
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.3 Composition of the S8000 Indoor BTS
2.3.1 Introduction
The S8000 Indoor BTS contains:
one base cabinet
one BCF cabinet, only in the case of the BCF subsystem
one or two extension cabinets (used according to the configuration type)
2.3.2 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the BCF
The S8000 Indoor base cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 2--30):
one top compartment
The main compartment of the S8000 Indoor base cabinet contains, in its maximum
one ALarm COllecting board (ALCO)
eight DRXs (The termDRXused alone refers to the two types DRXor eDRX
unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.)
eight Power Amplifiers (PAs or ePAs)
two H4D RF--combiners, or four Tx--filters associated with four D
RF--combiners:
one duplexer
one duplexer
one hybrid coupler
one duplexer
four Tx--filters associated with four D RF--combiners:
-- one duplexer
four Tx--filters, each composed of:
-- one Tx--filter
six receive couplers (Rx--splitters)
one ventilation rack containing the following elements:
three fans (one is optional)
one FANICO board (control of the fan speed)
one filter
two ALPRO boards at the maximum (ALarm PROtection: protection for the
the radio outputs
the 75 adaptation kit (optional)
the top connection kit (optional) for the interconnection with the BCF cabinet
the terminal block for the DC power supply
one fan grid enabling the air outlet
2--56
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.3.2.3 Description of the BCF cabinet
The BCF cabinet contains two compartments (see Figure 2--29):
one top compartment
The main compartment contains, in its maximum configuration, the following
elements:
two Control and SWitching Modules (CSWM)
two GateWay boards (GTW)
two SYNChronization boards (SYNC)
four Data Signaling Concentration boards (DSC)
three PCM Interface boards (PCMI)
one Power Supply CoMmanD board (PSCMD)
two or three BCF power supplies 5 V/12 A
The top compartment contains one ventilation rack with the following elements:
three fans
2.3.3 Description of an S8000 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF
The S8000 Indoor cabinet contains two compartments :
one top compartment
elements (see Figure 2--36, Figure 2--37, Figure 2--39 and Figure 2--41):
one Compact Base Common Functions (CBCF) containing the following
elements:
one REmote and Control ALarm board (RECAL)
eight DRXs (The termDRXused alone refers to the two types DRXor eDRX
eight Power or High Power Amplifiers (PA or HePA)
Note: Eight HePA are supported with electrical constraints.
two H4D RF--combiners, or four Tx--filters associated with four D
RF--combiners, or one remote tunable cavity coupler (CC8):
one duplexer
one duplexer
one hybrid coupler
one duplexer
four Tx--filters associated with four D RF--combiners:
-- one duplexer
four Tx--filters, each composed of:
-- one Tx--filter
one remote tunable cavity coupler (CC8)
six receive couplers (Rx--splitters)
three fans (one is optional)
one filter
2--58
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RECAL board external alarms)
the radio outputs
the block terminal for the DC power supply
2.3.4 Description of an S8000 Indoor extension cabinet
The extension cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS and the base cabinet are alike with
the exception of the BCF cabinet or the CBCF subsystem is missing.
The S8000 Indoor extension cabinet contains two compartments:
one top compartment
The main compartment, in its maximum configuration, contains the following
elements (see Figure 2--38, Figure 2--40 and Figure 2--42):
one ALarmCOllecting board (ALCO) or one REmote Control and ALarmboard
(RECAL):
one ALCO board in the case of a base cabinet with the BCF cabinet
one RECAL board in the case of a base cabinet with the CBCF
eight DRX (The term DRX used alone refers to the two types DRX or eDRX
eight Power Amplifiers (PAs or ePAs)
RF-combiner modules
six receive couplers (Rx-splitters)
three fans
one filter
the radio outputs
the 75 adaption kit (optional)
the top connection kit (optional) for the interconnection with the BCF cabinet
the block terminal for the DC power supply
2.3.5 Location
The equipment is given a number according to its position in the cabinet, the type
of cabinet, and the type of element (see Figure 2--29 to Figure 2--42 and
Table 2--28 to Table 2--51).
2--60
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
To base cabinet
Fans
P
S
C
M
D
5
V
/
1
2
A
5
V
/
1
2
A
5
V
/
1
2
A
F01
4A
BCF
S
Y
N
C
1
S
Y
N
C
0
P
C
M
I
0
P
C
M
I
1
P
C
M
I
2
G
T
W
0
G
T
W
1
C
S
W
M
0
C
S
W
M
1
D
S
C
0
D
S
C
1
D
S
C
2
D
S
C
3
BCF fuse
(F01, 4A, 250V,
time delay)
FANICO Printed
Circuit Board
Fuse
(800 mA, 250 V, fast blow)
BCF power supplies
(Fuse F4A, 4A,
250V, time delay)
Figure 2--29 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS BCF cabinet
.
12
3
0
2 0 0
01
1C
0
C
1
1
Ventilation system
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PA
FANS
DRX
ALCO/BCF
Ventilation rack
BCF CABINET BASE CABINET
F01
BCF
ALPRO 0 ALPRO 1
A
L
C
O
Figure 2--30 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF cabinet
2--62
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 2--31 View of Open S8000 Indoor BTS
The hinges are fixed on steel plates and mounted on the door
with nuts. There are self--locking inserts not filled on the
exposed side.
Figure 2--32 Hinge of the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--64
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
The fan tray is assembled with standard screws
instead of thumbscrews
Figure 2--33 Fan Unit of S8000 Indoor BTS
Figure 2--34 Filter Holder of S8000 Indoor BTS
2--66
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
The antenna bulkhead holes are positioned directly on the flat
roof with a single cover of the S8000 Indoor BTS
antenna holes
Figure 2--35 Top View of the S8000 Indoor BTS
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RX--splitters
F
H
I
N
F
H
O
U
T
P
C
M
2
/
3
P
C
M
4
/
5
A
B
I
S
RF--combiners
F--type converters
PAs (fuses 10A,
250V, time delay)
DRX
interconnections
PA INTERCO fuses
(F0--F9, 10x10A, 250V,
time delay)
DRX INTERCO fuses
(F0--F7, 8x2A, 250V,
fast blow)
0 1 2 3 4 5
PA
FANS
DRX
RECAL/CBCF
CBCF
DRXs
Figure 2--36 Overview of an S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF
2--68
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RX--splitters
F
H
I
N
F
H
O
U
T
P
C
M
2
/
3
P
C
M
4
/
5
A
B
I
S
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
0 1 2 3 4 5
PA
FANS
DRX
RECAL/CBCF
CBCF (*)
(*) When the BCF cabinet is used:
the ALCO board replaces the RECAL board in each cabinet
a filling plate replaces the CBCF in the base cabinet
RECAL (*)
DRXs
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
Figure 2--37 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H2D
coupling
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F
H
I
N
F
H
O
U
T
P
C
M
2
/
3
P
C
M
4
/
5
A
B
I
S
FANS RECAL/CBCF
PA DRX
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
RX--splitters
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
(*) When the BCF cabinet is used, the ALCO board replaces the RECAL board
in each extension cabinet.
RECAL (*)
DRXs
Figure 2--38 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H2D
coupling
2--70
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 0
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
RX--splitters
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
CBCF (*)
the ALCO board replaces the RECAL board in each cabinet
a filling plate replaces the CBCF in the base cabinet
RECAL (*)
DRXs
FANS RECAL/CBCF
PA DRX
Figure 2--39 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with H4D
coupling
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 0
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
RX--splitters
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
RECAL (*)
FANS RECAL/CBCF
PA DRX
DRXs
Figure 2--40 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with H4D
coupling
2--72
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PA
FANS
DRX
RECAL/CBCF
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
RX--splitters
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
CBCF (*)
the ALCO board replaces the RECAL board in each cabinet,
a filling plate replaces the CBCF in the base cabinet.
RECAL (*)
F
H
I
N
F
H
O
U
T
P
C
M
2
/
3
P
C
M
4
/
5
A
B
I
S
DRXs
Figure 2--41 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with
0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
PA
FANS
DRX
RECAL/CBCF
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
RX--splitters
RF--combiners
F--type converters
DRX
interconnections
RECAL (*)
F
H
I
N
F
H
O
U
T
P
C
M
2
/
3
P
C
M
4
/
5
A
B
I
S
DRXs
Figure 2--42 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with
2--74
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RF--combiners
cavity
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
PAs
DRX (**)
interconnections
CBCF (*)
RX--splitters
F--type
converters
RECAL (*)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DRXs (**)
Base cabinet
(**) DRX.
Note: (*) When the BCF cabinet is used, the ALCO board replaces the RECAL
board in each extension cabinet.
Figure 2--43 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS base cabinet with CC8
coupling
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RF--combiners
cavity
Ventilation system
PA
interconnections
Combiner
interconnections
(COMICO)
PAs
DRX
interconnections
RX--splitters
F--type
converters
RECAL (*)
DRXs
Figure 2--44 Maximum equipment of an S8000 Indoor BTS extension cabinet with CC8
coupling
2--76
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.3.6 Cross--reference between the equipment and the maintenance
sheets for the S8000 Indoor BTS
2.3.6.1 Common equipment to the S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF and to the S8000 Indoor
BTS with the CBCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
DRX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
DRX 3
DRX 4
DRX 5
DRX 6
DRX 7
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--28 DRX location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--29 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--78
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--30 DRX main reception chain location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
Converter_F
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
-- 6.2.45
Table 2--31 F--type converter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
Combiner_H4_LN
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
Combiner_H4_LN 0
Combiner_H4_LN 1
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--32 H4D--LN--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
Combiner_H4_VSWR
0
1
2
3
4
5
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 0
Combiner_H4_ VSWR 1
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--33 H4D--VSWR--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
Fan system
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
FAN 0
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 0
FAN 1
FAN 2
FAN 0
FAN 1
FAN 2
-- 6.2.17
Table 2--34 Fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
LN 0
LN 1
LN 2
LN 3
LN 4
LN 5
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--35 LN--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--80
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--36 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--37 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
PA, ePA or HePA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
PA 3
PA 4
PA 5
PA 6
PA 7
-- 6.2.53
Table 2--38 PA power amplifier location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--82
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
Tx--filter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Base
Base
Base
base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
-- 6.2.70
Table 2--39 TX--filter location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
Combiner_VSWR
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 0
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
Extension 1
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
VSWR 0
VSWR 1
VSWR 2
VSWR 3
VSWR 4
VSWR 5
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--40 VSWR--combiner location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2.3.6.2 Equipment of the S8000 Indoor BTS with the BCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
ALCO
ALCO
ALCO
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
ALCO
ALCO
ALCO
-- 6.2.1
Table 2--41 ALCO board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
BCF fan system
BCF fan system
BCF fan system
0
1
2
BCF
BCF
BCF
BCF fan 0
BCF fan 1
BCF fan 2
-- 6.2.18
Table 2--42 BCF fan system location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
Converter_BCF
Converter_BCF
Converter_BCF
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
BCF power supply 0
BCF power supply 1
BCF power supply 2
-- 6.2.19
Table 2--43 BCF power supply location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CSWM
CSWM
0
1
Base
Base
CSWM A board
CSWM B board
-- 6.2.4
Table 2--44 CSWM board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
DSC
DSC
DSC
DSC
0
1
2
3
Base
Base
Base
Base
DSC 0
DSC 1
DSC 2
DSC 3
-- 6.2.5
Table 2--45 DSC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--84
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
GTW
GTW
0
1
Base
Base
GTW 0
GTW 1
-- 6.2.6
Table 2--46 GTW board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
PCMI
PCMI
PCMI
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
PCMI 0
PCMI 1
PCMI 2
-- 6.2.7
Table 2--47 PCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Cabinet Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
SYNC
SYNC
0
1
Base
Base
SYNC 0
SYNC 1
-- 6.2.10
Table 2--48 SYNC board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2.3.6.3 Equipment of the S8000 Indoor BTS with the CBCF
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CMCF
CMCF
0
1
Base
Base
CMCF 0
CMCF 1
-- 6.2.2
Table 2--49 CMCF board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
CPCMI
CPCMI
CPCMI
0
1
2
Base
Base
Base
CPCMI 0
CPCMI 1
CPCMI 2
-- 6.2.3
Table 2--50 CPCMI board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Replacement
sheet
RECAL
RECAL
RECAL
0
1
2
Base
Extension 0
Extension 1
RECAL
RECAL
RECAL
-- 6.2.9
Table 2--51 RECAL board location in the S8000 Indoor BTS
2--86
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.4 Composition of the S8003 Indoor BTS
2.4.1 Introduction
The S8003 Indoor BTS contains only one cabinet.
2.4.2 Description of an S8003 Indoor base cabinet with the CBCF
The S8003 Indoor cabinet contains two compartments:
one top compartment
elements (see Figure 2--45 and Figure 2--46):
one Compact Base Common Functions (CBCF) contains the followingelements:
one REmote and Control ALarm board (RECAL)
three TRXs, composed of:
three DRXs
three Power Amplifiers (PAs)
RF--combiner modules are six DRF--combiners, or two H2D RF--combiners, or
one Tx--filter associated with two D RF--combiners:
one duplexer
one duplexer
one hybrid coupler
one Tx--filter associated with two D RF--combiners. :
two D RF--combiners, each composed of:
-- one duplexer
one Tx--filter, composed of:
-- one Tx--filter
up to two F--type converters
six receive couplers (RX--splitters)
one DC main panel:
one main breaker 60 A
9 fuses
2.4.2.2 Description of the cooling compartment, at the bottom of the main compartment
The internal cooling system is composed of four fans (bottom of the main
compartment).
one ALPRO board (ALarm PROtection: protection for the RECAL board
external alarms)
the 75 Ohms adaptation kit (optional)
the radio outputs
2.4.3 Description of the S8003 Indoor BTS products
2.4.3.1 GSM frequency bands (GSM 900)
The Indoor S8003 BTS supports single band GSM 900, 1800, E--GSM 900, and
R--GSM 900 frequency bands.
The Indoor S8003 BTS is designed to extend the S8000 GSM family: the S8003 is
a high performance 3 DRX BTS designed for macro--cellular voice and data
applications, with site configurations ranging from 1 TRX to 3 TRXs either in a
tri--sectorial (S111), bi--sectorial (S11, S21) or omni--directional (O1, O2, O3) site
configuration.
2--88
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Note: O3 configuration is not available at GSM--R frequency due to the Tx
coupler not being available.
The S8003 Indoor BTS is composed of one base cabinet with no extension cabinet
configuration available (at market introduction).
Omni--directional, Bi--sectorial and tri--sectorial configurations are supported with
two kinds of TX coupling:
D/TxF
H2D
The cabinet includes, the TX coupling version, the following modules:
1 CBCF module
1 RECAL module
1 type F power supply (2nd as an option)
Main configurations of the S8003 Indoor BTS are listed in the following table and
lists the number of modules that are necessary (depending on the configuration).
Configuration Coupling DRX PA
RX
splitter
1--4
TxF D H2D Antenna port
O1 D/TxF 1 1 2 2 2
O2 D/TxF 2 2 2 2 2
O3
D/TxF 3 3 2 1 2 3
O3
H2D 3 3 2 2
O1H
O2H
S21H
S11H
S111H
S11 D/TxF 2 2 4 4 4
S21 D/TxF 3 3 3 4 4
S111 D/TxF 3 3 6 6 6
Note: Although most configurations are not completely equipped with DRX, at
least one DRX must be installed on site when the configuration is set up.
2.4.4 Location
The equipment is given a number accordingto its position inthe cabinet and the type
of element.
2--90
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
F--type converter
RECAL
CBCF
COMICO
RF Combiners
DRX
PAs
Rx--splitters
DRXs
interconnections
Internal Cooling System
Figure 2--45 S8003 Indoor BTS: view of the cabinet (H2D coupling)
F--type
converter
RECAL
CBCF
CMCF
CPCMI
Breaker
Fuses
COMICO
RF Combiners
DRX--ICO
PAs
DRXs
Rx--splitters
Internal
Cooling
System
Figure 2--46 S8003 Indoor BTS: location of the modules
2--92
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
F--type
converter
RECAL
CBCF
CMCF
CPCMI
Breaker
Fuses
COMICO
RF Combiners
DRX--ICO
PAs
DRXs
Rx--splitters
Internal
Cooling
System
Figure 2--47 S8003 Indoor BTS: modules numbering
F--type
converter
RECAL
CBCF
CMCF
CPCMI
Breaker
Fuses
COMICO
RF Combiners
DRX--ICO
PAs
DRXs
Rx--splitters
Internal
Cooling
System
Tx Filter
Figure 2--48 S8003 Indoor BTS: O3 duplexer + Tx Filter
2--94
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2.4.5 Cross--reference between the equipment and the maintenance
sheets for the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
DRX
DRX
DRX
0
1
2
DRX 0
DRX 1
DRX 2
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--52 DRX location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--53 DRX diversity reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equip-
ment
number
Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
0
1
2
-- 6.2.36
Table 2--54 DRX main reception chain location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Location
Test
sheet
Replacement
sheet
Converter_F
Converter_F
0
1
F power supply 0
F power supply 1
-- 6.2.45
Table 2--55 F--type converter location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Location Test sheet Replacement sheet
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
Combiner_LN
0
1
2
3
4
5
LNA 0
LNA 1
LNA 2
LNA 3
LNA 4
LNA 5
-- 6.2.62
Table 2--56 LNA--combiner location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
0
1
2
3
4
5
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--57 Output Rx--splitter D location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
0
1
2
3
4
5
-- 6.2.63
Table 2--58 Output Rx--splitter M location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
2--96
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment type
Equipment
number
PA
PA
PA
0
1
2
PA 0
PA 1
PA 2
-- 6.2.53
Table 2--59 PA power amplifier location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
Location Test sheet
Replacement
sheet
CMCF
CMCF
0
1
CMCF 0
CMCF 1
-- 6.2.2
Table 2--60 CMCF board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
CPCMI
CPCMI
CPCMI
0
1
2
CPCMI 0
CPCMI 1
CPCMI 2
-- 6.2.3
Table 2--61 CPCMI board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Equipment type
Equipment
number
RECAL 0 RECAL -- 6.2.9
Table 2--62 RECAL board location in the S8003 Indoor BTS
Description of a start--up Nortel Networks Confidential 3--1
3 DESCRIPTION OF A START--UP
3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the procedure for starting up an S8000 / S8003 BTS. A BTS
start--up is carried out in two steps. Perform them in the following order:
Power on the extension cabinets then the base cabinet (see Paragraphs 3.5 and
3.6). As a help, a brief description of the S8000 BTSpower supply is provided in
Paragraphs 3.2 and 3.3: for more information, refer to NTP <63>.. S8003 Indoor
BTS power supply is briefly described in paragraph 3.4.
Monitor the start--up phases (see Paragraph 3.8).
Note: There are two types of DRX: DRX and eDRX. In this chapter, the term
DRX includes the two types unless the context indicates otherwise.
3.2 S8000 Outdoor BTS power supply
3.2.1 Power supplies
3.2.1.1 F--type converters
Two F--type converters supply the +15 V and --15 V DC required by the
LNA--combiners and the VSWR--combiners.
3.2.1.2 BCF power supplies (if any)
The BCF power supplies supply the boards of the BCF unit.
3.2.2 Distribution of power supplies
3.2.2.1 Mains power supply
Figure 3--1 to Figure 3--3 show the equipments supplied with the mains power
supply.
3.2.2.2 --48 V power supply
Figure 3--8 shows the equipments supplied with --48 V.
Description of a start--up
3--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.2.3 Batteries (optional)
The batteries are used to keep the cabinet on after an AC failure.
Two types of batteries can be used: internal batteries and external batteries.
3.2.3.1 Internal batteries
The internal batteries are located in the top compartment of the cabinet.
The battery type is SBS 40 from HAWKER CHLORIDE (string of four batteries
12 V DC, in series).
3.2.3.2 External batteries
The external batteries are located in an independent cabinet.
This battery cabinet can house two types of batteries: SBS 60 (50.8 Ah) or SBSC11
(92 Ah) from HAWKER CHLORIDE (up to 4 strings in parallel, each stack made
of four 12 V DC batteries in series).
3.2.3.3 Discharge times of the batteries
The Table 3--1 presents the discharge times of the internal and external batteries
for some configurations.
Internal
External batteries
Configuration
Internal
batteries
(SBS 40)
SBS 60 SBS C11
(SBS 40)
1 string 2 strings 3 strings 4 strings 1 string 2 strings 3 strings 4 strings
O1 2 h 2 h 45 6 h 9 h 14 h 6 h 14 h 20 h 24 h
S111 1 h 1 h 15 3 h 5 h 7 h 2 h 45 7 h 11 h 16 h 30
S222 30 min 45 min 1 h 45 2 h 45 3 h 30 1 h 45 3 h 45 6 h 15 8 h 30
S233 20 min 30 min 1 h 15 2 h 2 h 30 1 h 15 2 h 45 4 h 30 6 h 45
Table 3--1 Discharge times of the batteries
The Table 3--4 presents the charging times of the internal and external batteries for
some configurations.
However, these charging times depend on the following conditions:
the temperature must be ambient (20C--25C or 68F--77F)
the discharge depth must be respected (stopping voltage 42 V)
the batteries must be practically new and correctly maintained in accordance
with the preventive maintenance procedure (see Paragraph 5.4.3)
the initial capacity of batteries must be equal to 100%
the remaining capacity of the batteries (before recharging) must be more
than 20%
the outage duration (the time between discharge end and recharge beginning)
must be lower than one week
there must not be any mains power supply cut when charging batteries
the BTS must be in the optimal running conditions
The number of rectifiers in the cabinet must be:
Configuration PA/ePA O1 S11 S111 S211 S221 S222 S322 S332
500W rectifiers of the
seven--rectifiers type
2 3 3
4 4 5 5 6
600W or 680W
rectifiers of the
six--rectifiers type
2 2 3 3
4 4 5 5
GIPS
2 2 3 3
3 4 4 4
Table 3--2 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2)
Configuration mixed PA/ePA / HePA O1 S11 S111 S211 S221 S222
seven--rectifiers type
2 3 4
4 5 6
600W or 680W rectifiers of the
six--rectifiers type
2 3 3 4
4 5
680W rectifiers of the GIPS 2 2 3 3 4 4
Table 3--3 Rectifier number in function of the configuration (1/2)
3--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Internal
batteries
External batteries (SBS 60)
batteries
(SBS 40)
1 string 2 strings 3 strings 4 strings
Time needed for 80%
charging rate (*)
1 to 3 h 1,5 to 4 h 2 to 5 h 2,5 to 7 h 3 to 10 h
Time needed for 100%
charging rate (*)
Until 24 h
Until 36 h Until 48 h Until 60 h Until 72 h
Note: (*) These charging times depend on the conditions quoted in Paragraph 3.2.3.3.
Table 3--4 Charging times on the batteries
3.2.3.4 Batteries storage
Storage duration is dependent of the last recharge date.
For new batteries, the duration is calculated from the original charge date. This
date is indicated on a label under the format dd/mm/yy.
For batteries which were already recharged by Nortel, the new duration is
calculated fromthe last recharge cycle. The date of this last recharge is manually
noted on the label after each maintenance operation.
Data only used for HAWKER SBS Battery
Battery Temperature
during storage
20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C
Maximum Storage
Time
20 months 15 months 10 months 7 months 5 months
Table 3--5 Storage duration depending of storage temperature
Note: To avoid any inadequate storage/transportation and to guarantee battery
long term performance, only one recharge cycle is allowed in the
warehouse.
Also the discharge depth must not be lower than 12.6Vbefore the battery is
recharged otherwise battery may have defects and maintenance procedure
is then applicable.
Mains
power supply
Lightning
protector
EMI filters
CB01 main circuit
breaker
(50A or 70A)
300mA fuse
Mains
indicator
light
CB03 climatic
system circuit
breaker
(15A, 25A or 30A)
CB02 rectifier
circuit breaker
(25A or 30A)
CB04 differential
breaker
(6A -- 30mA)
Rectifiers
Climatic system
(ACUs or DACS)
Electrical outlets
with differential
Power Control
Unit (PCU)
AC box
Figure 3--1 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (single--phase)
3--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Mains
power supply
Lightning
protector
EMI filters
CB01 main circuit
breaker
(50A or 70A)
300mA fuse
Mains
indicator
light
CB03 climatic
system circuit
breaker
(15A, 25A or 30A)
CB02 rectifier
circuit breaker
(25A or 30A)
CB04 differential
breaker
(15A -- 5mA)
Rectifiers
Climatic system
(ACUs or DACS)
Electrical outlets
with differential
Power Control
Unit (PCU)
AC box
Figure 3--2 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (split single--phase)
Tri--phase
Lightning
protector
EMI filters
Rectifiers
Climatic system
(ACUs or DACS)
Electrical outlets
Power Control Unit
(PCU)
AC box
General
stop
button
CB03 climatic
system circuit
breaker
(15A, 25A or 30A)
CB02 rectifier
circuit breaker
(25A or 30A)
CB04 differential
breaker
(10A -- 30mA)
Figure 3--3 Mains power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS (tri--phase types 1, 2 and 3)
3--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Tri--phase
Lightning
protector
EMI filters
Rectifiers
Climatic system
(DACS)
Electrical outlets
Power Control Unit
(PCU)
AC box
General
stop
button
CB04 DACS
circuit breaker
(15A) (*)
CB01/CB02/CB03
rectifier circuit
breaker
(10A)
CB05 differential
breaker
(10A -- 30mA) (**)
Note: (*) For type 5: CB04/CB05 climatic system circuit breaker (15A).
(**) For type 5: CB06 differential breaker (10A -- 30 mA).
Figure 3--4 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (tri--phase type 4 or 5)
Ground fault interrupter
6A/30mA
outlet
Single--phase AC plug Kit
AC Box
ADU
DCU
GIPS
EMC Filter EMC Filter
Rect . 5
Lightning protectors
Batteries
User-- 230Vac
DACS
T
Temperature
PA DRX DACS User + CBCF + RECAL
Breaker
LN3
Terminal blocks
(cross--connection for
SINGLE--PHASE)
Mains input (SINGLE--PHASE)
230Vac: 2 wires + ground
Breaker
LN1
Breaker
LN2
Rect . 4 Rect . 3 Rect . 2 Rect . 1
Breaker
BAT: 90A
Breaker
PA: 50A
Breaker
DRX: 15A
Breaker
DACS: 10A
Breaker
BCF: 15A
Figure 3--5 Mains power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC box/GIPS
(Single--phase)
3--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Fuse 15A
outlet
Split--phase AC plug Kit
AC Box
ADU
DCU
GIPS
Rect . 5
Batteries
User--5mA/120Vac
DACS
T
Temperature
Breaker
LN3
Terminal blocks
(cross--connection
for SPLIT--PHASE)
Mains input (SPLIT--PHASE)
2x120Vac split phase: 3 wires + ground.
Connection between 2 lines with
120Vac for common mode
Breaker
LN1
Breaker
LN2
Breaker
BAT: 90A
Breaker
PA: 50A
Breaker
DRX: 15A
Breaker
DACS: 10A
Breaker
BCF: 15A
(Split--phase)
Ground fault interrupter
6A/30mA
outlet
Single--phase AC plug Kit
AC Box
ADU
DCU
GIPS
Rect . 5
Batteries
User-- 230Vac
DACS
T
Temperature
Breaker
LN3
Terminal blocks
(cross--connection
for TRI--PHASE)
Mains input (TRI--PHASE)
230/400Vac: 4 wires + ground
or 120/208Vac: 3 wires + ground
Breaker
LN1
Breaker
LN2
Breaker
BAT: 90A
Breaker
PA: 50A
Breaker
DRX: 15A
Breaker
DACS: 10A
Breaker
BCF: 15A
(Tri--phase)
3--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
USER
PA_ICO DRX_ICO
8 power
amplifiers
2 F--type
converters
8 DRXs
AC input
50A breaker
(L1 or CB1)
AC/DC
rectifiers
10A delayed
breaker
(L2 or CB2)
15A breaker
(L3 or CB3)
PCU
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
Legend:
PA--ICO : Power Amplifier interconnection
DRX--ICO : DRX interconnection
Climatic
system
(ACUs or
DACS fans)
BCF or CBCF
compartment
15A breaker
(L4 or CB4)
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
A
F
u
s
e
4
A
BCF
or
CBCF
ALCO
or
RECAL
Figure 3--8 --48 V Power supply of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)
C--PA_ICO DRX_ICO
2 power
amplifiers
2 F--type
converters
DRXs
AC input
50A
breaker
AC/DC
rectifiers
10A
breaker
(time delay)
90A
breaker
(*)
15A
breaker
PCU or DCU
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
Legend:
Note: (*) The 90A breaker is used either for the internal battery or the external battery.
Climatic
system
BCF or CBCF
compartment
15A
breaker
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
A
F
u
s
e
4
A
Internal
batteries
Battery
cabinet
BCF
or
CBCF
ALCO
or
RECAL
User
Figure 3--9 --48V power supply of the S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS
3--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.3 S8000 Indoor BTS power supply
3.3.1.2 BCF power supplies
The BCF power supplies supply the boards of the BCF cabinet.
Figure 3--11 shows the equipments supplied with the --48 V power supply.
Figure 3--12 shows the wiring diagram of the --48 V power supply.
PA_ICO FANICO DRX_ICO
8 power
amplifiers
2 F--type
converters
3 fans 8 DRXs
dc input
50A
breaker
EMI filters
2.5A
breaker
5A
breaker
10A
breaker
dc compartment
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
8
0
0
m
A
F
u
s
e
8
0
0
m
A
F
u
s
e
8
0
0
m
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
F
u
s
e
2
A
F
u
s
e
4
A
Legend:
FAN--ICO : Fan interconnection
BCF
or
CBCF
ALCO
or
RECAL
BCF or
CBCF
Figure 3--10 --48 V Power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS (BCF or CBCF)
3--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Filter
Figure 3--11 View of the --48 V power supply of the S8000 Indoor BTS
--48V
0V
ALPRO 0
ALPRO 1
Equipotentiality
stud
ALPRO 1
connector
RF connector
ALPRO 0
connector
Terminal blocks
Optional
75 kit
Ground
bar
Figure 3--12 Wiring of the S8000 Indoor BTS --48 V power supply
3--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.4 S8003 Indoor BTS power supply
3.4.1.1 DC Main Breaker
The CB01 breaker supplies power for the whole BTS.
Figure 3--13 shows the wiring diagram of the --48 V power supply.
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
2
.
5
A
F
u
s
e
1
A
F
u
s
e
1
A
F
u
s
e
4
A
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
C7 C8 C9
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
to F--type converter 1
to F--type converter 0
to DRX--ICO
to PA2 to PA1 to PA0
to RECAL
to CBCF
to Fan
CB Panel
Filters
dc input
CB01
Breaker
60A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
F
u
s
e
1
0
A
Figure 3--13 Wiring of the S8003 Indoor BTS --48V power supply
3--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.5 S8000 Outdoor BTS power--on/power--off
3.5.1 Power--on
3.5.1.1 (Split) Single--phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with AC mains box)
The procedure below describes the power--on of the S8000 Outdoor BTS when it
is completely powered off.
The extension cabinet, if any, must be powered on before the base cabinet.
The order in which the power supplies of a cabinet are put into service is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the main breaker in the I position.
2 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the I position.
3 Put the rectifier circuit breaker in the I position.
4 Put the switch of each rectifier in the I position.
5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
6 Put the FAN circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
7 Put the PA circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
8 Put the switch of each F--type converter in the I position.
9 Put the switch of each PA in the I position or connect the power cables of the PAs
to the PA--ICO.
10 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
11 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
12 If the cabinet contains the BCF, perform the two following actions.
a. Put the switch of each BCF power supply in the I position.
b. Put the switch of the PSCMD board of the BCF in the I position.
Check the BTS starts correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
Paragraph 3.8).
3.5.1.2 Tri--phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with AC mains box)
Step Action
1 Put the climatic system circuit breaker(s) in the I position.
2 Put the rectifier circuit breaker(s) in the I position.
3 Put the switch of each rectifier in the I position.
4 Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
5 Put the FAN circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
6 Put the PA circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
to the PA--ICO.
9 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
10 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the PCU in the I position.
Check for the BTS starting correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
Paragraph 3.8).
3--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.5.1.3 S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS
Step Action
1 Preliminary operations check:
The circuit breakers of the ADU are in the OFF position.
The switches of the rectifiers are in the O position.
The batteries, PA, DRX, DACS, BCF circuit breakers of the DCU are in the
OFF position.
The switches of the PAs are in the I position or the power cables of the PAs
are disconnected from the PA--ICO.
The switches of the F--converters are in the O position.
2 At the operator AC power supply, put the circuit breaker of the cabinet in the ON
position.
3 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADU of the GIPS in the ON position.
4 The fans start up.
5 Open the cabinet and check the three LEDs of the DACS are ON.
6 The rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU are in the ON position.
7 The switch of each rectifier is in the I position.
8 The green LED on the front face of each rectifier is ON.
9 The four green LEDs on the DCU front face are ON.
10 If battery back--up is used, put the batteries circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON
position.
11 if a battery cabinet is used, put the DC circuit breaker of the battery cabinet in the
ON position.
12 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
13 Put the PA circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
Step Action (Continued)
to the PA--ICO.
16 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
17 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
18 If the cabinet contains the BCF, perform the following actions:
Check the BTS starting correctly by monitoring the state of its LEDs (see
Paragraph 3.8).
3--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.5.2 Power--off
3.5.2.1 (Split) Single--phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with AC mains box)
The extension cabinet, if any, must be powered off before the base cabinet.
Step Action
a. Put the switch of the PSCMD board of the BCF in the O position.
b. Put the switch of each BCF power supply in the O position.
2 Put the switch of each PA in the O position or disconnect the power cables of the
PAs from the PA--ICO.
3 Put the switch of each F--type converter in the O position.
4 Put the four circuit breakers of the PCU in the O position in the following order:
a. the PA circuit breaker
b. the FAN circuit breaker
c. the DRX circuit breaker
d. the BCF circuit breaker
5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the OFF position.
6 Put the switch of each rectifier in the O position.
7 Put the rectifier circuit breaker in the OFF position.
8 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the OFF position.
9 Put the main breaker in the OFF position.
3.5.2.2 Tri--phase mains power supply (S8000 outdoor BTS with AC mains box)
Step Action
5 Put the battery circuit breaker in the O position.
6 Put the switch of each rectifier in the O position.
7 Put the rectifier circuit breaker(s) in the O position.
8 Put the climatic system circuit breaker in the O position.
Location Identification
Rated
current
(A)
Rated
voltage
V AC
Type
PA INTERCO F0--F9 10 A 250 V time delay
PA 10 A 250 V time delay
BCF/CBCF
(Input/Output)
F01 4 A 250 V time delay
USER F02 10 A 250 V time delay
ALCO or RECAL F03 1 A 250 V time delay
BCF power supply F4A 4 A 250 V time delay
DRX INTERCO F0--F7 2 A 250 V fast blow
Table 3--6 Fuse description of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
3--26
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.5.2.3 S8000 outdoor BTS with GIPS
Step Action
2 Put the BCF circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
3 Put the DRX circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
5 Put the switch of each F--converter in the O position.
6 Put the PA circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
7 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
8 If a battery cabinet is used, put the DC circuit breaker of the battery cabinet in the
OFF position.
9 If battery back--up is used, put the batteries circuit breaker of the DCUin the OFF
position.
10 Put the switch of each rectifier on the O position.
11 The green LED on each rectifier front face is OFF.
12 The four green LEDs on the DCU front face are OFF.
13 Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the OFF position.
14 Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU box in the OFF position.
15 At the operator ACpower supply, put the circuit breaker of the cabinet in the OFF
position.
3.6 S8000 Indoor BTS power--on/power--off
3.6.1 Power--on
The procedure below describes the power--on of the S8000 Indoor BTS when it is
completely powered off.
The extension cabinet must be powered on before the base cabinet. Then turn on the
BCF cabinet if any.
The order in which the power supplies of the base or extension cabinet are put into
service is as follows:
Step Action
1 Put the FAN circuit breaker in the I position.
2 Put the PA circuit breaker in the I position.
to the PA--ICO.
5 Put the DRX circuit breaker in the I position.
6 Put the ALCO/BCF or RECAL/BCF circuit breaker in the I position.
Paragraph 3.8).
3--28
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.6.2 Power--off
Turn on imperatively in the following order: the BCF cabinet, if any, then the base
cabinet and the extension cabinet.
Step Action
2 Put the switch of each PAin the O position or connect the power cables of the PAs
to the PA--ICO.
Paragraph 3.8).
Rated
current
(A)
Rated
voltage
V AC
Type
PA INTERCO F0--F9 10 A 250 V time delay
PAs 10 A 250 V time delay
BCF or CBCF
(Input/Output)
F01 4 A 250 V time delay
BCF power supply F4A 4 A 250 V time delay
DRX INTERCO F0--F7 2 A 250 V fast blow
Fan 800 mA 250 V fast blow
BCF fan 800 mA 250 V fast blow
Table 3--7 Fuse description of the S8000 Indoor BTS
3.7 S8003 Indoor BTS power--on/power--off
3.7.1 Power--on
The following procedure describes the power--on of the S8003 Indoor BTS when
it is completely powered off.
The order in which the power supplies of the cabinet are put into service is as
follows:
Step Action
1 Put the CB01 circuit breaker in the I position.
3 Put the switch of each PA in the I position.
Paragraph 3.8).
DANGER
Electric shock
Ensuretheunusedpower cablefor theTypeFpower supply module
is capped and secured before powering up the S8003 BTS and/or
performing any maintenance procedure (refer to Figure 5--1).
3--30
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3.7.2 Power--off
Turn off in the following order:
Step Action
1 Put the switch of each PA in the O position.
3 Put the CB01 main circuit breaker in the O position.
Rated
current
(A)
Rated
voltage
V AC
Type
DRX ICO F1 4 A 250 V slow blow
FPSU F2--F3 10 A 250 V slow blow
CBCF F4 2.5 A 250 V slow blow
FAN F5 1 A 250 V slow blow
RECAL F6 1 A 250 V slow blow
PA F7--F9 10 A 250 V slow blow
Table 3--8 Fuse description of the S8003 Indoor BTS
3.8 Start--up phases
The S8000/S8003 BTS start--up falls into a number of phases, which are
summarized in the following flowcharts (see Figure 3--14). The LEDs on the front
panels of the BTS boards allow to follow this start--up (see Figure 3--15
and Figure 3--16).
When the state of a btsSiteManager object goes to unlocked, the BTS can send
spontaneous messages to the controlling BSC(spontaneous messages indicating the
absence of certain equipment).
When a site starts up, the BTS does not knowthe hardware configuration necessary
for the site definition chosen by the operator. BTS alarms are active by elements:
making up the maximum configuration of a site
absent from the configuration when the site starts up
This choice requires at the OMC--R:
the operator displays the hardware configuration of the site after its start--up
the operator verifies between the hardware configuration and the chosen
configuration
To do this, perform a Display or Display all command on the btsSiteManager
object checking the btsDescription parameter is in the proper range.
3--32
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Spontaneous displays at the
OMC--R
Change of the btsSiteManager
object to disabled
BTS start--up
BSC operational
Introduction into service
of a PCM link between
the BSC and the BTS
A
Introduction into service of site
Lapdlink OML
Identification of the BTS
Verification of the identifier
and the hardware reference
by the BSC
Downloading of files to the
CSWM board of the BCF
or the CMCF board of the CBCF
Change of a pcmCircuit
object to enabled
Figure 3--14 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS
A
Spontaneous displays at the
OMC--R
B
Change of the operationalState of the
btsSiteManager object
to enabled
Activation of programs loaded
into the BCF
Configuration of the
btsSiteManager (bts number,
pcmCircuit number, etc.)
Confirmation of signaling
connection
Configuration of bts
(TRX number, general
parameters, etc.)
Figure 3--14 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS (continued)
3--34
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
B Spontaneous displays at
the OMC--R
Change of the transceiver and bts objects
to enabled
Connection of a signaling link for
each DRX
Downloading of five files
into each DRX
Activation of programs
loaded into each DRX
Configuration of the transceiver,
transceiver and distribution of the
TSs to the PCM TSs
BTS in operation
Change of the transceiverEquipment
object to disabled
Change of the transceiverEquipment
object to enabled
Figure 3--14 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS (end)
During
Self--test
After
Connection
to the
O & M bus
BCF
downloading
After During
DRX
downloading
After During
Nominal
operation
ALCO board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
PCMI board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
LFA
AIS
RRA
NOS
FE
SKP
CRC
CSWM board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
ON
O&M
ABIS
WDG
MRQ
SERV
H0
H1
H2
LC
TX
RX
LNK
COL
GTW board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
ON
: Flashing
: On
: Off
Binary code on
3 leds
Binary
code on
3 leds
Binary code on
3 leds
Binary
code on
3 leds
Binary
code on
3 leds
Binary
code on
3 leds
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
N : Not used : Not meaningful
(1) : LED turned on for the active board.
(2) : LED turned on if the board is on service.
(3) : LED turned off if the pcm between the BSC and the BTS is correct.
Figure 3--15 Start--up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF
3--36
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
During
Self--test
After
Connection
to the
O & M bus
BCF
downloading
After During
DRX
downloading
After During
Nominal
operation
: Flashing
: On
: Off
N : Not used
: Not meaningful
DRX module
+ 5V
ALA
RES1
DRX
AMNU
SPU
BDT
TX
LI
CL
TX
RX
DSC board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
SYNC module
UNLOCK
ALARM
MASTER
during 5 s
Ethernet
link
(1) : LED turned on only for
the active board.
(1)
Figure 3--15 Start--up phases of an S8000 BTS using LEDs of the BCF (end)
During
Self--test
After
Connection
to the
slaves
CBCF
downloading
After During
DRX
downloading
After During
Nominal
operation
RECAL board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
CPCMI board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
SKP
LFA
NOS
RRA
CMCF board
BIST
+ 5V
RDY
ON
ABIS
RUN
OVEN
LOCKED
CLK0
CLK1
CLK2
HLDVR
LNK
COL
RX
TX
DRX module
+5V
ALA
RES1
DRX
AMNU
SPU
BDT
TX
LI
CL
TX
RX
: Flashing
: On
: Off
(1)
N : Not used : Not meaningful
(1) : LED turned on only for the active board.
(2) : LED not used for the active board. LED used for the passive board and
turned on as soon as this board is synchronized on the active one.
(3) : LED turned off if the pcm between the BSC and the BTS is correct.
(3)
(2)

Binary
code on
3 LEDs
Ethernet
link
Figure 3--16 Start--up phases of an S8000 / S8003 BTS using LEDs of the CBCF
3--38
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Faults without alarms at the OMC--R Nortel Networks Confidential 4--1
4 FAULTS WITHOUT ALARMS AT THE OMC--R
4.1 Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to detect and locate the modules that do not send
alarms to the OMC--R.
Note: S8003 Indoor BTS is identified on the OMC--R as an S8000 Indoor BTS
4.2 Fault location
This paragraph lists the cases leading to a loss of site.
An alarm of a site state change has been displayed on the OMC--R.
4.2.1 BTS state
On the site, the mains power supply is not present.
The following elements are concerned:
high temperature and low temperature thermostats
main circuit breaker in the case of a single--phase or split single--phase mains
power supply
rectifier breaker
power supply rack
Faults without alarms at the OMC--R
4--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4.2.2 On--site checking procedures
Procedure
Step Action
1 Check the type of the AC box.
For a single--phase or split single--phase AC box type 1, go to step 2.
Otherwise, go to step 3.
2 Check the AC box indicator light.
If the indicator light is on, go to step 3.
f the indicator light is off, replace the main circuit breaker (Field Replaceable
Unit). Refer to Paragraph 6.2.11. Then go to step 3.
3 Check the green LEDs on the power supply rack rectifiers.
If all the LEDs are on, go to step 4.
If the indicator light is off, perform the following actions.
For the GIPS, replace the ADU module. Refer to Paragraph 6.2.58 then
go to step 4.
Otherwise, replace the main circuit breaker (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer
to Paragraph 6.2.11. Then go to step 3.
Faults without alarms at the OMC--R Nortel Networks Confidential 4--3
4 Check the LEDs on the PCU / DCU.
If all the LEDs are on, go to step 5.
If all the LEDs are off:
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied with the mains power supply.
Undo the six screws on the front panel with the battery breaker, above the
power supply rack.
Remove the battery breaker front panel.
For the GIPS, disconnect the sub--D alarm connector (refer to the
Paragraph 6.2.58)
Otherwise, disconnect the two sub--D connectors (refer to the replacement
procedure of the power supply rack: Paragraph 6.2.55 or 6.2.54).
If the BTS remains turned off, replace the power supply rack (Field
Replaceable Unit -- Refer to Paragraph 6.2.55 or 6.2.54) or the GIPS.
If the BTS is turned on, the thermostats are faulty. Replace the
thermostats (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to Paragraph 6.2.68.
Then go to step 5.
5 Check the power supply.
a. For the GIPS, put the PA, DRX, BCF, DACS circuit breakers in the ON
position.
Otherwise, put the L1/CB1, L2/CB2, L3/CB3 and L4/CB4 circuit breakers in the
I position.
b. In the case of a new break, replace the power supply rack (Field Replaceable
Unit -- Refer to Paragraph 6.2.55 or 6.2.54) or the GIPS. Then go to step 6.
6 Additional operations
Make sure that the possible faults have been cleared.
Faults without alarms at the OMC--R
4--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4.2.3 On--site checking procedures for S8003 BTS
Procedure
Step Action
1 Check that CB01 main breaker is in the I position.
2 Additional operation
Make sure that the possibly faults have been cleared.
Preventive maintenance procedures Nortel Networks Confidential 5--1
5 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
5.1 Introduction
5.1.1 Presentation
This chapter contains the preventive maintenance procedures applicable to the
S8000 BTS and to the S8003 BTS.
There are two types of procedures:
test procedures, given in this chapter (the structure of a test procedure is
described in Paragraph 5.1.5)
replacement procedures, given in Chapter 6
These procedures must be performed following the schedule given below (twice a
year, once a year, or every two years, etc., see Table 5--2 to Table 5--9).
Table 5--10, Table 5--11, and Table 5--12 present a summary of the preventive
maintenance schedule.
If proper preventive maintenance is not performed on the DACSand LNDACS, the
units may malfunction which in turn can result in a loss of service during
temperature extremes.
This activity yields the best results if performed prior to the onset of cold weather.
If any of the findings of this preventive maintenance procedure require the
replacement of any part or assembly, please refer to the corresponding NTP
document for that action.
It is possible to group some procedures, which reduces the intervention time. The
provided intervention time corresponds to the intervention time for only one item
of equipment.
CAUTION
Advice OMC--R Supervisor of your maintenance operations
Procedures durationmay belonger thanbatteriescapacity andBTS
outage is possible. Advize OMC--R supervisor that alarms may
occur and he may take the appropriate actions.
Preventive maintenance procedures
5--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.1.2 Test schedule
The following tables list the items of equipment according to their test schedule.
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site intervention
time
Impact of the test on
the service
Test sheet
Test of the fans S8003
Indoor
5 minutes none 5.4.12
Table 5--1 Test performed twice a year
Equipment S800x BTS
time
the service
Test sheet
AC lightning protector ** S8000
Outdoor
30 minutes loss of service if there
are not any batteries
5.4.1
Standard DACS or Low
Noise DACS
S8000
Outdoor
30 minutes loss of service 5.4.15
Door gasket* S8000
Indoor
10 minutes for each
gasket
none 5.4.4
S8003
Indoor
10 minutes for each
gasket
none 5.4.4
Door gasket or hood
gasket
S8000
Outdoor
5 minutes for each
gasket
none 5.4.5
External alarm primary
lightning protectors
S8000
Outdoor
10 minutes for each
lightning protector
none 5.4.6
External alarm secondary
S8000
Outdoor
5 minutes for each
lightning protector
none 5.4.7
External batteries S8000
Outdoor
one hour per string loss of service if loss
of the mains power
supply
5.4.3
Ground fault interrupter S8000
Outdoor
Internal batteries ** S8000
Outdoor
45 minutesr loss of service if loss
of the mains power
supply
5.4.3
Lightning protectors of the
48 V box
S8000
Outdoor
PCM lightning protectors S8000
Outdoor
10 minutes for each
lightning protector
none 5.4.10
Equipment Test sheet
the service
time
S800x BTS
Secondary lightning
protector*
S8000
Indoor
15 minutes for each
board
none 5.4.11
S8003
Indoor
Table 5--2 Tests performed once a year
Note: * The schedule is reduced by half in a severe environment. ** it is recommended to performthe test of the
internal batteries before the test of the AC lightning protector.
5--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.1.3 Replacement schedule
The following tables list the items of equipment according to their replacement
schedule.
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
ACU filter S8000
Outdoor
Air filter*
S8003
Indoor
Note: * The schedule is reduced by half in a severe environment.
Table 5--3 Replacements performed twice a year
Equipment S8000 BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
Standard DACS or
Low Noise DACS
filter*
Outdoor 5 minutes none 6.2.25
Fan filter** Indoor 15 minutes none 6.2.44
Note: * The replacement of the Standard or LowNoise DACS filter must be performed at least once a year and
varies according to the environment of the BTS: to obtain a more accurate and appropriate schedule,
see Paragraph 8.1.3.
Note: ** The schedule is reduced by half in a severe environment.
Table 5--4 Replacements performed once a year
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
Door gasket S8000
Indoor
2 hours for
full configuration
none 6.2.34
S8003
Indoor
2 hours for
full configuration
none 6.2.34
Door or hood gasket S8000
Outdoor
2 hours none 6.2.35
6.2.47
External batteries S8000
Outdoor
30 minutes per
string
loss of service if loss
of the mains power
supply
6.2.39
6.2.40
Internal batteries S8000
Outdoor
20 minutes for
each battery
loss of service if loss
of the mains power
supply
6.2.48
Table 5--5 Replacements performed every four years
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
ACU S8000
Outdoor
2 hours none 6.2.14
ACU gasket S8000
Outdoor
included in ACU
replacement
loss of service 6.2.16
Ground fault
interrupter
S8000
Outdoor
6.2.46
Fans S8003
Indoor
Table 5--6 Replacements performed every five years
5--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment S8000 BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
Standard or Low
Noise DACS
Outdoor 1 hour loss of service 6.2.20
Standard or Low
Noise DACS gasket
S8000
Outdoor
30 minutes for
each gasket
loss of service 6.2.16
Table 5--7 Replacement performed every six years
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
AC lightning protector S8000
Outdoor
6.2.67
6.2.69
External alarm
primary lightning
protector
S8000
Outdoor
2h30
(full
configuration)
none 6.2.37
External alarm
secondary lightning
protector
S8000
Outdoor
15 minutes
(full
configuration)
none 6.2.38
Lightning protector of
the 48 V box
S8000
Outdoor
PCM lightning
protector
S8000
Outdoor
Secondary lightning
protector*
S8000
Indoor
S8003
Indoor
Thermostats S8000
Outdoor
4 hours none 6.2.68
Table 5--8 Replacements performed every ten years
Equipment S800x BTS
On--site
intervention time
Impact of the
replacement on the
service
Replacement sheet
75 kit S8000
Outdoor
S8000
Indoor
S8003
Indoor
15 minutes none
6.2.72
6.2.71
6.2.71
Table 5--9 Replacement performed every fifteen years
5.1.4 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule
The following tables summarize the preventive maintenance schedule of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS, the S8000 Indoor BTS, and the S8003 Indoor BTS.
5.1.4.1 S8000 Outdoor BTS schedule
Equipment
Required test
schedule
Mandatory
replacement
schedule
Test sheet
Replacement
sheet
AC lightning protector once a year every 10 years 5.4.1 6.2.67, 6.2.69
ACU -- every 5 years -- 6.2.14
ACU filter -- twice a year -- 6.2.15
ACU gasket -- every 5 years -- 6.2.16
Standard or Low Noise DACS once a year every 6 years 5.4.15 6.2.20
Standard or Low Noise DACS
filter
-- once a year -- 6.2.25
Standard or Low Noise DACS
gasket
-- every 6 years -- 6.2.16
Door gasket or hood gasket once a year every 4 years 5.4.5 6.2.35, 6.2.47
External batteries once a year every 4 years 5.4.3 6.2.39, 6.2.38,
6.2.39
External alarm primary lightning
protector
once a year every 10 years 5.4.6 6.2.37
lightning protector
Ground fault interrupter once a year every 5 years 5.4.8 6.2.46
Internal batteries once a year every 4 years 5.4.3 6.2.48
5--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipment
Replacement
sheet
Test sheet
Mandatory
replacement
schedule
Required test
schedule
Lightning protector of the 48 V
box
PCM lightning protector once a year every 10 years 5.4.10 6.2.51
Thermostats -- every 10 years -- 6.2.68
75 kit -- every 15 years -- 6.2.71
Table 5--10 Summary of the preventive maintenance schedule of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.1.4.2 S8000 Indoor BTS schedule
Equipment
Required test
schedule
Mandatory
replacement
schedule
Test sheet
Replacement
sheet
Door gasket once a year* every 4 years 5.4.4 6.2.34
Fan filter -- once a year* -- 6.2.44
Secondary alarm
lightning protector
once a year* every 10 years* 5.4.11 6.2.64
75 kit -- every 15 years -- 6.2.71
S8000 Indoor BTS
5.1.4.3 S8003 Indoor BTS schedule
Equipment
Required test
schedule
Mandatory
replacement
schedule
Test sheet
Replacement
sheet
Door gasket once a year* every 4 years 5.4.4 6.2.34
Air filter -- every 6 months* -- 6.2.73
Fans twice a year every 5 years 5.4.12 6.2.74
Secondary alarm
lightning protector
once a year* every 10 years* 5.4.11 --
75 box -- every 15 years -- 6.2.71
S8003 Indoor BTS
5--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.1.5 Description of a preventive maintenance procedure sheet
Apreventive maintenance procedure sheet is divided into the followingparagraphs:
the title
the main body composed of steps explaining how to test an item of equipment
the figure(s) if necessary
5.1.5.1 Main body of the sheet
The main body contains the following information:
the product reference
the range of application, which explains which item of equipment is concerned
by the test procedure
the schedule, which reminds the operator how often the test procedure must be
performed
the intervention time
the tools required
the impact of the test procedure:
on the operation of the cabinet
at the OMC--R
on the service
the location of the equipment to be tested
the action, which contains the step--by--step actions of the test procedure. These
actions are summarized in a flowchart presented at the beginning of the sheet.
5.1.5.2 Figures
The figures are provided to help the operator perform the actions. They show the
item of equipment schematically.
5.2 On--site checks
5.2.1 Preliminary checks before performing preventive maintenance
procedures
DANGER
Personnel safety rules
Personnel working on the cabinet must be authorized to work
according to the safety standards.
CAUTION
During every maintenance action, and especially when handlingthe
boards, the operator must wear an antistatic bracelet.
DANGER
Electric shock
WARNING
Rain, Snow or High Humidity Weather Conditions
Make sure that there is no water trapped on the top of the door
gasket prior to opening doors. If water is present, wipe or sponge
off water to avoid water from entering the BTS.
5--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Cap
Ty--wrap
Figure 5--1 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures
5.2.2 Final checks after having performed preventive maintenance
procedures
CAUTION
Once the preventive maintenance procedures are performed,
ensure the hood key--locks are properly secured.
To ensure the hood key--locks are properly secured, the keyholes must be in the
vertical position.
For version EP2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS, ensure the hood is properly secured :
Verify the back of the hood is inserted under the back--panel pins (one on each side).
Close the two front hood locks and remove the keys. Keyholes must be in the vertical
position.
Verify the hood is properly closed. It must not be lifted more than 7 mm above the air
outlet.
Leave the premises clean and tidy.
5--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.3 Check at the OMC--R
5.3.1 Preliminary checks before performing preventive maintenance
procedures
Preventive maintenance procedures on equipment are performed only when no
alarms are present.
Before taking any action, check the OMC--R Browser browser windows at the
OMC--R, which provide a means of graphically monitoring the network.
When the graphical elements of the display are gray, no alarms are active. The
preventive maintenance procedures can be performed.
5.3.2 Final checks after having performed preventive maintenance
procedures
After performing the preventive maintenance procedures, check the network has
resumed its correct operation.
The graphical objects must appear without any alarm in the OMC--R Browser
browser windows at the OMC--R. The preventive maintenance procedures are
complete.
If there are alarms on the graphical objects concerned, check the condition of the
site using the Display all command on the btsSiteManager object:
If the operationalState is enabled, clear the alarms to complete the preventive
maintenance procedures.
If the operationalState is disabled, set the btsSiteManager object to locked
and then back to unlocked, and then perform the Display hardware
information command of the btsSiteManager object:
If all equipment is operating, clear the active alarms. The preventive
maintenance procedures are complete.
If certain items of equipment have failed, refer to the replacement procedures.
5.4 Preventive maintenance procedure sheets
5.4.1 Test of the AC lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product list :
single--phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the single--phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90BA or NTQA90BB)
in the single--phase AC box type 2 (NTQA90BC)
in the single--phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90BE)
split single--phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the split single--phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90AA)
in the split single--phase AC box type 2 (NTQA90AB)
in the split single--phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90AC)
tri--phase AC lightning protector type 1
in the tri--phase AC box type 1 (NTQA90CA or NTQA90CB)
in the tri--phase AC box type 3 (NTQA90CC)
in the tri--phase AC box type 4 (NTQA90CD)
in the tri--phase AC box type 4 (NTQA90FA)
Range of application
This procedure applies to the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM
900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Perform this test once a year.
Intervention time
According to the configuration, intervention time is approximately 30 minutes.
Tools required
Screwdriver
Box--spanner
Adhesive isolate tape
Joslyn tester: Surge Protector Test Set Model 4010--01
5--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Impact of the test on the service
DANGER
The test is prohibited during thunderstorm conditions.
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS does not remain supplied with the mains power supply.
CAUTION
Service interruption
The BTS operates on batteries if they are present. To perform the
procedure without interruption, check the batteries before
performing a lightning protector test. Due to the limited autonomy
of batteries (seeParagraph 3.2.3.3) check battery dischargetimes.
If batteries do not exist, there is a loss of service.
Location
The AC lightning protector is located in the AC box (see Figure 5--2 and Figure 5--3).
Procedure
Refer to Figure 5--4 for a flowchart of the procedure.
AC lightning
protector
Figure 5--2 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
ACUs
5--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
AC lightning
protector
Figure 5--3 Location of the AC lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
DACS
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
Step 6
End
Step 7
Replace the AC
lightning protector
Yes
Yes
Is a replacement required ?
Step 4
No
No
Turn off the
AC switch
Open the AC box
Perform the
visual test
Close the AC box
Turn on the
AC switch
Perform the
electrical test
Step 8
Figure 5--4 Flowchart of the test procedure of the AC lightning protector of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Step Action
1 Switch off the AC switch
If the mains power supply is single--phase or split single--phase, perform the
following actions.
i. Check the battery circuit breaker, if any, is in the I position
(see Figure 5--5, Figure 5--9 and Figure 5--12).
ii. Put the main breaker in the O position.
iii. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
If the mains power supply is tri--phase, perform the following actions.
i. Check the battery circuit breaker, if any, is in the I position
(see Figure 5--12).
ii. Press the general stop button.
2 Open the AC box
If the mains power supply is single--phase or split single--phase, performthe
following actions.
i. Disconnect the alarm cable C01 from the AC box and the rectifier cable.
ii. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the AC box side and
remove the small cover (see Figure 5--5).
iii. In the case of the AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC cable by
unscrewing the screws no.3 on the terminal block andthe nut on theground
connection (see Figure 5--7 for the single--phase ACbox or Figure 5--10 for
the split single--phase AC box).
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, disconnect the input AC cable
by removing the nuts from the filters and the nut on the ground connection
(see Figure 5--8).
iv. Remove the input AC cable gland by unscrewing the large nut (see
Figure 5--5 and Figure 5--7).
If the mains power supply is tri--phase one, perform the following actions.
i. Disconnect the alarmcable C01 located on top of the tri--phase ACbox and
the rectifier cable (see Figure 5--12).
ii. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the box side and remove
the small cover.
iii. Locate the following wires:
three phases
neutral ground
ground
iv. Make a note of the wire positions.
v. Locate the four lightning protector wires.
vi. Disconnect the four lightning protector wires.
vii. In the case of the AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC cable gland by
removing the four nuts on the filter and the nut on the ground connection
(see Figure 5--13).
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, disconnect the input AC cable
gland by removing the nuts from the filters and the nut on the ground
connection (see Figure 5--14).
viii. Remove the AC input cable gland by unscrewing the large nut.
3 Perform the visual test of the AC lightning protector
If the cabinet contains the AClightning protector type 1, performthefollowing
actions.
Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover, board and terminal
blocks.
If there is no damage, go to step 4.
If there is damage, go to step 7.
If the cabinet contains the AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4,
perform the following actions.
i. Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover and terminal blocks.
ii. Check for signs of burns to the cables.
iii. Check the state of the indicator of each plug--in module:
If it is white, the lightning protector is correct. Go to step 5.
If it is white and red, the lightning protector is not correct and the
corresponding plug--in module must be changed. Go to step 8.
If it is red, the lightning protector is not correct and the corresponding
plug--in module must be changed. Go to step 8.
4 Perform the electrical test of the AC lightning protector.
If the cabinet contains the single--phase AC lightning protector type 1,
perform the following actions (there is not any electrical test of the AC lightning
protectors type 2 and type 3).
Observe the operating instructions for the Joslyn tester.
i. Mark and disconnect the two wires (Phase and Neutral) of the AClightning
protector (see Figure 5--7). from the terminal block.
ii. Isolate the two lugs with the adhesive tape.
iii. Connect the red wire of the tester to the varistor nut (black wire).
iv. Connect the black wire of the tester to the other varistor nut (white wire).
5--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
v. Pushthetest buttonof thetester. Thetest valueis maintainedonthedisplay
until the test button is released.
vi. Note the value:
If the value is above 420 V, go to step 5.
If the value is below 420 V, go to step 7.
If the cabinet contains the split single--phase AC lightning protector type 1,
type 2 or type 3, perform the following actions.
i. Mark and disconnect the three wires (Phase L1, Phase L2, and Neutral) of
the AC lightning protector (see 3.8). from the terminal block.
ii. Isolate the three lugs with the adhesive tape.
iii. Connect the red wire of the tester to the first varistor nut (black wire).
vi. Note the first value.
vii. Disconnect the red wire of the tester and connect it to the other varistor nut
(the other black wire).
viii. Pushthetest buttonof thetester. Thetest valueis maintainedonthedisplay
ix. Note the second value.
If both values are above 210 V, go to step 5.
If at least one of both values is below 210 V, go to step 7.
If the cabinet contains the tri--phase AC lightning protector type1, perform
the following actions (there is not any electrical test of the tri--phase
AC lightning protectors type 2, type 3 and type 4).
i. Mark and disconnect the four wires (Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L3 and
Neutral) of the AC lightning protector (see Figure 5--13). from the terminal
block.
ii. Isolate the four lugs with the adhesive tape.
iii. Connect the red wire of the tester to the first varistor nut (black wire).
vi. Note the first value.
vii. Disconnect the red wire of the tester and connect it to the second varistor
nut (the second black wire).
viii. Pushthetest buttonof thetester. Thetest valueis maintainedonthedisplay
ix. Note the second value.
x. Disconnect the red wire of the tester and connect it to the third varistor nut
(the third black wire).
xi. Pushthetest buttonof thetester. Thetest valueis maintainedonthedisplay
xii. Note the third value.
If the three values are above 420 V, go to step 5.
If at least one of the three values is below 420 V, go to step 7.
5 Close the AC box
following actions.
i. Install the input AC cable gland and tighten the large nut (see Figure 5--5,
Figure 5--9).
ii. In the case of the ACbox type 1, connect the input ACcable on the terminal
block and the nut on the ground connection.
In the case of the AC box type 2 or type 3, screw the nuts on the filters and
the nut on the ground connection.
iii. Connect the two or three AClightning protector wires on the terminal block
(see Figure 5--5, Figure 5--9).
iv. Insert the small cover.
v. Tighten the seven or eight screws no.4 on the AC box side.
vi. Connect the rectifier cable.
vii. Connect the alarm cable to the AC box.
i. Install the input ACcable gland and tighten the large nut (see Figure 5--12).
ii. In the case of the ACbox type 1, connect the input ACcable on the terminal
block and the nut on the ground connection.
Inthecaseof theACbox type2, type3or type4, screwthenutsonthefilters
an the nut on the ground connection.
iii. Connect the four AC lightning protector wires on the terminal block
(see Figure 5--12).
5--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6 Switch on the AC switch
following actions.
i. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
ii. Put the main circuit breaker of the AC box in the I position.
iii. Go to step 9.
i. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
ii. Put all the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
iii. Go to step 9.
7 Replace the AC lightning protector
Replace the AC lightning protector according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.67 for the (split) single--phase AC lightning protector and
Paragraph 6.2.69 for the tri--phase one).
8 Replace the faulty plug--in module of the AC lightning protector
Replace the plug--in module according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.67 for the (split) single--phase AC lightning protector and
Paragraph 6.2.69 for the tri--phase one).
9 The procedure is complete.
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable
C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Battery circuit breaker
Main breaker
Note: All the items of the AC box are not drawn on the figure.
Figure 5--5 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--26
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Figure 5--6 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Lightning
protector
Phase
Varistor
nuts
Neutral
Ground
connection
Terminal
block
Eight
screws no. 4
Large nut
Screws
no. 3
Input
AC cable
(three wires)
Lug
Figure 5--7 View of the single--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--28
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Large nut
Nuts
Lug
Ground
connection
Figure 5--8 View of the single--phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Battery circuit
breaker
Main breaker
Note: All the items of the AC box are not drawn
on the figure.
Figure 5--9 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--30
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Neutral
Ground
connection
Lightning
protector
Phase
L2
Varistor
nuts
Phase L1
Terminal
block
Screws
no. 3
Eight
screws no. 4
Large nut
Lug
Figure 5--10 View of the split single--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Seven screws
Large nut
Nuts
Lug
Figure 5--11 View of the split single--phase AC lightning protector type 2 or type 3 of
the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--32
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven or eight
screws
Large nut
Battery circuit
breaker
Alarm cable
Rectifier
cable
Screw no. 2
Ground cable
Screw no. 1
General stop
button
Note: All the items of the AC box are not drew on the figure.
Figure 5--12 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Phase L1
Ground
connection
Lightning
protector
Neutral
(white wire)
Varistor nut
no.1
Varistor nut
no.3
Terminal
block
Phase L2
Phase L3
Varistor nut
no.2
Alarm wires
Input AC
cable
(five wires)
Eight
screws
Figure 5--13 View of the tri--phase AC lightning protector type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--34
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven screws
Nuts
Large nut
Figure 5--14 View of the tri--phase AC lightning protector type 2, type 3 or type 4 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.2 Test of the AC lightning protectors (battery cabinet)
Product reference
Equipment PEC codes CPC codes
phase plug--in protection
module
A0773606
neutral plug--in protection
module
A0773608
This procedure applies to the AC lightning protector of the battery cabinet.
Schedule
DANGER
Electric shock
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes.
Required tool(s)
Phillips screwdriver
Surge protector tester
None.
Location
The AC lightning protection modules are located in the AC box (see Figure 5--16).
Warning
DANGER
5--36
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
Step 7
End
Step 8
Replace the c--AC lightning
protector module
Yes
No
Turn off
the mains at the cabinet level
Open the c--AC box
Perform the visual test
Close the c--AC box
Turn on
the mains at the cabinet level
Step 9
Step 4
Step 10
Check the I
position of the DC Breaker
Turn off
the mains at the operator box level
Turn on
the mains at the operator box level
Step 6
Yes
No
Perform the electrical test
Figure 5--15 Flowchart of the AC lightning protector test procedure (battery cabinet)
Procedure
Step Action
1 Check the DC breaker of the battery cabinet is in the I position.
2 Switch off the battery cabinet AC breaker.
3 SWITCH OFF THE MAINS (battery cabinet breaker only) AT THE OPERATOR
BOX LEVEL.
4 Open the AC box.
Undo the four screws and remove the cover.
5 Perform the visual test of the AC box
a. Check on signs of burns or damage to the cover, case, terminals or cables.
b. Check the indicator state of each plug--in module.
If it is white and red or completely red, the protector is not correct. The
corresponding plug--in module must be changed.
If the indicator is white, the lightning protector is still good.
6 Perform the electrical test of the AC lightning protector
Use the surge protector tester to check the operational state of the modules. Any
lightning protector which doesnt work properly must be changed.
7 Close the c--AC box
Screw back the cover.
8 Turn on the mains power supply at the operator box
9 Switch on the battery cabinet AC breaker
10 The procedure is complete
5--38
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 5--16 Location of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet)
5.4.3 Test of the internal and external batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
Equipments PEC codes CPC codes
Internal batteries SBS40 NTQA36FA A0758427
External batteries SBS60 NTQA36GA A0758428
SBS60
NTQA92BB A0809687
SBSC11
NTQA92EA A0809688
This procedureapplies tothebatteries of theS8000 Outdoor BTSfor GSM 850, 900, 1800,
and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 45 minutes for the internal batteries.
The intervention time is approximately 60 minutes per string for the external batteries.
Tools required
Special Benning Accutest: ref. 7511501030, scale 100 A (or equivalent)
DC clamp ammeter with a scale of 10 or 20 A: ref. PAC10 (Chauvin & Arnoux)
10 mm wrench
Torque wrench with socket
Cloth
Rubber gloves
Adhesive isolate tape
Set of four new batteries ready for use
Emery cloth
5--40
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DANGER
Electric shock
CAUTION
Risk of loss of service.
Feedback of alarms to the OMC--R.
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is enabled.
Location
CAUTION
To ensure the hood key--locks are properly secured, refer to
paragraph 5.2.2
The internal batteries are located below the hood (see Figure 5--17 and Figure 5--18).
The external batteries are located in the external battery cabinet (see Figure 5--19 to
Figure 5--21).
Internal
batteries
Figure 5--17 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with ACUS
5--42
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Internal
batteries
Figure 5--18 Location of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with DACS
Battery string
Battery string
Battery string
Battery string
DC
panel
Heating and
ventilation unit
AC
panel
Plinth
AC breaker
DC breaker
HVU breaker
Figure 5--19 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (NTQA36GA batteries)
5--44
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DC
box
Nuts no. 2
Plinth
Nut no. 1
Clamp
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 5 1 bis
2 6 2 bis
3 7 3 bis
4 8 4 bis
Blue cable
Black cable
Figure 5--20 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)
DC
box
Plinth
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 1 bis 5
2 2 bis 6
3 3 bis 7
4 4 bis 8
Strap
Black cable
Blue cable
Lug no. 2
Clamp
Lug no. 1
Figure 5--21 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)
5--46
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site
Step 2
Step 6
End
Step 7
Replace the
batteries
Yes
Yes
I > 200 mA ?
No
No
Open the door
Perform the
charge check
Close the door
Step 1
End
Step 3 Perform the
servicing
Step 4 Perform the
electrical test
Step 5
Analyze the results
Step 8
Step 8
Figure 5--22 Flowchart of the test procedure of the batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure
DANGER
If the skin or clothing is splashed by the sulphuric acid during a test,
wash thoroughly with water and consult a doctor if necessary.
Wear rubber gloves for all test operations.
CAUTION
Before visiting the site, check for a mains power failure on the site
within the last 48 hours.
After a mains power failure, the cabinet must operate on the mains
for at least 24 hours to reload the batteries.
DANGER
Never short--circuit the batteries.
Never try to open a battery.
DANGER
Environment protection
Never throw a battery in the fire.
5--48
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Step Action
1 Access the batteries
If the internal batteries are being tested, perform the following actions:
i. Open the doors.
ii. Open the hood (see Figure 5--23).
iii. Open the cover and attach it with the safety cable on the hood.
If the external batteries are being tested, perform the following action.
Open the door.
2 Check the charge
DANGER
The personnel performing this check must wear rubber gloves and
must be isolated from the ground.
The check of the external batteries must be performed string by string.
Ensure the batteries are not being charged. To do so, use the clamp ammeter
located next to the battery connector (see Figure 5--23 or Figure 5--24) to check
the battery residual charge current is below 200 mA.
If the battery charge current is below 200 mA, go to step 3.
If the battery charge current is over 200 mA, the batteries are being charged.
Go to step 8.
3 Perform the servicing
DANGER
Electric shock
CAUTION
Risk of loss of service.
Feedback of alarms to the OMC--R.
a. Preliminary operations
Internal batteries
i. Switch off the battery circuit breaker.
External batteries (check string by string)
ii. Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray (if any) wires and
isolate them with the adhesive tape (see Figure 5--24).
iii. Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate it with the
adhesive tape.
b. Cleaning
i. Clean the batteries with a damp cloth.
ii. Do not use corrosive detergents or oil.
c. Corrosion check (visual inspections)
i. Remove the plastic cover on the screws, and check for the presence of
corrosion on the terminals of a string.
ii. If there are traces of corrosion on the terminals:
Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray wires and isolate
them with the adhesive tape (see Figure 5--23).
Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate it with the
adhesive tape.
Mark the three black inter--battery cables.
Unscrew the six nuts connecting the inter--battery cables.
Clean the cable and the battery terminals with an emery cloth, then with
a damp cloth.
Reconnect the three inter--battery cables.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Use the torque wrench. The terminal tightening torque must be
3.9 N--m.
5--50
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
iii. If there is no trace of corrosion on the terminals, go to step 4.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
3.9 N--m.
4 Perform the electrical test
a. Definition of the test criteria
In addition to the systematic replacement of a set of batteries (every four years)
there are three electrical criteria for the preventive test of batteries:
the open--circuit voltage: V
o
Vo is the open circuit voltage measured with the Benning accutest
(ref. 7511501030, scale open or 0 A).
The voltages measured are V
o1
, V
o2
, V
o3
, V
o4
.
The voltages are expressed in Volts.
the load voltage: V
L
V
L
is the loaded voltage measured with the Benning accutest
(ref. 7511501030, scale 100 A).
The voltages measured are V
L1
, V
L2
, V
L3
, V
L4
.
The voltages are expressed in Volts.
the difference between the two extreme open--circuit voltages: dV
o
The definition is dV
o
=V
max
--V
min
,
where V
max
=V
max
[V
o1
, V
o2
, V
o3
, V
o4]
and V
min
=V
min
[V
o1
, V
o2
, V
o3
, V
o4
].
dV
o
is in fact an image of the open--circuit unbalance of the batteries.
DANGER
The personnel performing this check must wear rubber gloves and
must be isolated from the ground.
b. Electrical test
ii. Disconnect the batteries (see Figure 5--23 and Figure 5--24):
Unscrew the nuts no.1 connecting the black and gray (if any) wires and
isolate them with the adhesive tape.
Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire and isolate it with the
adhesive tape.
iii. Measure the open--circuit voltages V
o1
, V
o2
, V
o3
and V
o4
with the Benning
accutest.
iv. Measure the four load voltages V
L1
, V
L2
, V
L3
and V
L4
with the Benning
accutest.
DANGER
Electric shock
There is a risk of sparks during the test.
v. Fill in the table below, which is given as an example:
Recommended
periodicity
Test
date
Open--circuit voltages [in
Volt]
Load voltages [in Volt]
Open--
circuit
difference
-- -- V
o1
V
o2
V
o3
V
o4
V
L1
V
L2
V
L3
V
L4
dV
o
Initial values
1 year
2 years
3 years
4 years
5--52
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Nut no.2
Nut no.3
Cover
Nut no.1
Clamp ammeter
Figure 5--23 View of the internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
DC
Climatic unit
AC
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Nut
no. 2
Nut
no. 1
Clamp ammeter
Plinth
Blue Black
AC breaker
DC breaker
HVU breaker
5--54
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
vi. To fill in the Open--circuit difference column on the right, calculate the
open--circuit difference dV
0
(see step 4.a).
vii. Reconnect the batteries and turn the battery breaker to the On position.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
3.9 N--m.
Screw the nut no.1 connecting the black wire and the gray (if any) wire.
Screw the nut no.2 connecting the blue wire.
5 Analyze the results using the table below:
Limit conditions for each battery
of under 4 years old
Condition of the
Maintenance
open--circuit
voltages
V
o
[1,2,3,4]
load voltages
V
L
[1,2,3,4]
open--circuit
difference
dV
o
Condition of the
complete set of
batteries
Maintenance
action
> 12.5 V > 11 V < 0.5V ==> operational Case 1
< 12.5V x x ==> not operational
x < 11 V x ==> not operational Case 2
x x > 0.5V ==> not operational
Set of batteries more than 4 years old ==> not operational Case 3
The analysis of the acceptance criteria for a set of batteries may be resumed as
follows:
Case 1
If the three criteria below are met, the batteries are operational:
open--circuit voltage V
o
> 12.5 V
load voltage V
L
> 11 V
the difference between the two extreme open--circuit voltages dV
o
< 0.5 V
Go to step 6.
Case 2
If any one of these three criteria is not met, the batteries are not operational:
Replace the complete set. Go to step 7.
Case 3
When the four batteries are over four years old, the whole set must be replaced.
Go to step 7.
The batteries must therefore be systematically replaced every four years.
6 Close the door or the cover and the hood
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
If the internal batteries were tested, perform the following actions.
i. Detach the safety cable and close the battery cover.
ii. Close the hood.
iii. Go to step 8.
lf the external batteries were tested, perform the following actions.
i. Close the door.
ii. Go to step 8.
7 Replace the batteries
CAUTION
In the case of a replacement, the whole set must be changed.
The four batteries in a same set must be identical (brand,
date--code, reference number--NMC).
The condition of the batteries must also be monitored in time.
5--56
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
In order to monitor them, the four batteries are individually marked: it is therefore
forbidden to invert the batteries within a same set.
Replace the batteries according to the replacement procedure (refer to
Paragraph 6.2.48for theinternal batteries and Paragraphs 6.2.39, 6.2.39 or 6.2.40
for the external batteries).
5.4.4 Test of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Door gasket
(for S8000 Indoor BTS):
-- the base cabinet -- R0118061
Door gasket
-- the BCF cabinet -- R0118060
Door gasket
-- 2 vertical gaskets -- P0603947
-- 2 horizontal gaskets -- P0603948
-- 1 partition gasket -- P0603949
This procedure applies to the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800,
and 1900, or the BCF cabinet, if any, and of the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900 and 1800.
Schedule
Perform this procedure once a year.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes for each gasket.
Tools required
None
DANGER
Electric shock
5--58
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Location
The door gasket is located on the cabinet of:
the S8000 Indoor BTS (see Figure 5--25)
the S8003 Indoor BTS (see Figure 5--26)
.
12
3
0
2 0 0
01
1
C
0
C
1
1
BCF 4A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PA FANS DRX ALCO/BCF
Ventilation system
Ventilation rack
Door
gasket
Door
gasket
Door
gasket
Cut
Figure 5--25 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet or the BCF cabinet of the
S8000 Indoor BTS
5--60
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2 vertical gaskets
Air outlets
Mechanical
frame
containing
the air filter
2 horizontal
gaskets
6 screws
1 partition gasket
Figure 5--26 Location of the door gasket on the cabinet (S8003 Indoor BTS)
Maintenance on the site
Step 1
Step 4
End
Step 3
Replace the door gasket
Yes
No
Open the door
Close the door
Step 2
Step 5
Figure 5--27 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gasket (S8000 Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS
5--62
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
1 Open the door
2 Perform the visual test for each gasket
a. Check the areas visually (see Figure 5--25).
b. Check for correct suppleness of the gasket on the door.
c. Check the compression is correct.
If the gasket is correct, go to step 3.
If the gasket is damaged, go to step 4.
3 Close the door
Go to step 5.
4 Replace the door gasket
Note: If a door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTSis damaged, replacethe fivegaskets.
Replace all the door gaskets according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.34).
5.4.5 Test of the door gasket or hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
Left door gasket NTQA31MA A0789131
Right door gasket NTQA31NA A0789133
Left door gasket EP4 -- P0991756
Right door gasket EP4 -- P0991757
Environmental gasket -- R0117842
ACU exhaust gasket -- P0870315
EMI gaskets for the
bulkhead
-- R0117841
This procedure applies to the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 5 minutes for each gasket.
Tools required
Stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
In the case of a cabinet with two ACUs (see Figure 5--28), the door gaskets are located on
the cabinet or on the doors and the hood gaskets on the cabinet hood, behind the ACUs.
In the case of a cabinet with a DACS (see Figure 5--29), the door gaskets are located on
the doors, but there is no hood gasket.
5--64
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Door gasket
Hood gasket
Figure 5--28 Location of the door gaskets or the hood gasket of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs
Door gasket
Figure 5--29 Location of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS
5--66
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site
and/or in warehouse
Step 1
End
Yes
No
Open the doors
Step 8
Step 2
Perform the first visual test
Yes
Is a repair required ?
No
Step 5
Repair the gasket
Step 7
Replace the gasket
Step 4
Close the doors
Step 3
Perform the second visual test
Yes
No
Step 6
Repair the gasket
Figure 5--30 Flowchart of the test procedure of the door gaskets of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure for the door gaskets
Refer to Figure 5--30 and Figure 5--31 for flowcharts of the procedure.
Step Action
1 Open the doors
2 Perform the first visual test
Check the entire length of the gaskets for their condition: pinch along the length of
each gasket to check that it is stuck securely tothe metal frame that faces thedoors
of the BTS.
If the gasket is stuck securely, go to step 3.
If less than 20 cm of the gasket does not adhere to the metal frame, go to step
5.
If more than 20 cmof the gasket does not adhere to the metal frame, go to step
7.
3 Perform the second visual test
Check the condition of the gasket corners.
If the gasket corners are correct, go to step 4.
If there is a visible gap in a gasket corner (possibly caused by misaligned or
improperly cut gaskets, or a lack of silicone), go to step 6
If a hole appears when a finger is lightly pressed on each side of the pre--cut
gasket, go to step 6
4 Close the doors
Go to step 8.
5 Repair the gasket length
a. Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Paragraph 6.2.35.1).
b. Go to step 3.
6 Repair the gasket corner
Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Paragraph 6.2.35.1).
7 Replace the gasket
Replace the gasket according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.35.2).
5--68
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site and
in warehouse
Step 1
End
Yes
No
Open the hood
Step 6
Step 2
Perform the visual tests
Yes
No
Step 4
Repair the gasket
Step 5
Replace the gasket
Step 3
Close the hood
Figure 5--31 Flowchart of the test procedure of the hood gasket of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure for the hood gasket
In the case of a BTS with two ACUclimatic units, the gaskets located behind the ACUs can
be mounted on the hood.
Step Action
1 Open the hood
2 Perform the visual test
a. Climb up a stepladder.
b. Pincheachgasket alongits lengthtocheck its adherencetothehoodof theBTS.
If the gasket is well stuck, go to step 3.
If the gasket is not well stuck, go to step 4.
If the gasket needs to be replaced, go to step 5.
3 Close the hood
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
Go to step 6.
4 Repair the gasket
Repair the gasket according to the repair procedure (see Paragraph 6.2.47.1).
5 Replace the gasket
Replace the gasket according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.47.2).
5--70
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.6 Test of the external alarm primary lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
This procedure applies to the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM 900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 10 minutes for one lightning protector.
Tools required
10 mm torque wrench
Flat screwdriver (6.5 x 150)
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The external alarmprimary lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit according
to the site configuration.
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
End
Step 5
Replace the external alarm
primary lightning protector
Yes
Yes
Step 3
No
No
Open the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
visual test
Close the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
electrical test
Step 6
Figure 5--32 Flowchart of the test procedure of the external alarm primary lightning
protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--72
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
1 Open the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
2 Perform the visual test of the external alarm primary lightning protectors
Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover, board and terminal blocks.
3 Perform the electrical test of a lightning protector
a. Disconnect the two wires of the lightning protector to be tested
(see Figure 5--33).
b. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire no.1.
c. Connect the black wire of the tester to the ground.
d. Push the button of the tester to read the test value (which is maintained on the
display until the test button is released).
e. Note the first value.
f. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire no.2.
g. Push the button of the tester to read the test value (which is maintained on the
display until the test button is released).
h. Note the second value.
i. After the electrical measures:
If at least one of both values are below 300 V, go to step 5.
j. Test another lightning protector until the full configuration.
4 Close the plinth or the kit
a. Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
b. Go to step 6.
5 Replace a lightning protector
Replace a lightning protector according to the replacement procedure
(see Paragraph 6.2.37).
Red wire of
the tester to
the wire no.1
Ground
connection
Black wire of the tester
to the ground
Wire no.2
One lightning protector
Figure 5--33 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--74
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.7 Test of the external alarm secondary lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
Lightning protector -- A0666945
ALPRO board NTQA1102 A0652933
This procedure applies to the external alarm secondary lightning protector of the
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The external alarmsecondary lightning protector is located at the plinth or the kit according
to the site configuration.
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
End
Step 4
Replace the external alarm
secondary lightning protector
Yes
No
Open the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
visual test
Close the plinth
or the kit
Step 5
Figure 5--34 Flowchart of the test procedure of the external alarm secondary lightning
protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--76
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
2 Perform the visual test of the external alarm lightning protector
3 Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
Go to step 5.
4 Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector
Replace the external alarm secondary lightning protector according to the
replacement procedure (see Paragraph 6.2.38).
NORTEL
Cables
Figure 5--35 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--78
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.8 Test of the ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC codes:
A0772600 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90BA and NTQA90BB
A0736729 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90BC and NTQA90BE
A0682000 for the tri--phase AC box NTQA90CA, NTQA90CB, NTQA90CC, NTQA90CD,
and NTQA90FA
A0693143 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90AA, NTQA90AB, and NTQA90AC
This procedure applies to the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS for GSM
900, and 1800.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
Differential tester
Inspection light
One chronometer
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The ground fault interrupter is located in the AC box (see Figure 5--36 and Figure 5--37).
Ground fault
interrupter
Figure 5--36 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the
ACUs
5--80
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Ground fault
interrupter
Figure 5--37 Location of the ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with
DACS
Maintenance on site
Step 1
End
Step 2
Replace the ground
fault interrupter
Yes
No
Perform the
electrical test
Step 3
Figure 5--38 Flowchart of the test procedure of the ground fault interrupter of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--82
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
1 Perform the electrical test
a. Connect the inspection light on the electrical outlet no.1 (see Figure 5--39 and
Figure 5--40).
b. Check for the inspection light being on.
c. Push the test button T of the differential tester.
d. Check the for the inspection light to be off.
2 Replace the ground fault interrupter
Replace the ground fault interrupter according to the replacement procedure
Electrical outlet
no.1
Ground fault
interrupter
Electrical outlet
no.2
Nut
Cable
Figure 5--39 View of the single--phase ground fault interrupter of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--84
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Ground fault
interrupter
Electrical outlet
no. 1
Electrical outlet
no. 2
Electrical outlet
circuit breaker
Figure 5--40 View of the tri--phase ground fault interrupter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.9 Test of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0681776
This procedure applies to the lightning protectors of the 48 V box of the
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Box spanner
Joslyn tester: Surge protector Test Set Model 4010--01
DANGER
Electric shock
The 48 V box does not remain supplied.
Location
The lightning protectors of the 48 V box are located at the plinth or the kit of the BTS
according to the site configuration.
5--86
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 6
End
Step 5
Replace the 48V box
lightning protector
Yes
Yes
Step 3
No
No
Open the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
visual test
Close the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
electrical test
Figure 5--41 Flowchart of the test procedure of the 48 V box lightning protector of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure
Step Action
1 Open the plinth or the kit
a. Remove the fuse F08 (0.25 A -- 250 V AC -- slow) fromthe user interconnection
panel.
b. Open the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
2 Perform the visual test of the 48 V box lightning protectors
Check for signs of burns or damage to the case, cover and terminal blocks.
3 Perform the electrical test of the 48 V box lightning protectors
a. Unscrew the cover fixing screw.
b. Disconnect all the wires connected on the lightning protectors.
c. Connect the red wire of the tester to an input.
d. Connect the black wire of the tester to the other input.
e. Pushthetest buttontoreadthethetest value(whichis maintainedonthedisplay
until the test button is released).
f. Note the value and compare it to the supplier value.
If the value is equal to 68 V +/-- 10%, go to step 4.
If the value is not equal to 68 V +/-- 10%, go to step 5.
4 Close the plinth or the kit
a. Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
b. Reinsert the fuse F08 (0.25 A -- 250 V AC -- slow) on the user interconnection
panel.
c. Go to step 6.
Replace the lightning protectors according to the replacement procedure
5--88
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 5--42 View of the 48 V box lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.10 Test of the PCM lightning protectors (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
This procedure applies to the PCMlightning protectors of theS8000 Outdoor BTSfor GSM
900, 1800, and 1900.
Schedule
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
10 mm torque wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The PCM lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit according to the site
configuration.
5--90
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Maintenance on site
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 6
End
Step 5
Replace the PCM
lightning protector
Yes
Yes
Step 3
No
No
Open the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
visual test
Close the plinth
or the kit
Perform the
electrical test
Figure 5--43 Flowchart of the test procedure for the pcm lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Procedure
Step Action
2 Perform the visual test of the PCM lightning protectors
3 Perform the electrical test of a lightning protector
a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector which is tested
(see Figure 5--44).
b. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire no.1.
c. Connect the black wire of the tester to the ground.
d. Push the button of the tester (the test value is maintained on the display until the
test button is released).
e. Note the first value.
f. Connect the red wire of the tester to the lightning protector wire no.2.
g. Push the button of the tester to read the the test value (which is maintained on
the display until the test button is released).
h. Note the second value.
i. After the electrical measures:
If at least one of both values is below 300 V, go to step 5.
j. Test another lightning protector until the full configuration.
4 Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
Go to step 6.
Replace a lightning protector according to the replacement procedure
5--92
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Red wire of
the tester to
the wire no.1
Ground
connection
Black wire of the tester
to the ground
Wire no.2
Figure 5--44 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5.4.11 Test of the secondary lightning protector (S8000 Indoor BTS and
S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Lightning protectors for
the S8000 Indoor BTS
-- A0666945
Lightning protectors for
the S8003 Indoor BTS
-- A0666945
This procedure applies to the secondary lightning protectors of the S8000 Indoor BTS900,
1800, and 1900, and of the S8003 Indoor BTS 900 and 1800.
Schedule
Perform this procedure once a year.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 15 minutes (for each board).
Tools required
Two flat screwdrivers
One tubular socket wrench size 6
One screw driver for recessed--head screws
One stepladder (not useful for the S8003 Indoor BTS)
DANGER
Electric shock
The BTS remains supplied by the mains power supply.
5--94
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Location
The secondary lightning protectors are located at the top of:
the S8000 Indoor BTS cabinet (see Figure 5--46)
the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet (see Figure 5--47)
Step 1
Step 4
End
Step 3
Replace the secondary
lighning protector
Yes
No
Remove the board
Insert the board
Step 2
Step 5
Figure 5--45 Flowchart of the test procedure for the secondary lightning protectors
(S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
5--96
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
1 Remove the ALPRO board
a. Remove the two connectors (no.1, see Figure 5--48).
b. Undo the four nuts of the secondary lightning protector cover.
c. Undo the two screws of the connector no.2.
d. Undo the four cross--head screws.
e. Undo the ground screw.
f. Remove the board.
2 Perform the visual test
3 Insert the board
a. Insert the board (see Figure 5--48).
b. Tighten the ground screw.
c. Tighten the four cross--head screws.
d. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.2.
e. Insert the two connectors no.1.
f. Tighten the four nuts of the secondary lightning protector cover.
g. Go to step 5.
4 Replace the secondary lightning protector
Replace the secondary lightning protector according to the replacement procedure
ALPRO modules
Figure 5--46 Location of the secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the
S8000 Indoor BTS
5--98
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Ground bolt
Terminal blocks
75 Ohms kit
RF connector
--48V input
0V input
Ground
ABIS connector
ALPRO 0
Connector
ALPRO 0
Ground bolt
Figure 5--47 Location of the secondary lightning protectors (ALPRO board) of the
S8003 Indoor BTS
Cover
Connector
no.1
Nut
Connector
no.2
Ground screw
Figure 5--48 View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the
S8000 Indoor BTS
5--100
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.12 Test of the fans (S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Fan S8003 Indoor NTE682AA A0512639
This procedure applies to the four fans of the S8003 Indoor BTS for GSM 900.
Schedule
Perform this test every six months.
Intervention time
Intervention time is approximately 5 minutes.
Tools required
Phillips, cross--head screwdrivers
The service is not lost.
DANGER
Electric shock
Step 1
Step 4
End
Step 3
Replace the faulty fan
Yes
No
Open the door
Close the door
Step 2
Perform the test of the fans
Step 5
Figure 5--49 Flowchart of the test procedure of the S8003 Indoor fans
5--102
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Power supply cable
Fan tray containing 4 fans
Figure 5--50 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet
Location
The four fans are located in the fan tray of the cabinet (see Figure 5--50).
Procedure
Step Action
1 Open the door.
2 Test the fans:
a. Partially extract the fan tray as follows:
Undo the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
Pull the fan tray forward, without unplugging the PSconnector, until view the
four fans.
b. Check for the four fans rotating:
In case of failure, note the position of the faulty fan(s), re--insert the tray in
its slot, and replace the faulty fans (see Paragraph 6.2.74) .
Otherwise, re--insert the tray in its slot.
c. Tighten the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
3 Close the doors
5--104
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.13 DACS Preventive Maintenance
The following checks represent the minimal acceptable maintenance procedures;
failure to carry them out on a regular basis may invalidate the warranty.
If proper maintenance is not performed on the DACS and Low Noise DACS, the
units can fail prematurely which in turn results in loss of service of the BTS in cold
weather.
Note: DACS preventive maintenance is best performed before the onset of cold
weather.
Intervention time
Tools required
Philips Screwdriver
Flathead Screwdriver
Multimeter
8 MM or possibly deep 10MM well socket (or deep well socket for older units)
Ratchet
40cm or 5/32 Allen Wrench
Needle nose pliers
Torque wrench for 40 Inch Pounds or 4.5 Newton meters use
WARNING
If the ambient air temperature is below38 degrees F or 3.3 degrees
C, thefollowingprocedureis not recommended. Opening theDACS
lid (cover) in low temperature conditions may result in system
outage. Also, mechanical cabinet integrity is essential to ensure
proper climatic operations in upper and lower temperature
conditions. If the filter is not a Nortel Networks recommended filter
or recognized equivalent, and/or there are voids within the cabinet,
(missing circuit packs, missing fillers from any location including
USERICOand or bulk head plates missing or not properly secured)
this condition may cause climatic inefficiency within the BTS,
resulting in impacts to proper system operations and potential
service disruption.
DANGER
Electric shock
Isolate all power supplies to the unit before removing the lid. Lethal
voltages are present when the unit is operating.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Turn off the power (see section 5.4.13.1).
2 Check for internal and external clutch release (see section 5.4.13.2).
3 Check the brass bushings on the linkage for wear, and replace if necessary.
Brass Bushings
4 Check the control board (see section 5.4.13.3).
5 Check the blowers (see section 5.4.13.4).
6 Turn on the power (see section 5.4.13.5).
7 Check the damper alignment (see section 5.4.13.6) and realign it if necessary (see
section 5.4.13.7)
8 Check damper timing (see section 5.4.13.8).
9 Check the heater (see section 5.4.13.9).
10 Reconnect P1 to the control board. All LEDs on the control board should be
illuminated.
11 Adjust the control board.
Connect a test meter to positions TP1 and TP2 on the control board. Verify the
output is 24 Vdc. If the measurement is not correct, adjust REG1 until 24 Vdc is
measured.
5--106
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
12 Align the damper/heater thermistor (see section 5.4.13.10).
13 Check the operation of the blowers (see section 5.4.13.11).
14 Verify the damper/heater and motor speed thermistors (see section 5.4.13.12).
5.4.13.1 Turning off power
WARNING
When turning DC and AC power inputs to the OFF position
Always turn off the DC power before the AC power, to avoid
damaging the DACS control card.
Turn off the inputs in the following order:
Turn the DC power input to the DACS to the OFF position.
Turn the AC power input to the DACS to the OFF position.
WARNING
Turning off power to the DACS fans
Removing the DC and AC inputs will turn off the DACS fans. The
loss of air flowwhen the heater is still working may cause the DACS
Heater Thermostat to trip. If this occurs, reset the thermostat as
described in section 8.1.3.1.
For systems with Phillips/Cherokee/Mitra rectifier shelves, turn the DC power
OFF on the rectifier shelf marked Fan (see below).
5--108
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
For systems that have Helios/APS rectifier shelves, turn the DACS circuit
breaker (CB2) on the rectifier shelf to the OFF position (see below).
For cabinets that have an AC main, turn the DACS AC power OFF
(the blue switch at the top of the AC Main marked Cooling Unit) (see below).
For cabinets that have GIPS:
Turn the DCpower breaker to the OFF position. It is the bottomleft switch on
the DCU, marked DACS (see below).
Turn the ACpower switch to the OFF position. It is the bottom switch on the
ADU (see below).
DC Power Breaker
AC Power Switch
5--110
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.13.2 Modulating motor and linkages -- checking for clutch release
You should check release of both the internal and external clutch, as described be-
low.
Internal clutch
WARNING
Turn DC and AC power inputs to the OFF position
Always set the DCand ACpower inputs to off before performingthis
procedure. See section 5.4.13.1.
Loosen the screwon the backside of the actuator cover and remove the plastic cover
(see below).
Screw to remove motor cover
Depress the clutch release and check for the smooth operation of the damper
(see below).
Mechanical
End Stop
Acuator
Arm
Linkage
Clutch
Release
Check that the motor rotation is not limited by the mechanical end stops on the
motor. If motor rotation is limited by the mechanical end stops, realign the
damper as described in section 5.4.13.7.
Ensure the actuator arm linkage is securely attached to the actuator arm. If it is
not, replace the actuator as described in section 6.2.21.
Replace the plastic actuator motor cover.
5--112
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
External clutch
WARNING
Depress the clutchrelease button(circled inthe picture below) andcheck for smooth
operation of the damper.
Check that the motor rotation is limited by the damper position stops and not by
the end stops on the motor. If motor rotation is limited by the damper position
stops, realign the damper as described in section 5.4.13.7.
Ensure the actuator arm linkage is securely attached to the actuator arm. If it is
not, replace the actuator as described in section 6.2.21.
5.4.13.3 Checking the control board
WARNING
Examine the control board for excessive deposits of dust/salts: if necessary,
remove the board to clean it.
Examine the board for signs of excessive heat or cracking on any components.
Examine the connecting plugs for signs of heat or cracking. If any evidence of
overheating or cracking is found, replace the control board (see section 6.2.24).
If you have removed the control board, reassemble it to its location within the
DACS and reconnect all the plugs to the board. (For details of howto replace the
control board, see parts of section 6.2.24.)
5--114
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
REG 1
P1
REG 1
P1
P7
TP1 and TP2
OR
5.4.13.4 Checking the blowers
WARNING
Inspect the fan impellers and remove any debris.
Check that the fan impellers are securely mounted on the fan shafts.
Rotate the impellers and ensure freedom of movement.
5.4.13.5 Turning on power
Turn on the power in the following order to avoid tripping the DC breaker:
Power on the AC breaker, which is on the right side of the cabinet for all types.
Power on the DC breaker, which is on the left hand side of the rectifier shelf.
5--116
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5.4.13.6 Checking damper alignment
Note: Power to the unit must be turned on to perform this action. See section
5.4.13.5.
Disconnect plug P1 from the DACS control board.
Note: This action will also energize the heater and should not be prolonged.
Ensure that the damper fully closes. Short the two pins of P1 together: the damper
will begin to open. When the damper is fully open remove the short between the two
pins on P1. The damper will close. If the damper does not fully close by the time
the actuator position indicator contacts its stop, realign the damper as described in
section 5.4.13.7.
Mechanical
End Stop
Actuator
Position Indicator
Actuator Arm
Securing
Bolts
5.4.13.7 Realigning the damper
Note: You should only realign the damper if it is not correctly aligned: see section
5.4.13.6 for details of how to check the alignment.
WARNING
If the damper is not correctly aligned, realign it as follows:
Loosen the two M5 nuts securing the damper linkage to the actuator.
Position the indicator at the third mark (see picture below).
Keeping the damper closed by hand (see picture below), use a torque tool to
tighten the nuts on the damper linkage to 40 inch pounds or 4.5 NM.
5--118
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Apply power as described in section 5.4.13.5, and recheck the damper alignment
as described in section 5.4.13.6. If the damper alignment is still not correct
(closed and open positions) align the damper again as described in this section.
5.4.13.8 Checking damper timing
5.4.13.5.
If the dampers opening time is <10s or its closing time is >30s, the actuator may
malfunction prior to the next scheduled maintenance interval (i.e. within 1 year).
If this is the case and the system is located in a geographical region in which winter
temperatures fall below14 degrees F or --10 degrees C, it is recommended that you
replace the actuator motor to avoid a possible operation impact during extreme cold
temperatures.
5.4.13.9 Checking the heater
5.4.13.5.
Note: Before checking the heater, disconnect plug P1 from the DACS control
board.
While P1 is disconnected, the heater circuit will be enabled: ensure the yellowLED
is illuminated. If the LED is not illuminated, isolate the defective part of the heater
circuit:
For manual resetting heater thermostats:
Ensure that the thermostat is set (to set the thermostat depress the RED
button). If it is set, measure across the leads to ensure it is not open. If it is
found to be defective replace the heater thermostat (see section 6.2.29).
Measure the resistance of the heater coil. The coil should measure 21 .. If it
does not measure the correct value, replace the heater coil (see section 6.2.27)
or the DACS (see section 6.2.20).
If the heater thermostat and heater are found to be good, replace the control
board (see section 6.2.24).
HRS Breaker
Switch
5--120
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
For auto resetting heater thermostats:
Measure across the leads to ensure it is not open. If it is found to be defective
replace the heater thermostat (see section 6.2.30).
NOTE: If performing this activity in cold weather conditions or for an extended
period of time, the thermostat may trip which causes the yellowLEDto go out. This
can be verified at the NOCif they see a DACS Fail minor alarm. If it is tripped, the
heater coil cannot be measured and the heater check cannot be completed until the
thermostat has reset.
Measure the resistance of the heater coil. The coil should measure 21. +/--
2.. If it does not measure the correct value, replace the heater coil (see
section 6.2.27) or the DACS (see section 6.2.20).
If the heater thermostat and heater are found to be good, replace the control
board (see section 6.2.24).
5.4.13.10 Aligning the damper/heater thermistor
5.4.13.5.
Ensure the damper/heater thermistor is correctly positioned. The bottom of the
thermistor should be positioned to be centered in the sensor windowon the left side
of the DACS. If the sensor is out of position, carefully reposition the sensor. If the
sensor is not seen and cannot be repositioned, the DACS unit should be removed
to access the thermistor and reposition or replace the DACS unit.
Damper/Heater
Thermistor
5.4.13.11 Checking blower operation
5.4.13.5.
Check that the blowers are running smoothly and that the bearings are not making
excessive noise. On the Low Noise DACS, NTQA97BA, NTQA97AB and
NTU440AA, remove P7. The blower should increase to a higher speed. If a motor
does not increase in speed, swap the motor input cables to verify the fault is either
the control board or the motor. Reconnect P7. Blowers deemed faulty should be
replaced (see section 6.2.32).
5.4.13.12 Verifying the damper/heater and motor speed thermistors
5.4.13.5.
The Damper/Heater Thermistor samples the internal cabinet temperature, and the
Motor Speed Thermistor samples the air temperature of the ambient air entering the
DACSUnit. The resistance of each thermistor varies with temperature: to verify the
thermistors, measure the resistance of each sensor. The chart below indicates the
temperature to resistance values.
5--122
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Thermistors Characteristics -- Rt vs. T
T
(deg C)
Rt
(k Ohm)
T
(deg C)
Rt
(k Ohm)
T
(deg C)
Rt
(k Ohm)
0 32.65
1 31.03 16 15.00 31 7.721
2 29.50 17 14.32 32 7.402
3 28.05 18 13.68 33 7.097
4 26.69 19 13.05 34 6.807
5 25.39 20 12.49 35 6.650
6 24.17 21 11.94 36 6.266
7 23.02 22 11.42 37 6.014
8 21.92 23 10.92 38 5.774
9 20.88 24 10.45 39 5.544
10 19.90 25 10.00 40 5.325
11 18.97 26 9.572 41 5.116
12 18.09 27 9.165 42 4.915
13 17.26 28 8.777 43 4.724
14 16.46 29 8.408 44 4.541
15 15.71 30 8.056 45 4.367
The temperature, for any given Rt, may be calculated from the following equation:
T = 1 / [A + B(ln(Rt)) + C(ln(Rt))
3
] -- 273.15 C
where, for the thermistors used, the constants A, B & C are:
A = 1.129241 x 10
--3
; B = 2.341077 x 10
--4
; C = 8.775468 x 10
--8
DACS Parts Cross Reference Table
DACS PEC Item could be found at Site Replacement
NTQA97AA
NTQA97BA
&
NTQA97AB
NTU440AA Item LIEBERT
P/N
CPC
Code
PEC PEC Order
Type
X
Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Blower L24326--00 A0723137 NTQA98BA NTQA98EB (kit) FRU
X
X X Blower with
Speed
Control
L28564--00 A0832107 NTQA9802
01
NTQA9802 FRU
X
X X Blower with
Speed
Control
L40028--00 A0832107 NTQA9802
02
NTQA9802 FRU
X
X Not
Applicable
Blower
Cable
Adaptater
L29690--01 A0784516 NTQA9803 NTQA9803 SRU
X
Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Transformer L24348--00 A0724332 QTK710BH NTQA98DB FRU
X X X Transformer L24349--00 A0785383 NTQA98DB NTQA98DB FRU
X X X Actuator L24325--00 A0724282 NTQA98DA NTQA98DA FRU
X
Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Control
Assembly
L24312--00 A0723751 NTQA98EA NTU498AA FRU
X
X Not
Applicable
Control
Assembly
with Speed
Control
L28569--00 A0785386 NTQA9801 NTU498AA FRU
X
X X Control
Assembly
with Speed
Control
L84140--00 A0994379 NTU498AA NTU498AA FRU
X X X Capacitor L24334--00 A0723678 NTQA98GA NTQA98GA SRU
X X X air filter L24304--00 A0724343 NTQA98AA NTQA98AA FRUP
X X X thermistor L24337--00 A0723679 NTQA98FA NTQA98FA SRU
Not
Applicable
X X thermistor L28565--00 A0785385 NTQA98FB NTQA98FB FRU
X
X X filter switch A0724338 NTQA98HA
01
NTQA9804 (kit) SRU
X
X X filter switch A0724338 NTQA98HA
02
NTQA9804 (kit) SRU
X X X Heater L24305--00 A0724340 NTQA98JA NTQA98JA SRU
X X X Thermostat L24338--00 A0724335 NTQA98KA NTQA81AA (kit) BP
X
X X Thermostat
(autoreset)
H--0451 A0520118 NTQA8111 NTQA8111 SRU
X X X bush brass L24328--00 P0877667 NTQA98LA NTQA98LA SRU
Note: Items in the list with order type FRU should be supported by the Repair
and Return organization. To obtain other types, contact the Nortel
Networks sales engineer for your account or the Nortel Networks customer
service representative.
5--124
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Water ingress
control fins
Temperature
control element
Heater thermostat
Transformer
Terminal block TB1
Modulating damper
motor and linkages
Twin blowers
Air inlet clogged switch
Inlet air filter
Twin blowers
Alarm LEDs
Printed circuit assembly
(PCA) for control and
power distribution
Heater
Rectifier/capacitor
assembly
Air--directory
damper Drain pan
Figure 5--51 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit
Cubicle
Outlet vent
DACS unit
Hood
Plinth (optional)
Figure 5--52 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
5--126
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Replacement procedures Nortel Networks Confidential 6--1
6 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
6.1 Introduction
6.1.1 Presentation
This chapter contains the replacement procedures applicable to the S8000 BTS and
to the S8003 BTS. The operator must refer the figures to locate the items of
equipment (boards and modules) concerned by the replacement procedures.
The structure of a replacement procedure sheet is described below.
CAUTION
Advice OMC--R Supervisor of your maintenance operations
Replacement procedures duration may be longer than batteries
capacity and BTS outage is possible. Advize OMC--R supervisor
that alarms may occur and he may take the appropriate actions.
6.1.2 Description of a replacement procedure sheet
A replacement procedure sheet is divided into the following paragraphs:
the title
four types of operation to be executed to replace an item of equipment
the figure(s)
6.1.2.1 Main body of the procedure sheet
The main body contains the following information:
the product reference(s)
the intervention time
the tools required
the location of the item of equipment to be replaced
the procedure which contains the following steps:
the safety instructions
the removal operations
Replacement procedures
6--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
the reinsertion operations
the additional operations, which include the return to service of the replaced
item of equipment, and additional on--site checks on the state of the replaced
item of equipment
6.1.2.2 Figures
The figures are provided to help the operator perform the actions. They show the
item of equipment schematically.
6.1.3 Preliminary operations
The operations on the S8000 BTS or the S8003 BTS cabinet do not require
equipment shutdown.
CAUTION
according to the safety standards.
WARNING
If the ambient air temperature is below38 degrees F or 3.3 degrees
C, the following procedures are not recommended. Opening the
DACSlid(cover) inlowtemperatureconditions may result insystem
outage. Also, mechanical cabinet integrity is essential to ensure
proper climatic operations in upper and lower temperature
conditions. If the filter is not a Nortel Networks recommended filter
or recognized equivalent, and/or there are voids within the cabinet,
(missing circuit packs, missing fillers from any location including
USERICOand or bulk head plates missing or not properly secured)
this condition may cause climatic inefficiency within the BTS,
resulting in impacts to proper system operations and potential
service disruption.
CAUTION
During every maintenance action, and especially when handlingthe
boards, the operator must wear an antistatic bracelet.
6--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
After performing the replacement procedures, ensure the hood
key--locks are properly secured (see section 6.1.4).
DANGER
Electric shock
Cap
Tie wrap
Figure 6--1 S8003 Indoor BTS: Type F power supply cables safety measures
6--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.1.4 Ensure the hood of the outdoor cabinet is properly closed
Always ensure the hood key--locks are properly secured, the keyholes must be in
the vertical position.
For version EP2 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS, ensure the hood is properly secured by
performing the following:
Verify the back of the hood is inserted under the back--panel pins (one on each side).
Close the two front hood locks and remove the keys. Keyholes must be in the vertical
position.
Verify the hood is properly closed. It must not be lifted more than 7 mm above the air
outlet.
6.1.5 Tools
Extraction tool P0850747 (inside the cabinet door)
Screwdrivers
Electricians knife
Wrenches
Wrenches for hexagonal head
Tie--wraps
Crimping tool
Wire stripper
Toolbox
Adhesive tape
Stepladder (not necessary for S8003 Indoor BTS)
6.2 Replacement procedure sheets
The re placement procedure sheets are givenin the following pages. The table below
gives the numbers of the replacement sheets concerning each item of equipment.
S8000 BTS
S8003
BTS
Replacement
Equipment
Outdoor Indoor Indoor
Replacement
sheet
BCF CBCF BCF CBCF CBCF
ALCO board x x 6.2.1
CMCF boards x x x 6.2.2
CPCMI boards x x x 6.2.3
CSWM boards x x 6.2.4
DSC boards x x 6.2.5
GTW boards x x 6.2.6
PCMI boards x x 6.2.7
PSCMD board x x 6.2.8
RECAL board x x x 6.2.9
SYNC boards x x 6.2.10
AC box circuit breakers x x 6.2.11
ADU circuit breaker x x 6.2.12
AC breaker x x 6.2.13
ACU climatic unit x x 6.2.14
ACU filter x x 6.2.15
ACU or DACS gasket x x 6.2.16
Base cabinet fan x x 6.2.17
BCF cabinet fan x 6.2.18
BCF power supply x x 6.2.19
DACS climatic system x x 6.2.20
DACS actuator x x 6.2.21
DACS brass bushing x x 6.2.22
DACS capacitor x x 6.2.23
DACS control assembly x x 6.2.24
DACS filter x x 6.2.25
DACS or Low Noise
DACS air inlet clogged
switch
x x 6.2.26
DACS heater x x 6.2.27
6--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
S8000 BTS
S8003
BTS
Replacement
Equipment
Replacement
sheet
DACS thermistor x x 6.2.28
DACS thermostat x x 6.2.29
Auto--reset DACS heater
thermostat
x x 6.2.30
DACS (extended)
transformer
x x 6.2.31
DACS twin blowers x x 6.2.32
Low Noise DACS ambient
thermistor
x x 6.2.33
Door gasket x x x 6.2.34
Door gaskets x x 6.2.35
DRX modules x x x x x 6.2.36
External alarm primary
x x 6.2.37
x x 6.2.38
External batteries
NTQA36GA
x x 6.2.39
External batteries
NTQA92BB (SBS 60)
x x 6.2.40
External batteries
NTQA92EA (SBS C11)
x x 6.2.41
External battery circuit
breaker
x x 6.2.42
DC breaker (battery
cabinet)
x x 6.2.43
Fan filter x x 6.2.44
F--type converter x x x x x 6.2.45
Ground fault interrupter x x 6.2.46
Hood gasket x x 6.2.47
Internal batteries x x 6.2.48
Internal battery circuit
breaker
x x 6.2.49
Lightning protectors of the
48V box
x x 6.2.50
S8000 BTS
S8003
BTS
Replacement
Equipment
Replacement
sheet
PCM lightning protectors x x 6.2.51
AC lightning protector x x 6.2.52
PA, ePA or HePA
modules
x x x x x 6.2.53
HePA modules x x x 6.2.53
Power supply rack of the
seven--rectifier type
x x 6.2.54
Power supply rack of the
six--rectifier type
x x 6.2.55
Rectifiers of a
seven--rectifier type
(500W rectifier)
x x 6.2.56
Rectifiers of a six--rectifier
type (600W rectifier)
x x 6.2.57
GIPS x x 6.2.58
Rectifiers of the GIPS
(680W rectifier)
x x 6.2.59
ADU x x 6.2.60
Remote tunable cavity
combiner
x x 6.2.61
RF--combiner modules x x x x x 6.2.62
Rx--splitters x x x x x 6.2.63
Secondary lightning
protectors
x x x 6.2.64
ADU AC surge protector x x 6.2.65
User AC plug x x 6.2.66
Single--phase AC
lightning protector
x x 6.2.67
Thermostats x x 6.2.68
Tri--phase AC lightning
protector
x x 6.2.69
Tx--filter modules x x x x x 6.2.70
75 kit (S8000 Indoor) x x x 6.2.71
75 kit (S8000 Outdoor) x x 6.2.72
6--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
S8000 BTS
S8003
BTS
Replacement
Equipment
Replacement
sheet
S8003 Air filter x 6.2.73
S8003 Fans x 6.2.74
BTS Single--phase AC
lightning protector
x x 6.2.74
BTS Three--phase AC
lightning
x x 6.2.75
6.2.1 Replacement of the ALCO board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA21AA
CPC code: A0647420
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Cross--head screwdriver
Impact of the replacement on service
CAUTION
The service is no longer supervised.
Location
The ALCO board is located on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--30.
6--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
1 Safety instructions
CAUTION
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing the maintenance
procedure described below.
2 Removal of the ALCO board
a. Disconnect the connectors on the front panel (PWR, EXT NP, INT, O&M IN,
PCM, PCM OUT, EXT P) and separate them from the board in order to make
access to the board easier.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see Figure 6--2).
c. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
3 Reinsertion of the ALCO board
a. Check the correctness of the PROM numbers and the position of the straps
according to the current release of the system.
b. Put the board in place by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
c. Position the board into the slot guides with the extraction tool.
d. Tighten the four fixing screws.
e. Reconnect theconnectors onthefront panel (EXT NP, INT, O&MIN, PCM, PCM
OUT, EXT P, PWR).
Check the state of the LEDs onthe board. With thepower on, the LEDs are on. Now
review the following states:
BIST LED: off (on during self--test)
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
Screws
EXT. P.
INT
PCM out
PWR J64
Reset
BIST
+5V
RDY
PCM O&M in
EXT. NP.
ALCO
Figure 6--2 ALCO board
6--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.2 Replacement of a CMCF board
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS, and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference for S8000 BTS
CMCF board Type1 NTQA66CA A0680711
CMCF board Type 2 NTQA66CB A0779822
Equipment PEC code CPC code
CMCF board Typer 2 NTQA66CB A0779822
Intervention time
Tools required
CAUTION
If there is only one CMCF board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CMCF board, there is not any impact on
the service.
If EDGE is being used, you must not have a mix of Type 1 and Type
2 CMCF boards on the BTS.
Using EDGE, CMCF Type 2 / Type 1 replacement
If EDGE is being used, the BTS must not have a mix of Type1 and Type 2 CMCF boards
(see the Caution above). Also replace a CMCF Type 1 by a CMCF Type 1 and replace a
CMCF Type 2 by a CMCF Type 2.
Location for S8000 BTS
The CMCF boards are located on Figure 2--6 and Figure 2--36.
The CMCF boards are located on Figure 2--45.
6--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Preliminary operations
Locate the defective board.
3 Removal of a CMCF board
a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see Figure 6--3).
b. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
CBCF Front View and CMCF Side View
c. Switch S1 on CMCF has four ON/OFF microswitches:
Micro--Switch 1: Watchdog Enabled/Disabled
(ON for WD enabled, OFF for WD disabled)
-- WD enabled (micro--switch 1 ON),
Micro--Switch 2: Normal/Maintenance mode
(ON for Maintenance, OFF for Normal)
-- Normal mode (micro--switch 2 OFF),
Micro--Switch 3: Simplex/Duplex mode (ON
for Simplex, OFF for Duplex)
-- 1 CMCF = Simplex conf. (micro--switch 3 ON),
-- 2 CMCF = Duplex conf. (micro--switch 3 OFF),
Micro--Switch 4: Secured Loop mode (ON if SL, OFF if no SL)
-- No Secured Loop (micro--switch 4 OFF).
4 Reinsertion of a CMCF board
a. Ensure the hardware version number of the element is correct and coincides
with the system release.
b. Position the board into the slot guides.
c. Tighten the two fixing screws.
Check the state of the LEDs. With the power on, the LEDs are on. Now review the
following states:
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
ON LED: on (when the board is the active one)
ABIS LED: off
RUN LED: off
CLK0
CLK1 one of these LEDs: on (clock number)
CLK2
OVEN LED: on
LOCKED LED: on when the board is the passive one
HLDVR LED: off
LNK LED: on
COL LED: off
6--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RX LED: off
TX LED: off
P3
P1
P2
Screw
J3
BDM
J4
JTAG
P4
Figure 6--3 CMCF board
6--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.3 Replacement of a CPCMI board
CPCMI board for GSM 900, and 1800 NTQA66BA A0680710
CPCMI board for GSM 1900 NTQA66AA A0680709
CPCMI board for GSM 900 and 1800 NTQA66BA A0680710
Intervention time
Tools required
Screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one CPCMI board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CPCMI board, there is no impact on the
service.
The CPCMI boards are located on Figure 2--6 and Figure 2--36.
The CPCMI boards are located on Figure 2--45.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of a CPCMI board
a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see Figure 6--4 and
Figure 6--5).
b. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a CPCMI board
a. Ensure the hardware version number of the element is correct according to the
current release of the system.
following states:
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
SKP LED: off
LFA LED: off
NOS LED: off (if the PCM link between the BSC and the BTS is correct)
RRA LED: off
6--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
P13
P11
P10
P9
S2
S1
Figure 6--4 CPCMI board (for GSM 900/1800)
(S8000 Outdoor/Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Screw
P13
P11
P10
P9
S2
S1
Figure 6--5 CPCMI board (1900)
6--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.4 Replacement of a CSWM board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA09AA
CPC code: A0652927
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one CSWM board, the service is lost.
If there is another working CSWM board, there is no impact on the
service.
Location
The CSWM boards are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of a CSWM board
a. Disconnect the Ethernet cable.
b. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see Figure 6--6).
c. Unlock the two extractors.
d. Remove the board.
4 Reinsertion of a CSWM board
a. Ensure the hardware version number of the element is correct and coincides
with the current system release.
b. Position the new board into the slot guides.
c. Relock the extractors by pressing on it.
d. Tighten the two fixing screws.
e. Connect the Ethernet cable.
following states:
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
O & M LED: flashes during the communication between BCF boards and
O & M bus
6--26
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
ABIS LED: off
ON LED: on when the board is active
WDG LED: on if self--tests have been OK (watchdog armed)
MRQ LED: on after watchdog armed
SERV LED: on if the board is on service
One of the H0, H1, H2 LEDs on (clock number)
LC LED: off (on, it indicates a local clock)
TX LED: off
RX LED: off
LNK LED: on
COL LED: off
RESET
CSWM
BIST
+5V
RDY
T
E
S
T
ON
O&M
ABIS
WDG
MRQ
SERV
CKI
GND
CKO
J
6
4
0
1
2
LC
TX
RX
LNK
COL
GND
E
T
H
P1
P3
P2
Monitoring LEDs
Reset button
Test Connector
F1 Fuse
3A
fast blow
Clock LEDs
Connector
Plug
Screw
Extractor
Figure 6--6 CSWM board
6--28
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.5 Replacement of a DSC board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA05AA
CPC code: A0652323
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one DSC board, the service is lost.
If there is another working DSC board, there is not any impact on
the service.
Location
The DSC boards are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of a DSC board
b. Unlock the two extractors.
c. Remove the board.
4 Reinsertion of a DSC board
a. Ensure the PROM numbers are correct and coincide with the system release.
Check the state of the LEDs on the board. When powering on, the LEDs turn on.
Now review the following states:
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
6--30
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RESET
DSC
BIST
+5V
RDY
T
E
S
T
Monitoring LEDs
Reset button
Test Connector
F1 Fuse
2A
fast blow
P1
P3
P2
Screw
Extractor
Figure 6--7 DSC board
6.2.6 Replacement of a GTW board
Product reference
GTW PCBA NTQA06AA*
GTW Edge ready NTQA06BA
* Do not use GTW board NTQA06AA on EDGE Network.
Prom Numbers
Board Prom
NTQA06AA V02B1E04
NTQA06BA V02B2E08
Table 6--1 Prom Numbers on GTW Board
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
When replacing a GTW board, the service is lost even if there is
another GTW board.
Location
The GTW boards are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
6--32
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of a GTW board
4 Reinsertion of a GTW board
a. Ensure the PROM numbers (see Table 6.1) and the position of the
microswitches are correct and coincide to the system release.
Check the state of the LEDs. When powering on, the LEDs turn on. Nowreviewthe
following states:
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
ON LED: on if the board is the active one
Reset
GTW
BIST
T
E
S
T
J
6
4
BIST
+5V
RDY
ON
Monitoring LEDs
Reset button
Test Connector
Connector
P1
P3
P2
Screw
Extractor
F1 Fuse
3A
fast blow
Figure 6--8 GTW board
6--34
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.7 Replacement of a PCMI board
Product reference
PCMI board for GSM 900, and 1800 NTQA04BA A0658887
PCMI board for GSM 1900 NTQA04AA A0651431
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
If there is only one PCMI board, the service is lost.
If there is another working PCMI board, there is not any impact on
the service.
Location
The PCMI boards are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of a PCMI board
a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board (see Figure 6--9 and
Figure 6--10).
4 Reinsertion of a PCMI board
a. Ensure the PROM numbers and the position of the straps are correct and
coincides with the system release.
following states:
BIST LED: off (on during self--test and initialization period)
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
LFA LED: off
AIS LED: off
RRA LED: off
NOS LED: off (if the pcm link between the BSC and the BTS is correct)
FE LED: off
SKP LED: off
CRC LED: off
6--36
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RESET
PCMI E1
BIST
+5V
RDY
CRC
SKP
FE
NOS
RRA
AIS
LFA
T0 T1
T0
T1
XL
LP
RL
XL
LP
RL
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
3 1
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW2
SW3
3 2 1
P1
P3
P2
2
120 75
3 1 2
120 75
Monitoring LEDs
Reset button
PCM Alarm LEDs
F1 Fuse
2A
63V fast blow
Plug
Plug
Screw
Extractor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I
N
T
0
I
N
T
1
I
N
T
2
I
N
T
3
I
N
T
4
I
N
T
5
I
N
T
6
I
N
T
7
ON
OFF
CA1
Figure 6--9 PCMI board (900/1800)
RESET
PCMI T1
BIST
+5V
RDY
CRC
SKP
FE
NOS
RRA
AIS
LFA
T0 T1
T0
T1
XL
LP
RL
XL
LP
RL
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
3 1
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1
SW9
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
SW2
SW3
3 2 1
P1
P3
P2
2
120 75
3 1 2
120 75
Monitoring LEDs
Reset button
PCM Alarm LEDs
F1 Fuse
2A
63V fast blow
Plug
Plug
Screw
Extractor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I
N
T
0
I
N
T
1
I
N
T
2
I
N
T
3
I
N
T
4
I
N
T
5
I
N
T
6
I
N
T
7
ON
OFF
CA1
Figure 6--10 PCMI board (1900)
6--38
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.8 Replacement of the PSCMD board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA08AA
CPC code: A0652929
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
The service is lost.
Location
The PSCMD board is located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Locate the faulty board.
3 Removal of the PSCMD board
a. Put the switch of the faulty board in the O position (see Figure 6--11).
b. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel of the board.
c. Unlock the two extractors.
d. Remove the board.
e. Note the position of the micro--switches (TEI value).
4 Reinsertion of the PSCMD board
a. Check the position of the microswitches.
e. Put the switch of the new board in the I position.
following states:
PSU0 LED: on
PSU1 LED: on
PSU2 LED: on
6--40
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
PSCMD
PSU0
I
O
PSU1
PSU2
P
S
U
0
P
S
U
1
P
S
U
2
P1
0
1
TYAL0 TYAL1
Screw
Extractor
Figure 6--11 PSCMD board
6.2.9 Replacement of the RECAL board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA66DA
CPC code: A0680712
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
The service is not supervised anymore.
The RECAL board is located on Figure 2--6 and Figure 2--36.
The RECAL board is located on Figure 2--45.
6--42
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Removal of the RECAL board
a. Disconnect the following connectors on the front panel PWR, EXT NP, INT,
PCM, PCM OUT, EXT P (see Figure 6--12) and separate them from the board
in order to make the access to the board easier.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the board.
c. Extract the board with the extraction tool and remove it.
3 Reinsertion of the RECAL board
a. Position the board into the slot guides.
b. Tighten the four fixing screws.
c. Reconnect the connectors on the front panel (EXT NP, INT, PCM, PCM OUT,
EXT P, PWR).
Check the state of the LEDs on the board. When powering on, the LEDs turn on.
BIST LED off: (on during self--test)
+5 V LED: on
RDY LED: on
EXT. P.
INT.
PCM OUT
PWR
RESET
BIST
+5V
RDY
PCM
EXT. NP.
RECAL
Screws
Figure 6--12 RECAL board
6--44
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.10 Replacement of a SYNC board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA03AA
CPC code: A0651429
Intervention time
Tools required
TML
CAUTION
If there is only one SYNC board, the service is lost.
If there is another working SYNC board, there is not any impact on
the service.
Location
The SYNC boards are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--29 and Figure 2--30.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Connect the TML on the front panel of the CSWM board.
b. Do the command Disconnection SYNC0. For more information, refer to NTP
<51>.
3 Removal of a SYNC board
4 Reinsertion of a SYNC board
a. Ensure the hardware version number of the element is correct and coincide with
the system release.
a. With the TML, do the command Connection SYNC0 then the command
Connection SYNC1. For more information, refer to NTP <51>.
b. Check the state of the LEDs. In the power on cycle, the LEDs turn on and flash.
ALARM LED: off
MASTER LED: on, if the module is the master one
UNLOCK LED: off
6--46
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
13 MHz
SYNC
UNLOCK
ALARM
MASTER
P1
P3
P2
Screw
Extractor
Figure 6--13 SYNC board
6.2.11 Replacement of an AC box circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
This procedure applies to the following breakers:
main circuit breaker
rectifier breaker
climatic system breaker
Product references
CPC codes of the circuit breakers:
type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4/5
single--phase AC box:
-- main circuit breaker
-- climatic system breaker
-- rectifier breaker
NTQA90BA/BB
-- A0683009
-- A0656712
-- A0656712
NTQA90BC
-- A0733470
-- A0733469
-- A0733469
NTQA90BE
-- A0733470
-- A0785933
-- A0733469
split single--phase AC box:
-- main circuit breaker
NTQA90AA
-- A0683009
-- A0656712
-- A0656712
NTQA90AB
-- A0733470
-- A0733469
-- A0733469
NTQA90AC
-- A0733470
-- A0785933
-- A0733469
tri--phase AC box:
NTQA90CA/CB
-- A0681956
-- A0681956
NTQA90CC
-- A0734025
-- A0734025
NTQA90CD
-- A0786049
-- A0734025
NTQA90FA
-- A0812352
-- A0805796
WARNING
AC Box Type 3 must not be used on any ACU cabinet.
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately one hour.
Tools required
Screwdriver
Wrench
6--48
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet is operating on its battery power supply, if any,
otherwise the cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains
power supply.
In the case of batteries, performthe procedure without interruption,
due to the limited autonomy of the batteries.
Location
The AC circuit breakers are located on Figure 2--13 to Figure 2--20.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
For a single--phase or split single--phase main power supply, perform the
following actions.
i. Ensure the battery circuit breaker is in the I position.
ii. Put the main circuit breaker in the O position.
iii. Turn OFF the Rectifier switch CB02 located just above the rectifier cable.
iv. Turn OFF the Cooling systemswitch CB03located abovethe MainBreaker
switch.
v. Switch off the main power supply of the cabinet from the operator box.
For a tri--phase main power supply, perform the following actions.
i. Ensure the battery circuit breaker is in the I position.
iii. Switch off the main power supply of the cabinet from the operator box.
3 Removal of an AC box
For a single--phase or split single--phase AC box, perform the following
actions.
i. Disconnect thealarmcableC01fromtheACbox andtherectifier cable(see
ii. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the AC box side and
remove the small cover.
iii. For an AC box type 1, disconnect the input AC cable by unscrewing the
screws no.3 on the terminal block and the nut on the ground connection
(see Figure 6--15 and Figure 6--19).
For an AC box type 2 (see Figure 6--16 and Figure 6--20), disconnect the
input AC cable by removing the nuts from the filters and the nut on the
ground connection.
For an AC box type 3 (see Figure 6--16 and Figure 6--20), unplug the input
AC cable.
iv. Remove the flange nut from the input ac cable flange by unscrewing the
large nut.
v. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the ACbox top and on the
front panel of the AC box (see Figure 6--14 and Figure 6--18).
vi. Disconnect the ground cable by removing the nut.
vii. Disconnect and remove the C02 rectifier cable by unscrewing
viii. Remove the AC box.
ix. Undo all the screws on the left side cover of the ACbox (see Figure 6--17).
For a tri--phase AC box, perform the following actions.
i. Disconnect the alarmcable C01 located on top of the tri--phase ACbox and
the rectifier cable (see Figure 6--21).
ii. Remove the seven or eight screws no.4 on the side of the tri--phase ACbox
and remove the small cover.
iii. Locate the following wires:
three phases
6--50
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
neutral ground
ground
iv. Make a note of the wire positions.
v. Locate the four lightning protector wires.
vi. Disconnect the four lightning protector wires.
vii. For atri--phaseACbox type1, disconnect theinput ACcable by unscrewing
the screws no.3 on the terminal block (see Figure 6--22).
For a tri--phase AC box type 2, remove the nuts from the filters and
disconnect the AC input cable by removing the four nuts on the filter and
the nut on the ground terminal (see Figure 6--23).
For a tri--phase AC box type 3 or type 4, unplug the input AC cable.
viii. Remove the AC input cable gland by unscrewing the large nut.
ix. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 located on the ACbox top and
on the front panel of the AC box.
x. Disconnect the ground cable by removing the nut.
xi. Undo the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
xii. Remove the AC box.
xiii. Undo all the screws on the left side covers of the AC box.
4 Removal of a circuit breaker
If a main circuit breaker must be replaced, perform the following actions.
i. Locate and disconnect the circuit breaker cables (see Figure 6--24) by
removing the four nuts at the back of the circuit breaker.
ii. Remove the two screws on the front of the circuit breaker.
iii. Remove the circuit breaker.
If a cooling system circuit breaker must be replaced, perform the following
actions.
i. Locate and disconnect the cables of the climatic system breaker
(see Figure 6--25andFigure 6--26) by removingthefour or fivescrewsno.1
located at the back of the circuit breaker.
ii. Remove the two screws no.2 located on the front of the circuit breaker.
If a rectifier circuit breaker must be replaced, perform the following actions.
i. Locate and disconnect the cables of the rectifier circuit breaker (see
Figure 6--27 and Figure 6--28) by removing the four or five screws no.1
located at the back of the circuit breaker.
ii. Remove the two screws no.2 located on the front of the circuit breaker.
5 Reinsertion of a circuit breaker
a. Connect all the previously marked wires on the new breaker by tightening the
four or five screws no.1 or nuts at the back of the breaker.
b. Install the breaker.
c. Tighten the two securing screws on the breaker front panel.
6 Reinsertion of an AC box
For a single--phase or split single--phase AC box, perform the following
actions.
i. Tightenthescrews fasteningthesideplateof theACbox (seeFigure 6--17).
ii. Put the AC box in its place.
iii. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 (see Figure 6--14 and Figure 6--18).
iv. Screw the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
v. Connect the rectifier cable and the alarm cable.
vi. Connect the ground cable by tightening the nut.
vii. Put back the flange nut of the ACinput cable on by tightening the large nut.
viii. Connect the AC input cable to the terminal block by tightening the
screws no.3 and the nut on the ground connection.
ix. Connect the ground cable to the ground terminal.
x. Put the small cover back on and tighten the seven or eight no.4 screws.
i. Tightenthescrews fasteningthesideplateof theACbox (seeFigure 6--17).
ii. Put the AC box in its place.
iii. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 (see Figure 6--21).
iv. Screw the lug located on top of the small part of the AC box.
v. Connect the rectifier cable and the alarm cable.
6--52
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
vi. Connect the ground cable by tightening the nut.
vii. Put back the gland of the AC input cable by tightening the large nut.
viii. Place the four wires of the tri--phase ACbox lightning protector on the filter.
ix. Connect the AC input cable by tightening the four nuts on the filter and the
nut on the ground terminal.
x. Put the small cover back on and tighten the seven or eight screws.
For a single--phase or split single--phase main power supply, perform the
following actions.
i. Switch on the main power supply from the operator box.
ii. Check the climatic system breaker, the rectifier circuit breaker and the
battery circuit breaker are in the I position.
iii. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
For a tri--phase main power supply, perform the following actions.
i. Switch on the main power supply from the operator box.
ii. Check the battery circuit breaker is in the I position.
iii. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable
C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Main breaker
Cooling CB03
Rectifier CB02
Figure 6--14 Single--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--54
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Lightning
protector
Phase
Varistor
nuts
Neutral
Ground
connection
Terminal
block
Eight
screws no. 4
Large nut
Screws
no. 3
Input
AC cable
(three wires)
Lug
Figure 6--15 Side view of the single--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Large nut
Nuts
Ground
connection
Figure 6--16 Side view of the single--phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--56
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Figure 6--17 Side covers of the AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Battery circuit
breaker
Main breaker
Note: All the items of the AC box are not drawn
on the figure.
Rectifier CB02
Cooling CB03
Figure 6--18 Split single--phase AC box (GSM 1900) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--58
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Neutral
Ground
connection
Lightning
protector
Phase
L2
Varistor
nuts
Phase L1
Terminal
block
Screws
no. 3
Eight
screws no. 4
Large nut
Figure 6--19 Side view of the split single--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Large nut
Nuts
Lug
Ground
connection
Screws no. 5
Screws no. 6
Figure 6--20 Side view of the split single--phase AC box type 2 or type 3 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--60
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven or eight
screws
Large nut
Battery circuit
breaker
Alarm cable
Rectifier
cable
Screw no. 2
Ground cable
Screw no. 1
General stop
button
Figure 6--21 Tri--phase AC box (GSM 900/1800) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Nut (phase 1)
Nut (neutral: white wire)
Ground connection
Nut (phase 3)
Nut (phase 2)
Figure 6--22 Side view of the tri--phase AC box type 1 of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--62
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screws no. 6
Plastic piece
Nuts
Ground
connection
Screws no. 5
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Figure 6--23 Side view of the tri--phase AC box type 2, type 3, type 4 or 5 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw
Nut
Figure 6--24 Main circuit breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--64
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw no. 2
Screw no. 1
Figure 6--25 Climatic system breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw no. 2
Screw no. 1
Figure 6--26 Climatic system breaker of the tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor
BTS
6--66
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw no. 2
Screw no. 1
Figure 6--27 Rectifier circuit breaker of the (split) single--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw no. 2
Screw no. 1
Figure 6--28 Rectifier circuit breaker of the tri--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--68
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.12 Replacement of the ADU circuit breaker (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
GIPS)
This procedure applies to the following breakers:
rectifier breaker of the ADU
DACS circuit breaker of the ADU
Product reference
ADU for S8000 (GIPS)
PEC code: NTQA19AA
CPC code: A0504894
Procedure
In case of rectifier breaker or DACS circuit breaker failure, replace the ADU
module of the GIPS. (See Paragraph 6.2.60).
6.2.13 Replacement of the AC breaker (battery cabinet)
Product reference
CPC code: A0682963
Intervention time
Required tool(s)
Flat screwdriver
None, provided the BTS can be battery--operated in case of AC failure.
Location
See Figure 6--29 to locate the AC breaker in the AC box of the battery cabinet.
Warning
CAUTION
The BTS remains supplied with the mains.
6--70
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
a. Ensure the battery cabinet dc breaker is in the I position.
b. Switch off the mains at the battery cabinet level (AC breaker to 0).
c. SWITCHOFF THE MAINS (battery cabinet breaker only) AT THEOPERATOR
BOX LEVEL.
2 Open the battery cabinet AC box
3 Replace the AC breaker
a. Unscrew the breaker from the front of the AC box.
b. Disconnect theACcables fromthefaulty breaker, twoby two, andconnect them,
in the same way, to the new breaker.
c. Disconnect the two alarm wires and reconnect them to the new breaker.
d. Screw the new AC breaker to the AC box.
4 Close the battery cabinet AC box
Screw back the AC box cover.
a. Switch on the mains at the operator box level.
b. Switch on the mains at the battery cabinet level (AC breaker).
Figure 6--29 Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet)
6--72
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.14 Replacement of an ACU climatic unit (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA95AB
CPC code: A0661992
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately two hours.
Tools required
Screwdriver
Ty--wraps
Electrician knife
10 mm tubular hexagon box spanner (with an extension tool)
Stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
DANGER
Heavy lifting
An ACU is very heavy ( 40 kg).
CAUTION
according to the security standards.
Location
The ACU climatic unit is located on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Note: The ACU unit can be replaced either by another ACU or by a DACS:
To replace the climatic unit with another ACU, refer to Paragraph 6.2.14.
Toreplacetheclimatic unit withaDACS, refer to Paragraph6.2.14toremove
the ACU, and to Paragraph 6.2.20 to install the DACS.
a. Lift the ACU hood.
b. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the O position (on the AC box).
c. Turn off the climatic unit fans (L2/CB2 circuit breaker on the PCU front panel in
the O position).
3 Remove the climatic unit
a. Remove the cover of theinterconnection box located betweenthe climatic units.
b. Disconnect all the cables leading to the failed climatic unit and take care to mark
them (see Figure 6--30 and Figure 6--31):
For a single- phase or split single- phase mains power supply, performthe
following actions.
i. on TB3: ACU0 (for left ACU) and/or ACU1 (for right ACU)
ii. on TB2: PH1, PH2 and GND for the faulty ACU
iii. on TB1: --48 V and RTN for the faulty ACU
For a tri- phase mains power supply, perform the following actions.
6--74
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
i. on TB3: ACU0 (for left ACU) and/or ACU1 (for right ACU)
ii. on TB2: ACU0, ACU1, N, and GND
iii. on TB1: --48 V and RTN (for the faulty ACU)
c. Put back the cover of the interconnection box.
d. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the I position.
e. Power on the climatic unit fans (L2/CB2 circuit breaker on the PCU front panel
in the I position).
f. Unscrew the six fixing screws of the failed climatic unit (three on the right side
and three on the left side).
g. Remove the drain tube from the left side of the climatic unit.
h. Lift up the climatic unit to avoid damage on the gasket behind the ACU base.
i. Remove the climatic unit.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful when handling the ACUs.
Do not turn upside down them.
4 Reinsert the climatic unit
The ACU climatic units are delivered to be placed on the right in the cabinet.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Do not turn upside down them. To do so, refer to the labels HAUT
(top) and BAS (bottom).
The procedure below explains how to prepare these ACUs to put them on the left
of the cabinet.
a. Remove the right plate by unscrewing the screws.
b. Cut the Ty--wrap of the yellow ground wire.
c. Put the gray cables (48 V, 220 V) behind the pump (see Figure 6--32).
d. Put the big gray cable (220 V) through the low hole.
e. Put the small gray cable (48 V) and the yellow cable through the top hole.
f. Insert the plate by tightening the screws.
g. Let an about 65 cm length of the cables exceed.
h. Insert two washers on the plate.
i. Wind the remaining yellow cable inside the ACU, then put a Ty--wrap and put
another Ty--wrap 10 cm from the wire exit.
j. Cut the exhaust pipe 18,4 mm from the kit.
i. Fix a bend on the exhaust pipe.
ii. Fix the exhaust pipe on the ACU exit pipe.
k. Isolate the lugs.
l. Glue the gasket.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Do not turn upside down them.
5 Reinsertion of the left and right ACUs
a. Put back the replacement climatic unit.
b. Screw and tighten the six fixing screws.
c. Power off the climatic unit fans (circuit breaker L2/CB2 on the PCUfront panel).
d. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the O position.
e. Remove the cover of the interconnection box.
f. Connect all the cables reaching the climatic unit.
g. Put back the cover of the interconnection box.
6--76
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Interconnection
box
Filter screw
Figure 6--30 ACU climatic units of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Hood
ACU 0
ACU 1
PH1
PH2
Gnd
Gnd
-- 48 V
Rtn
TB3
TB2
TB1
TB3
TB2
TB1
Hood
ACU 0
ACU 1
ACU 0
N
ACU 1
Gnd
-- 48 V
Rtn
TB3
TB2
TB1
Single--phase sector Tri--phase sector
Figure 6--31 Climatic unit interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--78
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Filter
Plate reinserted
ACU
screws
5/16 screws
of the plate
Grommet
220V cable
48V cable
Ty--rap
Figure 6--32 Cable exit of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6 Programming of the ACUs
CAUTION
The parametrizing of each ACU must be respected.
Perform the various actions of PROGRAM #2 in the correct order, and then those
of PROGRAM #1.
a. PROGRAM #2
i. Step 1: Press the PROG key (see Figure 6--33) and hold it down for
approximately 3 seconds until the Pr1 mnemonic is displayed. Keep the
PROG key pressed down for another 3 seconds until the Pr2 mnemonic is
displayed. Release the key. The P01 characters are displayed.
ii. Step 2: Press the PROG key again to display the initial value of the P01
variable. To modify the value of P01, use the [^] and [v] arrows, and choose
from the possible values.
iii. Step 3: Carry out these operations for the parameters P01 to P11 while
taking into consideration:
pressing the PROG key the first time displays the name of the variable
; press a second time the PROG key to display the initial value of the
variable.
to change the value of variable, use the [^] and [v] arrows.
The variables must be initiated with the following values:
P01 C (the displaying of the temperature is in Celsius degrees)
P02 nor (the control mode is set by thresholds)
P03 off (the external probe is put into the out of use state)
P04 on
P05 on
P06 off
P07 off
P08 off
P09 off
P10 off
P11 off
6--80
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Ty--rap
Condensation
exhaust pipe
Condensation
exhaust
Figure 6--33 Different sides of an ACU of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
iv. Step 4: Bring PROGRAM #2 to an end by pressing the PROG key and
keeping it down until the End characters are displayed. Then the controller
displays the temperature (in Celsius degrees) of the internal air circulation
in the BTS.
b. PROGRAM #1
i. Step 5: Press the PROG key and keep it down approximately 3 seconds
until the Pr1 mnemonic is displayed. Release the key. The P01 characters
are displayed.
ii. Step 6: Proceed as for PROGRAM #2, regarding the P01 to P15 variables
(refer to the step 3).
The variables must be initiated with the following values:
P01* 40 (temperature threshold for triggering the refrigeration if
T>P01)
P02* 37 (temperature threshold for shutting down the refrigeration if
T<P02)
P03 10 (temperature threshold for shutting down the heating if
T>P03)
P04 5 (temperature threshold for triggering the heating if T<P04)
P05 to P08 are non accessible variables
P09 65 (upper temperature threshold =3D> alarm if T>P09)
P10 0 (lower temperature threshold =3D> alarm if T<P10)
P11 120 (time delay)
P12 600 (time delay before an alarm is set off, when the temperature
is above the upper temperature threshold, in seconds)
P13 600 (time delay before an alarm is set off, when the temperature
is below the lower temperature threshold, in seconds)
P14 0 (non modifiable data)
P15 0 (non modifiable data)
Note: The P01 and P02 variables can be displayed only if the P02
variable of PROGRAM #2 is initialized with the nor value.
iii. Step 7: Bring PROGRAM #1 to an end by pressing the PROG key and
keeping it down until the End characters are displayed. Then the controller
displays the temperature, in Celsius degrees.
6--82
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Pull down the ACU hood.
b. Turn on the climatic unit fans (circuit breaker L2/CB2 on the PCU front panel).
c. Put the climatic unit circuit breaker in the I position.
6.2.15 Replacement and cleaning of the ACU filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0669490
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 5 minutes for the replacement and 5 minutes for the
cleaning.
Tools required
RPSuper filter coat spray (ZEROMc Lean reference 52--6064--03, Research Products
reference 412)
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The ACU filter is located on Figure 6--34.
6--84
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Open the hood.
3 Removal of the ACU filter
a. Undo the filter screw (see Figure 6--34).
b. Lift the filter high enough for bottom to clear the lower filter retainer.
c. Pull the bottom of the filter forward pressing downward until the top of the filter
clears the upper filter retainer.
d. Carefully remove the filter if the unit is in operation. This is to ensure dirt from
the filter does not enter the air intake opening.
4 Reinsertion of the ACU filter
a. Insert the old filter cleaned beforehand or a newfilter by sliding the filter top into
the upper retainer.
b. Push the filter against the unit and slide the filter bottom into the lower retainer.
c. Tighten the filter screw in the upper retainer.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
Close the hood.
6 Cleaning of an ACU filter
Once removed, the filter can be cleaned on site or it can be taken back to the
warehouse and cleaned. The filter cleaned can be used the next time a filter is dirty.
a. Flush the filter with warm water from the exhaust side to the intake side.
DO NOT USE CAUSTICS.
b. Place the filter so one of its corners is pointing down, allowing for complete
drainage.
c. Recoat the filter with the RP Super Filter Coat spray by spraying liberally from
both sides, avoid any excessive application which causes running and dripping.
6--86
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Interconnection
box
Filter screw
Figure 6--34 View of the ACU filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.16 Replacement of the ACU or DACS gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC codes:
gasket between the cabinet and the ACUs R0117928
gasket between the cabinet and the DACS P0875234
gasket between the cabinet and the DACS EP4 P0991757
DACS environmental gasket (length 0,956m) R0117842
ACU environmental gasket (length 4,24m) R0117842
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes per gasket.
Tools required
Lint free cloth
Solvents MEK or Acetone IPA
Knife
Quick set adhesive Permabond 105
Roller hand 3/4 wide 60 durometer
Rubber gloves talcum free
Safety glasses
DANGER
Electric shock
For a BTS with ACUs, the BTS remains supplied with the mains
power supply.
For a BTS with a DACS, the BTS does not remain supplied with the
mains power supply.
Location
The ACU or DACS gaskets are located between the cabinet and the ACUs or DACS.
6--88
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Remove the ACU or the DACS (see Paragraphs 6.2.14 and 6.2.20).
3 Removal of a gasket
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface.
DANGER
Wear gloves and safety glasses for protection against ejection.
b. Clean the surface as follows:
i. Use a lint freecloth applicator moistened withsolvents MEKor AcetoneIPA
to wash the aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive adhesive is
removed.
ii. Continue cleaning until all the traces of the pressuresensitive adhesiveand
the film residue are removed.
iii. Let the surface dry for five minutes at ambient temperature.
c. Determine the length of the gasket required and cut it with a knife tothe sizewith
a 45 angle at each extremity.
4 Reinsertion of a gasket
a. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
b. Put the gasket adhesive in place by pressing firmly on the surface
c. Roll the gasket with a moderate pressure to glue it with a rubber roller 3/4 wide.
d. Repeat the last operation this time with enough force to collapse the D portion
of the gasket. This pressure will ensure a full contact of the pressure sensitive
adhesive to the aluminum surface.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Ensure the alignment of the roller to the top of the gasket surface.
This rolling of the gasket shall be done at least two times on the
entire length of the gasket.
e. Achieve a full adhesive strength of the bond within 12 hours.
f. Join the corners by using a quick set adhesive (Permabond 105).
g. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are remaining.
Reinstall the ACU or the DACS (see Paragraphs 6.2.14 and 6.2.20).
6--90
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Front panel
Gaskets between the
cabinet and the ACUs
Environmental gasket
Figure 6--35 View of the ACU gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Environmental gasket
Front panel
Gasket between the
cabinet and the DACS
Figure 6--36 View of the DACS gasket of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--92
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.17 Replacement of a base cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA6593
CPC code: A0729309
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The fan is located on Figure 2--30 and Figure 2--36.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Push down or up the two locks of the fan unit.
b. Remove the cover.
c. Locate the defective fan.
d. Check the fuse on the front panel of the faulty fan:
If the fuse is faulty, replace it (Shop Replaceable Unit).
If the fuse is correct, replace the fan (Field Replaceable Unit).
e. After the replacement of the fuse, the associated fan should be turning.
Otherwise, replace the fan.
3 Removal of a fan
a. Disconnect the fan power lead.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the fan (see Figure 6--37).
c. Extract the fan and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a fan
a. Insert the fan into the ventilation rack.
c. Reconnect the fan power lead.
a. Reinsert the cover.
b. Push the cover.
6--94
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screws
Figure 6--37 Base cabinet ventilation rack of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6.2.18 Replacement of a BCF cabinet fan (S8000 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0682269
Intervention time
Tools required
--head screwdriver
Flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The fan is located on Figure 2--29.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--96
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Fans Protection grid Fuse Quarter turn FANICO board
1
Figure 6--38 BCF cabinet ventilation of the S8000 Indoor BTS
GND
--48V 0V
O
&
M
0
/
1
O
&
M
2
/
3
O
&
M
4
/
5
P
C
M
0
/
1
B
C
F-
A
L
A
R
M
A
B
I
S
P
C
M
4
/
5
P
C
M
2
/
3
GND
GND
--48V 0V
Rear
Front
Connectors Ventilation grid
Fans
Figure 6--39 Top view of the BCF cabinet of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6--98
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Locate the defective fan owing to the hand.
b. Check the fuse on the front panel of the faulty fan:
If the fuse is faulty, replace it.
If the fuse is correct, replace the fan.
c. After the replacement of the fuse, the associated fan should be turning.
Otherwise, replace the fan.
3 Removal of a fan
a. Disconnect the fan power lead.
b. Undo the two quarter turn on the front panel of the BCF cabinet and move
forward the plate of the FANICO board (see Figure 6--38) with a screwdriver.
c. Undo the sixteen screws on the BCF cabinet protection grid.
d. Remove the protection grid.
e. Undo the four fan screws.
f. Extract the fan and remove it.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Be careful nothing falls in the hole.
4 Reinsertion of fan
a. Insert the fan.
b. Tighten the four fan nuts.
c. Replace the protection grid.
d. Tighten the sixteen screws on the BCF cabinet protection grid.
e. Replace the plate of the FANICOboard and tighten the two quarter turn on the
front panel of the BCF cabinet
f. Reconnect the fan power lead.
6.2.19 Replacement of a BCF power supply
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA02CA
CPC code: A0665540
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
Location
The BCF power supplies are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--6, Figure 2--29, Figure 2--30
and Figure 2--36.
6--100
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Locate the defective module.
b. Put the switch of the BCF power supply in the O position.
3 Removal of the BCF power supply
a. Undo the two fixing screws on the front panel.
b. Extract the module by pulling the two extraction handles forward (see
Figure 6--40).
4 Reinsertion of the BCF power supply
a. Insert the power supply into the cabinet.
b. Secure the module by pressing on the two front--panel extraction handles.
Put the switch of the BCF power supply in the I position.
F4A
48V/60V
5V--12A
I
O
V
I
P1
P3
F1 Fuse
4A
250V time delay
Screw
Extractor
Figure 6--40 BCF power supply
6--102
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.20 Replacement of the DACS climatic system (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
DACS climatic system NTQA97AA A0687115
DACS low noise upgrade kit NTQA97AB A0744781
Low Noise DACS climatic system NTQA97BA A0758314
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 1 hour.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
Wrench for M6 hexagonal head
DANGER
Electric shock
DANGER
Heavy lifting
A DACS is very heavy ( 42kg).
CAUTION
according to the security standards.
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is disabled.
Location
The DACS climatic system is located on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
In the case of a power supply rack of the six--rectifier type, performthe following
actions.
i. Open the hood and doors of the cabinet.
ii. In the case of a single--phase or split single--phase ACbox, put the main
circuit breaker in the O position.
In the case of a tri--phase AC box, press the general stop button.
iii. Put the L2 circuit breaker of the PCU in the power supply rack.
In the case of a power supply rack of the seven--rectifier type, perform the
following actions.
i. Open the hood and doors of the cabinet.
6--104
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
iii. Remove the PCU cover from the power supply rack by removing the four
cover screws.
iv. Put theCB2 circuit breaker onthe PCUpower supply rack inthe I position.
v. Put the PCU cover on the power supply rack.
vi. Tighten the four screws on the PCU cover.
In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPSin the OFF position.
ii. Put the two rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU of the GIPS in the OFF
position.
iii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
iv. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
3 Removal of the DACS climatic system
a. Remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see Figure 6--41).
b. Remove the access filter plate.
c. Remove the filter.
d. Remove the four quarter turns from the large cover.
e. Lift the large cover and remove the ground wire on the right side.
f. Remove the large cover.
g. Disconnect all wires related to the climatic systemfromthe interconnection box.
Note: In the case of a single--phase mains power supply, locate the following
items of equipment.
On TB1: there are threeinput wires, one Phasesector, oneNeutral,
and one Ground input wire
One alarm connector
Two battery wires: one black +0 V and one blue --48 V.
Note: In the case of a tri--phase mains power supply, locate the following
items of equipment.
On TB1: there are four sector input wires, two Phases, one Neutral,
and one Ground
One alarm connector
Two battery wires: black +0 V and blue --48 V
i. Remove the two nuts fastening the battery wires.
ii. Disconnect the three or four Faston lugs of the sector input wires.
iii. Disconnect the alarm connector.
h. Unscrewthe two cruciformscrews on the left side of the protective plastic plate.
i. Remove the protective plastic plate.
j. Remove the five hexagon screws fromthe following location in the bottomof the
DACS:
i. three screws under the filter on the front of the DACS
ii. two screws, each located on opposite ends at the back of the DACS.
k. Cut the two alarm wires of the cabinet hood.
l. Raise the climatic system to avoid damaging the watertight and airtight seal
located below it.
m. Remove the climatic system.
6--106
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Four quarter turn Filter access
plate
Four quarter turn
Figure 6--41 DACS climatic system of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Terminal block
Alarm connector
Blue wire Black wire
Free Ground PE
sector
Neutral N
tri--phase
Phase L
Phase Ground PE Neutral N Phase L
Figure 6--42 DACS interconnection box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--108
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4 Reinsertion of the DACS climatic system
a. Place a climatic system (DACS) nearby.
b. Tighten the two cruciform screws from the plastic protective plate.
c. Remove the plastic protective plate.
d. Tighten the five hexagon screws at the bottom of the climatic system (DACS).
e. Install the plastic protective plate.
f. Tighten the two screws.
g. Plug in the alarm connector.
h. Connect the three or four sector Faston lugs for the wires.
i. Tighten the two nuts holding the battery wires.
j. Move the two cabinet hood alarm wires to the left out of the climatic system
(DACS).
k. Expose the extremities of the following wires:
i. the two cabinet hood alarm wires
ii. the two wires exiting the climatic system (DACS).
l. Use the side of the lug to crimp an exposed DACS wire extremity.
m. Use the other side of the lug to crimp the second exposed DACS wire extremity.
n. Crimp the two cabinet hood alarm wires on the second lug link.
o. Install the large cover by fastening the right side of the ground bar.
p. Tighten the four quarter turns of the large cover.
q. Insert the filter.
r. Install the access filter plate.
s. Tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
In the case of a power supply rack of the six--rectifier type, perform the
following actions.
i. Put the L2 circuit breaker on the PCU power supply rack in the I position.
circuit breaker in the I position.
iii. Close the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
In the case of a power supply rack of the seven--rectifier type, perform the
following actions.
i. Remove the PCUcover screws fromthe power supply rack and removethe
PCU cover.
iii. Put theCB2 circuit breaker onthe PCUpower supply rack inthe I position.
iv. Put the PCU cover on the power supply rack.
v. Tighten the four PCU cover screws.
vi. Close the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADU of the GIPS in the ON position.
ii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU of the GIPS in the ON position.
iii. Put the two rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU of the GIPS in the ON
position.
iv. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the ON position.
v. Close the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
6--110
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.21 Replacement of the DACS actuator (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98DA
CPC code: A0724282
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS actuator is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
b. In the case of an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker in the O position.
iii. In the case of a tri--phase AC box, press the general stop button.
iv. Put the circuit breaker FAN on the PCU of the rectifier shelf in the O
position.
v. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and remove it
cautiously.
c. In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the actuator
a. Loosen the nut holding on the actuator cover and remove the cover.
b. Disconnect the connector from the actuator.
c. Push in the clutch: the damper can be positioned where it is easiest to work on.
d. Loosen the two flanged hex nuts no.1 on the actuator.
e. Remove the hex lock nut no.2 and the flat washer from the actuator arm.
f. Slide out the actuator arm from the actuator, also remove the brass bushing.
g. Remove the three Philips head screws.
4 Reinsertion of the actuator
a. Tighten the three Philips head screws.
b. Insert the brass brushing, and insert the actuator arm in the actuator.
6--112
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
c. Tighten the two flanged hex nuts no.1 on the actuator.
d. Insert the flat washer and the hex lock nut no.2.
e. Connect the connector to the actuator.
f. Insert the cover and tighten the screw holding the actuator cover.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Insert the DACS cover and screw its eight 1/4 turn fasteners.
i. Put the breaker FAN on the PCU of the rectifier shelf in the I position.
In the case of a tri--phase AC box, put all the circuit breakers in the I
position.
iii. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
iv. Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
v. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADU of the GIPS in the ON position.
vi. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU of the GIPS in the ON position.
vii. Put the two rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU of the GIPS in the ON
position.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the ON position.
ii. Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
Damper
Hex nut no. 2
Philips screws
Cover screw
Cover
Hex nuts no. 1
Actuator arm
Figure 6--43 View of the DACS of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--114
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Connector
Clutch
Figure 6--44 DACS actuator of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.22 Replacement of the DACS brass bushing (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98LA
CPC code: P0877667
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS brass bushing is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--116
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
iii. Put the circuit breaker FAN on the PCU of the rectifier shelf in the O
position.
iv. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and remove it
cautiously.
v. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
vi. Put the two rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU of the GIPS in the OFF
position.
vii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
i. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ADUof the GIPS in the OFF position.
ii. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and remove it
cautiously.
3 Removal of the brass bushing
a. Remove the nut and the flat washer from the linkage.
b. Slide off the linkage.
c. Remove the brass bushing.
4 Reinsertion of the brass bushing
a. Insert a new brass bushing.
b. Insert the linkage.
c. Insert the nut: do not overtighten it since the linkage must rotate.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
position.
v. Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
6--118
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.23 Replacement of the DACS capacitor (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98GA
CPC code: A0723678
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Stepladder
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS capacitor is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of theDCUof the GIPSin theOFF position.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the capacitor
a. Unscrew the two cruciform screws to remove the plastic piece.
b. Identify and clearly label each capacitor lead.
c. Remove all the leads.
d. Unscrew the screw no.1.
e. Remove the capacitor.
4 Reinsertion of the capacitor
a. Insert the capacitor and tighten the screw no.1.
b. Connect all the leads.
c. Put the plastic piece in place.
d. Tighten the two screws.
6--120
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
position.
Screws no. 2
Screw no. 1
Figure 6--45 DACS capacitor of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--122
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.24 Replacement of the DACS control assembly (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
The DACS control assembly can be replaced either by another DACS control assembly or
by using a DACS control kit. However the customer can only put in an order for a DACS
control kit.
Performing this procedure implies the identification of the DACS type (Standard DACS or
Low Noise DACS) before some actions.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Location
TheDACScontrol assembly is locatedintheStandardDACS(seeFigure 8--2) or intheLow
Noise DACS (see Figure 6--46).
The Standard DACS is located on Figure 5--52. The Low Noise DACS is located on
Figure 6--46.
Identification of the DACS type
To identify the type of DACS, perform the following actions:
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Remove the filter to check the presence of an ambient thermistor:
a. remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see Figure 6--46),
b. remove the access filter plate,
c. remove the filter,
d. check the presenceof anambient thermistor (see Figure 8--2 andFigure 6--46),
e. insert the filter,
f. install the access filter plate,
g. tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
4 If the ambient thermistor is missing, the DACS is a Standard DACS.
5 If the ambient thermistor is present, the DACS is a Low Noise DACS.
The three following paragraphs describe the replacement of a DACS control assembly by
using a DACS control kit.
Each paragraph corresponds to a possible configuration of the DACS on site:
Low Noise DACS,
Standard DACS without transfer board,
Standard DACS already including a transfer board.
Choose the corresponding procedure among the three paragraphs.
Note: The other items of the DACS control kit can be used to replace their existing
equivalent. However it is recommended to replace them once the replacement of
the DACS control assembly has been completed.
6--124
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Quarter turn
Filter
Figure 6--46 DACS filter of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.24.1 Replacement for a Low Noise DACS
Product reference
PEC code: NTU498AA kit: DACS control board
CPC code: A0994379 kit: DACS control board
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Stepladder
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS control assembly is located on Figure 8--2. (see item Printed circuit assembly
(PCA) for control and distribution power on this figure).
6--126
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet if not done yet.
position.
iv. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise DACS cover and
remove it cautiously.
position.
v. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise DACS cover and
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly
a. Identify and clearly label all the connectors on the DACS control assembly
(see Figure 6--47).
b. Remove all the connectors from the DACS control assembly.
c. Lift the DACS control assembly off from the four plastic standoffs.
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly by using a DACS control kit
a. Insert the DACS control assembly included in the DACS control kit on the four
plastic standoffs (the transfer board of the DACS control kit is not used).
b. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control assembly (see
Figure 6--48 for the DACS control assembly and P7 connectors wiring
indications).
c. Ensure that dip switches H1, SW2 andSW1 (see Figure 6--47) are set as
follows:
H1 in position 2
SW2: 1 = ON, 9 = ON, all others OFF
SW1: 1 = OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Insert the Low Noise DACS cover and screw its eight 1/4 turn fasteners.
position.
6--128
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
position.
6.2.24.2 Replacement for a Standard DACS without transfer board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9803 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
CPC code: A0784516 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
PEC code: NTU498AA kit: DACS control board
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Stepladder
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS control assembly is located on Figure 8--2 (see item Printed circuit assembly
6--130
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly
a. Identify and clearly label all the connectors on the DACS control assembly.
If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B three--pin connectors,
indications of the existing wiring of those ones are given on Figure 6--49.
If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B five--pin connectors,
4 Reinsertionof theDACScontrol assembly andpossibly insertion of a transfer board
by using a DACS control kit
plastic standoffs.
If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes P4A and P4B
five--pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS control kit is not used.
three--pin connectors, the transfer board of the DACS control kit is used. The
transfer board is located on Figure 6--50.
b. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes P4A and P4B
five--pin connectors, insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control
assembly (see Figure 6--51 for DACS control assembly wiring indications).
c. If the DACS control assembly previously removed includes P4A and P4B
three--pin connectors:
i. unscrew the M5 nut of the earthing wires and remove the earthing wires
(see Figure 6--50)
ii. insert the transfer board of the DACS control kit
iii. reinsert the earthing wires and screw the M5 nut
iv. insert and connect all the connectors on the DACS control assembly (see
Figure 6--53 for DACS control assembly wiring indications)
v. insert and connect all the connectors on the transfer board by using the
appropriate wires included in the DACScontrol kit (see Figure 6--53 for the
transfer board wiring)
d. Ensure that dip switches H1, SW2 andSW1 (see Figure 6--47) are set as
follows:
H1 in position 2
SW1: 1 = OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = ON
6--132
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
position.
6.2.24.3 Replacement for a Standard DACS already including a transfer board
Product reference
PEC code: NTU498AA kit DACS control board
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Stepladder
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS control assembly is located on Figure 8--2, (see item Printed circuit assembly
6--134
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the transfer board
a. Identify and clearly label all the connectors on the DACS control assembly.
indications of the existing wiring of those ones are given on Figure 6--52
(example in the case of one twin blower for FANA and one multispeed blower
for FAN B).
indications of the existing wiring of those ones are given on Figure 6--53 (case
of two twin blowers) and Figure 6--54 (example in the case of one twin blower
for FAN B and one multispeed blower for FAN A).
d. If the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
i. identify and clearly label all the connectors on the transfer board
ii. remove all the connectors from the transfer board
iii. unscrew the M5 nut of the earthing wires and remove the earthing wires
(see Figure 6--50)
iv. remove the transfer board
4 Reinsertion of the DACS control assembly and possibly of the transfer board by
using a DACS control kit
plastic standoffs.
b. If the reinsertion or the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
i. reinsert the transfer board or insert the transfer board included in the DACS
control kit
ii. reinsert the earthing wires (see Figure 6--50) and screw the M5 nut
iii. insert and connect all the connectors on the transfer board by using the
existing wires or the appropriate wires included inthe DACScontrol kit. See
indications below for the transfer board wiring
c. Insert and connect all the connectors on the DACScontrol assembly, and onthe
transfer board if not done yet.
three--pin connectors, indications of the DACS control assembly and of the
transfer boardwirings aregivenonFigure 6--54 (exampleinthecaseof onetwin
blower for FAN B and one multispeed blower for FAN A).
five--pin connectors, indications of the DACS control assembly and of the
transfer board wirings are given on Figure 6--53 (case of two twin blowers) and
on Figure 6--54 (example in the case of one twin blower for FAN B and one
multispeed blower for FAN A).
d. Ensure that dip switches H1, SW2 andSW1 (see Figure 6--47) are set as
follows:
H1 in position 2
6--136
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
SW1: 1 = OFF, 2 = ON, 3 = ON
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
position.
Figure 6--47 Control assembly of the Low noise DACS and of the DACS control kit of
6--138
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P7
Multispeed blower Multispeed blower
5--way wiring harness
DACS control assembly
4--way / 5--way wiring harness
4--way / 5--way wiring
harness
Towards the
ambient
thermistor
Figure 6--48 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS
FAN A FAN B
Twin blower Twin blower
P4A P4B P3A
Figure 6--49 Wiring for the Standard DACS without DACS control kit nor DACS
multispeed blower kit
6--140
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Transfer board M5 nut
Earthing
wires
Figure 6--50 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
harness
Figure 6--51 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers
6--142
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3A
P1A P2A P1B P2B
Twin blower Multispeed blower
Transfer board
3--way wiring
harness
Figure 6--52 Wiring for the Standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for
FAN B)
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P1A P2A P1B P2B
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Transfer
board
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Figure 6--53 Wiring for the standard DACS with the control kit
6--144
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P1A P2A P1B P2B
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Multispeed blower Twin blower
Transfer board
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Figure 6--54 Wiring for the Standard DACS with a DACS control kit and one DACS
multispeed blower (FAN A
6.2.25 Replacement of the DACS filter (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98AA
CPC code: A0724343
Intervention time
Tools required
Screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS filter is located on Figure 8--2.
6--146
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Removal of the filter
a. Remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see Figure 6--55).
b. Remove the access filter plate.
c. Remove the filter.
4 Reinsertion of the filter
a. Insert a new filter.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Using Nortel filters is mandatory to avoid risks to the DACS
components and BTS equipment damage.
b. Install the access filter plate.
c. Tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
CAUTION
To ensure the hood key--locks are properly secured refer to
paragraph 5.2.2.
Close the doors and the hood of the cabinet.
6--148
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Quarter turn
Filter
6.2.26 Replacement of the DACS air inlet clogged switch
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98HA
CPC code: A0724338
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS air inlet clogged switch is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--150
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
b. For an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
ii. For a single--phase or split single--phase AC box, put the main circuit
breaker in the O position.
For a tri--phase AC box, press the general stop button.
position.
cautiously.
c. For a GIPS, perform the following actions.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the air inlet switch
a. Identify and clearly label each wire.
b. Disconnect the two wires.
c. Remove the rubber or plastic tube.
d. Drill out the rivets.
e. Remove the air inlet switch.
4 Reinsertion of the air inlet switch
a. Insert a new air inlet switch.
b. Replace the old rivets with 1/8 inch closed end aluminum rivets.
c. Insert the rubber or plastic tube.
d. Connect the two wires.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
breaker in the I position.
For a tri--phase AC box, put all the circuit breakers in the I position.
position.
6--152
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--56 DACS air inlet switch of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.27 Replacement of the DACS heater (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98JA
CPC code: A0724340
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS heater is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--154
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the heater
a. Remove the DACS unit from the cabinet (see Paragraph 6.2.20).
b. Remove the two leads and the heat shrink from the ends of the heater.
c. Unscrewthe large hex nut and slide this endof theheater back through thehole.
d. Drop this end down to pull the other end of the heater (if the heater is oriented
correctly, the other end can be pulled out more easily).
4 Reinsertion of the heater
a. Insert a new heater: be careful to orient it correctly.
b. Tighten the large hex nut.
c. Insert the heat shrink to the ends of the heater.
d. Connect the two leads.
e. Reinsert the DACS unit in the cabinet (see Paragraph 6.2.20).
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--156
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--57 DACS heater of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.28 Replacement of the DACS thermistor (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98FA
CPC code: A0723679
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS thermistor is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--158
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the thermistor
a. Remove the DACS unit from the cabinet (see Paragraph 6.2.20).
b. Remove the connector P1 from the DACS control assembly.
c. Remove the probe from the clips located underneath the sheetmetal where the
DACS control assembly is mounted.
d. Pull the thermistor probe up through the washer and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the thermistor
a. Insert the thermistor probe.
b. Insert the probe on the clips located underneath the sheetmetal.
c. Insert the connector P1 on the DACS control assembly.
d. Insert the DACS unit in the cabinet (see Paragraph 6.2.20).
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--160
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.29 Replacement of the DACS thermostat (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA8111
CPC code: A0520118
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS thermostat is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the thermostat
a. Identify and label each wire.
b. Disconnect the two leads from the thermostat.
c. Unscrew the two cross--head screws.
d. Remove the thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostat
a. Insert a new thermostat.
b. Tighten the two cross--head screws.
c. Connect the two leads to the thermostat.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
6--162
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
position.
Figure 6--58 DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--164
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.30 Replacement of the auto--reset DACS heater thermostat
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: part of the kit NTQA81AA
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
ESDS handling precautions and mandatory operations
procedure described below. To ensure personel safety and network
live traffic, mandatory preliminary operations should be respected
on each onsite intervention. Those operations are described below.
2 Mandatory Preliminary operations
a. Perform the intervention, as much as possible, during the most appropriate
weather and network traffic condition, i.e. cool weather and low traffic periods.
b. Limit the ventilation cut--off to the strict minimum if possible and especially on
highly equipped BTSs.
c. Leave the doors open during the operation period.
d. Call the Network Operation Center and ensure that no DACS alarmis detected
before the intervention and that the intervention can proceed as planned.
e. Replace dirty filters. When done and to allow a correct air flow, wait for 30
minutes of ventilation before replacing the DACS thermostat. DACS hood is
closed.
f. Check the damper position. Make sure that it reflects the following weather
conditions:
Low temperature (--40 C (--40F)) < Tcab < 15 C (59F))
The heater is energized and the damper is closed.
Medium temperature (15C (59F) < Tcab < 40C (104F))
The heater is switched off, the damper remains closed.
Normal temperature (Tcab = 40 C (104F))
The actuator modulating motor controls the damper position automatically.
High temperature (Tcab > 40 C (104F))
The damper is fully open.
If the damper position does not match the above weather conditions,
manually open it and let the air circulate for 30 minutes before performingthe
DACS thermostat replacement. DACS hood is closed.
g. Check that the ventilation starts automatically when the operation is finished.
3 Removal of the thermostat
a. Power off DACS main supply and select Climatic System Circuit Breaker.
b. Power off the fan breaker.
c. Identify and label each wire.
d. Disconnect the two leads from the thermostat.
e. Unscrew the two cross--head screws.
f. Remove the thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostat
6--166
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Insert a new thermostat.
b. Tighten the two cross--head screws.
c. Connect the two leads to the thermostat.
a. Before powering up the DACS, check the thermistor, heater, actuator, damper.
All these verifications are described in Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance
Procedures, paragraph 5.4.15.
CAUTION
Any repair or replacement is forbidden at this stage of the
thermostat replacement process. If any additional operation is
required on the DACS, 30 minutes of ventilation time is necessary
to avoid the risk of over--heating the BTS and creating an outage.
b. Proceed to the labelling of the updated DACS parts.
c. Power on all breakers and verify that the air flow is restored to the normal
operation.
6.2.31 Replacement of the DACS (extended) transformer
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
The transformer can be replaced by another transformer or by an extended transformer.
However the customer can only put in an order for an extended transformer.
An extended transformer can be only replaced by another extended transformer.
Note: if necessary, an extended transformer can replace a transformer.
Product reference
Transformer QTK710BH A0724332
Extended transformer NTQA98DB A0785383
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS transformer is located on Figure 8--2.
6--168
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of the transformer
a. Remove the hex head bolt, the flat washer and the lock washer.
b. Clearly identify each lead and label them.
c. Removethecover fromtheplastic wiretray, by liftingupandpullingout thecover
top.
d. Disconnect the two leads connected to the rectifier bridge BR1.
e. Disconnect the other two leads (bullet connectors) which are connected in the
wire tray.
f. Remove the transformer.
4 Reinsertion of the transformer
a. Insert a new transformer.
b. Connect the two leads connected to the rectifier bridge BR1.
c. Connect the other two leads.
d. Insert the cover on the plastic wire tray.
e. Tighten the lock washer, the flat washer and the hex head bolt.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--170
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--59 DACS transformer of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--172
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.32 Replacement of a DACS twin blower (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
The DACS twin blower can be replaced either by another DACS twin blower or by using a
DACS multispeed blower kit. However the customer can only put in an order for a DACS
multispeed blower kit.
Performing this procedure implies the identification of the DACS type (Standard DACS or
Low Noise DACS) before some actions.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Location
The DACS twin blower is located in the Standard or Low Noise DACS (see Figure 8--2).
The Standard or Low Noise DACS is located on Figure 8--1.
Identification of the DACS type
To identify the type of DACS, perform the following actions:
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Remove the filter to check the presence of an ambient thermistor:
a. remove the four quarter turns from the access filter plate (see Figure 6--60),
b. remove the access filter plate,
c. remove the filter,
d. check the presence of an ambient thermistor (see Figure 8--2),
e. insert the filter,
f. install the access filter plate,
g. tighten the four quarter turns of the access filter plate.
4 If the ambient thermistor is missing, the DACS is a Standard DACS.
5 If the ambient thermistor is present, the DACS is a Low Noise DACS.
The three following paragraphs describe the replacement of a DACS twin blower by using
a DACS multispeed blower kit.
Each paragraph corresponds to a possible configuration of the DACS on site:
Low Noise DACS,
Standard DACS without transfer board,
Standard DACS already including a transfer board.
Note: The other items of the DACS multispeed blower kit can be used to replace their
existing equivalent. However it is recommended to replace them once the
replacement of the DACS twin blower has been completed.
6--174
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Quarter turn
Filter
6.2.32.1 Replacement for a Low Noise DACS
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98EB (DACS multispeed blower kit)
CPC code: A0785384 (DACS multispeed blower kit)
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS twin blowers are located on Figure 6--68 and on Figure 8--2 (see item Twin
blowers on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--176
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
position.
iv. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise DACS cover and
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower
a. Unscrew the four screws which fix the bracket to the base sheetmetal.
b. Remove the cover from the plastic wire tray, by lifting up and pulling the cover
top out.
c. Remove the connector labeled P4B for the right blower or the connector
labeled P4A for the left blower (see Figure 6--61).
d. Remove the blower.
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower by using the DACS multispeed blower kit
a. Insert the DACS twin blower included in the DACS multispeed blower kit (the
transfer board of the DACS multispeed blower kit is not used).
b. Connect theconnector labeledP4B totheright blower or the connector labeled
P4A to the left blower (see Figure 6--61).
c. Insert the cover on the plastic wire tray.
d. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base sheetmetal.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--178
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.32.2 Replacement for a Standard DACS without transfer board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9803 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
CPC code: A0784516 DACS BLOWER CABLE ADAPTER
PEC code: NTQA98EB DACS multispeed blower kit
CPC code: A0785384 DACS multispeed blower kit
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACS twin blowers are located on Figure 6--68 and on Figure 8--2 (see item Twin
blowers on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower
top out.
6--180
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
c. Remove the connector labeled P4B for the right blower or the connector
labeled P4A for the left blower.
d. Remove the blower.
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower and possibly insertion of a transfer board by
using a DACS multispeed blower kit
a. Insert the DACS twin blower included in the DACS multispeed blower kit.
b. If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B five--pin connectors,
connect the connector labeled P4B to the right blower and the connector
labeled P4A to the left blower (see Figure 6--64 for DACS twin blowers
(multispeed blowers) wiring indications).
c. If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B three--pin connectors:
i. unscrew the M5 nut of the earthing wires and remove the earthing wires
(see Figure 6--63),
ii. insert the transfer board of the DACS control kit,
iii. reinsert the earthing wires and screw the M5 nut,
iv. insert and connect all the connectors on the transfer board by using the
appropriate wires included in the DACS control kit (see Figure 6--65 for an
example of the transfer board wiring: when FAN B is replaced).
e. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base sheetmetal.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--182
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.32.3 Replacement for a Standard DACS already including a transfer board
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98EB (DACS multispeed blower kit)
CPC code: A0785384 (DACS multispeed blower kit)
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The DACStwin blowers are located onFigure 6--68 (see itemTwin blowers on this figure).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
cautiously.
3 Removal of a DACS twin blower and possibly of the transfer board
top out.
c. Identify and clearly label the connector of the DACS twin blower to be replaced.
indications of the existing wirings are given on Figure 6--65 (examplein thecase
of one twin blower for FAN A and one multispeed blower for FAN B).
indications of the existing wirings are given on Figure 6--66 (case of two twin
blowers) and Figure 6--67 (example in the case of one twin blower for FAN B
and one multispeed blower for FAN A).
d. Remove the connector of the DACS twin blower to be replaced.
e. Remove the DACS twin blower to be replaced.
6--184
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
f. If the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
i. identify and clearly label all the connectors on the transfer board
ii. remove all the connectors from the transfer board
iii. unscrew the M5 nut of the earthing wires and remove the earthing wires
(see Figure 6--63)
iv. remove the transfer board
4 Reinsertion of a DACS twin blower and possibly of the transfer board by using a
DACS multispeed blower kit
a. Insert the DACS twin blower included in the DACS multispeed blower kit.
b. If the reinsertion or the replacement of the transfer board is needed:
i. reinsert the transfer board or insert the transfer board included in the DACS
multispeed blower kit
ii. reinsert the earthing wires (see Figure 6--63) and screw the M5 nut
iii. insert and connect all the connectors on the transfer board by using the
existing wires or the appropriate wires included in the DACS multispeed
blower kit. See indications below for the transfer board wiring
If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B three--pin
connectors, indications of the DACS control assembly and of the transfer
board wirings are given on Figure 6--65 (example in the case of one twin
blower for FAN A and one multispeed blower for FAN B)
If the DACS control assembly includes P4A and P4B five--pin
connectors, indications of the DACS control assembly and of the transfer
board wirings are given on Figure 6--66 (case of two twin blowers) and on
Figure 6--67 (example in the case of one twin blower for FAN B and one
multispeed blower for FAN A).
c. Connect the connector of the DACS twin blower replaced if not done yet.
e. Tighten the four screws attaching the bracket to the base sheetmetal.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
position.
6--186
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P7
harness
Towards the
ambient
thermistor
Figure 6--61 Wiring for the Low Noise DACS
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3A
Figure 6--62 Wiring for the standard DACS without control kit Nor multispeed blower kit
6--188
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Transfer board M5 nut
Earthing
wires
Figure 6--63 DACS transfer board of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
harness
Figure 6--64 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control assembly and two
multispeed blowers
6--190
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3A
P1A P2A P1B P2B
Twin blower Multispeed blower
Transfer board
3--way wiring
harness
Figure 6--65 Wiring for the standard DACS with one multispeed blower kit (for FAN B)
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P1A P2A P1B P2B
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Transfer
board
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Figure 6--66 Wiring for the Standard DACS with the control kit
6--192
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
FAN A FAN B
P4A P4B P3
P1A P2A P1B P2B
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Multispeed blower Twin blower
Transfer board
4--way / 5--way
wiring harness
Figure 6--67 Wiring for the standard DACS with a control kit and one multispeed
blower (FAN A)
DACS twin blowers
Figure 6--68 DACS twin blowers of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--194
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.33 Replacement of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA98FB
CPC code: A0785385
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The Low Noise DACS thermistor is located on Figure 8--2.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
cautiously.
position.
v. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the Low Noise DACS cover and
3 Removal of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor
a. Remove the connector P7 from the DACS control assembly (see
Figure 6--69).
b. Remove the probe from the clips located underneath the sheetmetal where the
DACS control assembly is mounted.
c. Pull the thermistor probe up through the washer and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the Low Noise DACS ambient thermistor
a. Insert the thermistor probe.
b. Insert the probe on the clips located underneath the sheetmetal.
c. Insert the connector P7 on the DACS control assembly.
6--196
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Insert the Low Noise DACS cover and screw its eight 1/4 turn fasteners.
position.
F2
SW1
LED1 LED2 LED3
O
F
F
1
C2
2
3
P2
CT1
HTR
Alarm LEDs
F1
P1
P7
L1
P3
C3
C4
C5
P4A
P4B
P5
P6
RA1
RA2
Figure 6--69 DACS Control assembly of the Low noise and of the DACS control kit of
6--198
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.34 Replacement of the door gasket
Product reference for S8000 Indoor BTS
Door gasket for the
cabinet
(quantity: 2)
-- R0118061
Door gasket for the BCF
cabinet
-- R0118060
Product reference for S8003 Indoor BTS
Vertical EMC door gasket -- P0603947
Horizontal EMC door
gasket
-- P0603948
Partition gasket -- P0603949
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately two hours for each gasket.
Tools required
Lint free cloth
Solvents: trichloroethylene or perchloroethylene
Q--LON cutting tool: ref MIS--9001--92 (not used for the S8003 Indoor BTS)
Blades: ref MIS--9003--03 SCHLEGEL (not used for the S8003 Indoor BTS)
Safety glasses
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
For the S8000 Indoor BTS, the door gasket is located on the cabinet (see Figure 6--70).
For the S8003 Indoor BTS, the five door gaskets are located on the cabinet (see
Figure 6--72).
Procedure for S8000 Indoor BTS
Step Action
CAUTION
For the CBCF, open the door
For the BCF cabinet, perform the following actions
i. If not done yet, open the door.
ii. Undo the ground wire.
iii. Push down the hinge pin.
iv. Remove the door.
3 Removal of a door gasket
DANGER
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface.
6--200
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
i. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents to wash the
aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive adhesive is removed.
BCF
4A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PA FANS DRX ALCO/BCF
.
12
3
0
2 0 0
01
1
C
0
C
1
1
BCF 4A
Ventilation system
Ventilation rack
Door
gasket
Door
gasket
Door
gasket
Cut
Figure 6--70 Location of the door gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6--202
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
90
5 mm
Figure 6--71 Cut of the gasket of the S8000 Indoor BTS
4 Reinsertion of a door gasket
a. Position the gasket and mark on the two cut points.
b. Cut with the Q--LON cutting tool (see Figure 6--71).
c. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
d. Put the gasket in place by pressing firmly on the surface (see Figure 6--70).
a. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are remaining.
b. Close the door and check visually if the gasket compression is correct
everywhere.
c. For the CBCF, close the door.
For the BCF cabinet, perform the following actions.
i. Reinsert the door.
ii. Put the ground wire.
iii. Close the door.
6--204
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure for S8003 Indoor BTS
Step Action
CAUTION
Wear the antistatic bracelet when performing the following
maintenance procedure.
Open the door
3 Removal of a door gasket
DANGER
a. Remove each old gasket from the aluminum surface.
i. Use a lint free cloth applicator moistened with solvents to wash the
aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive adhesive is removed.
4 Reinsertion of a door gasket
a. Position each gasket at its location.
b. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
c. Put each gasket in place by pressing firmly on the surface (see Figure 6--72).
2 vertical gaskets
Air outlets
Mechanical
frame
containing
the air filter
2 horizontal
gaskets
6 screws
1 partition gasket
Figure 6--72 Location of the door gasket of the S8003 Indoor BTS
6--206
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are remaining.
b. Close the door and check visually if the gasket compression is correct
everywhere.
c. Close the door of the CBCF.
6.2.35 Repair or replacement of the door gaskets (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
6.2.35.1 Repair of the door gaskets
Tools required
Tube of silicone, reference LOCTITE AS310 or equivalent, provided with a 2--3 mm
diameter injector and a mastic gun
Tube of glue, reference LOCTITE 454 or equivalent
Anti--stick agent, reference LOCTITE DM4 or equivalent
Roller (supplier: Grolleau, reference 0985A)
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The door gaskets are located on the doors for a cabinet with the DACS climatic system,
and on the hood or on the doors for a cabinet with the ACU climatic unit.
Gasket length (procedure applicable on site and in the warehouse)
Inject a spot of glue LOCTITE 454 on the gasket every about 2 cm.
Put in place the gasket and press on each spot of glue with the finger for at least ten
seconds.
Use the roller all along the gasket length.
Close the doors.
6--208
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Gasket corners (procedure applicable in the warehouse)
Inject the LOCTITE AS310 silicone or an equivalent, with a 2 -- 3 mm diameter injector
and a mastic gun, in the corner hole. Do not damage the gaskets and do not increase
the hole diameter.
Apply a light pressure on the corner to avoid the concentration of a thick silicone layer
and to have the silicone excess overflowed (inward and outward side).
Check that there is no hole left.
Remove the silicone overflow with a clean rag (if possible, try to avoid a contact with
the skin).
Avoid spreading the silicone on the gasket outer surface. There must not be any
remaining mark of silicone beyond a 5 mm width on both sides of the 45 cut of the
gasket (see Figure 6--73).
Exceptional case :
If there is no contact between the two gaskets, pour some silicone with the injector
on the two gaskets, see Figure 6--74.
Then, press lightly on the gaskets towards the gap, with the finger, to concentrate
the silicone in the gap. This action allows not to have a silicone excess inside the
gasket.
Repeat the two last steps for each of other seven gasket corners.
Apply a light pressure on each repaired corner, and check for silicone overflow. Check
by touch on the gasket, the silicone is tacked dry and does not stick.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
If thesilicone(onthecorners) is not completely dry when closingthe
doors, it can stick to the opposite metal frame of the door. So, when
opening the doors the next time, the gaskets may be damaged
irremediably.
Gasket corners (procedure applicable on site)
In the case of an in--warehouse retrofit, it is recommended to perform the above
procedure even if the below procedure is applicable.
Apply the anti--stick agent LOCTITEDM4 (or an equivalent) to the inner skinof thedoor
in front of the damaged corner. Cover an area of 20 mm square (see Figure 6--75).
Apply a line of a LOCTITE AS310 silicone or an equivalent along the edge of the
gasket :
For the corners located on the side of the cabinet, apply a silicone line along the top
and side edge of the gasket extending 10 mmin both directions fromthe corner (see
For the corner located in the middle of the cabinet, apply a silicone line only along
the top edge of the gasket extending 10 mm in both directions from the center of the
door axis (see Figure 6--77 and Figure 6--78).
Close the doors.
Note: If the corner join between the vertical and horizontal gaskets is not completely
closed, it is not a problem as the silicone barrier ensures a complete
impermeability against the water ingress.
6--210
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
5 mm max
Figure 6--73 View of the door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Silicone injected
Light pressure
with the finger to
re--concentrate
the silicone in
the gap
Final state:
-- silicone bulk in the gap
-- silicone on the inner
gasket surface
Gap Cross view
Figure 6--74 Silicone deposit at a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--212
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Cover this area with
the anti--stick agent
20 mm
20 mm
Figure 6--75 Front view of an inner corner of a door of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
10 mm
10 mm
Silicone line
Gaskets
Figure 6--76 Front view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--214
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Gasket
Silicone line
Figure 6--77 Side view of a door gasket corner of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
10 mm
Silicone line
Gaskets
10 mm
Gaskets
Figure 6--78 Front view of two door gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--216
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.35.2 Replacement of the door gaskets
Product reference
CPC codes:
ACU or DACS left door gasket: NTQA31MA
ACU or DACS right door gasket: NTQA31NA
Intervention time
Tools required
Clean lint free cloths
Non--metallic low abrasive pad
Gasket PSA roller (Chomerics Ref. C589R1, Grolleau Ref. 0985A)
Rubber gloves (Talcum free)
One of the following : 3M Natural Cleaner, Acetone, or MEK
Wooden Tongue Depressor or Equivalent
Distilled water
90% or higher concentration alcohol
Flat and cross--head screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The door gaskets are located on the doors for a cabinet with the DACS climatic system ,
and on the hood or on the doors for a cabinet with the ACU climatic unit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
If not done yet, open the doors.
3 Gasket removal
Note: In all of the following procedures, it is important the Alodineor goldcolored
Chromateconversioncoatingis not removedfromthealuminumsurfaces.
a. Pull out the grounding cables from the Fast--on lugs near the top hinge side of
the doors.
b. Remove the two door stay bars by removing the screw and the retaining piece
from the door end of the bars.
c. Peel off the existing two door gaskets, either from the doors or the cabinet.
DANGER
Observe the instructions and precautions for the above products,
as they may be hazardous to your health.
d. Use 3M Natural Cleaner, Acetone, or MEK, and a cloth or non--metallic low
abrasive pad to remove all PSA residue which remains on the surface. Ensure
the gold Chromate plating is not removed. Repeat as necessary.
e. Any excess silicone remaining on the door or cabinet surface is peeled off, or
scraped off carefully with a wooden tongue depressor or equivalent. DO NOT
REMOVE the silicone used to fill the gaps between the different sections of the
cabinet.
f. Wash with distilled water and dry with a clean lint free cloth.
6--218
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4 Gasket preparation
The new gaskets will be applied to the doors, regardless of where they were
mounted previously. They mount on the gold colored aluminum panels riveted to
the doors, hereafter referred to as door panels.
Determine if the cabinet is equipped with two ACUs or a DACSunit. There is a label
on the right side of the cabinet which is stamped NTQA97AA if it is a Standard
DACS cabinet, or NTQA97BA if it is a Low Noise DACS, or NTQA95AB if it is an
ACU cabinet.
FOR A Standard DACS or a Low Noise DACS CABINET: Hold the gaskets up
to the doors to see where they will be installed. NTQA31MA is installed on the
left door (as viewed fromthe front) so it is flush with the top, left, and right edges
of the door panel. NTQA31NA is installed on the right door in the same manner.
FORANACUCABINET: Hold the gaskets up to the doors to see where they will
be installed. NTQA31MA is installed on the left door (as viewed from the front)
so it is centered between the two rows of rivets on the top, and is flush with the
non--hinge side of the door panel.
5 Gasket application
a. Put on talcum free rubber gloves.
b. On each door panel, clean an area approximately 75 mm wide from each edge
with Acetone, MEK, or alcohol and dry with a clean lint free cloth. Allow the
surface to dry completely.
c. DO NOT TOUCH this surface with bare hands since the oil from the skin will
have a detrimental effect on the adhesion of the new gasket.
d. Remove 75--100 mm of the protective backing from the PSA at a time. Start in
the upper non--hinge corner of the panel, and press down on the gasket to tack
it in place, as you work around the perimeter. AVOIDany finger contact with the
adhesive.
e. Ensure the strip is in correct position, then press down firmly to ensure a good
mechanical bondover thecontact surface. Avoid repositioning, since it hampers
the effectiveness of the adhesive and may bend or kink the strip.
f. Use the gasket roller with moderate pressure to further tack the gasket in place.
Repeat with enough force to collapse the gasket.
g. Reinstall the door stay bars to the doors.
h. Reconnect the grounding lugs to the doors.
6.2.36 Replacement of a DRX module
Note: There are two types of DRX: DRX and eDRX. The term DRX is used to
refer to the two types unless the context indicates otherwise.
DRX module for R--GSM --110dBm NTQA01WA A0688140
DRX module for GSM 900 --108dBm NTQA01PA A0666905
DRX module for GSM 900 --110dBm NTQA01RA A0679766
DRX module for GSM 1800 --108dBm NTQA01HA A0666904
DRX module for GSM 1800 --110dBm NTQA01KA A0679760
DRX module for GSM 1900 --110dBm NTQA01CB A0686556
DRX ND E--GSM NTQA01SA A0723997
DRX module for GSM 1800 (new design) NTQA01LA A0723996
DRX module for GSM 1900 (new design) NTQA01DA A0723995
DRX--ND3 GSM NTQA89GA
DRX--ND3 R--GSM NTQA89HA A0511602
eDRX module for GSM 900 NTQA88JA A0510909
eDRX module for GSM 1800 NTQA88DA A0797868
eDRX module for GSM 1900 NTQA88PA A0797870
eDRX module for GSM 850 NTQA88HA A0868931
DRX module for GSM 900 NTQA01SA A0723997
DRX ND3 module for GSM 900 NTQA89GA A0797869
DRX ND3 module for E--GSM NTQA89GA A07978
DRX ND module for R--GSM NTQA01XA A07239
E--DRX module for GSM 1800 NTQA88DA A0797868
PA module for GSM 900 NTQA50PC A0800537
PA module for R--GSM NTQA50PD A0835133
6--220
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Intervention time
Tools required
8--mm SMA torque wrench
None if there is a redundant DRX or eDRX.
Loss or service if there is only one DRX or eDRX.
CAUTION
The service is reduced: in fact, the service is lost for the calls
depending on the faulty DRX or eDRX.
However, the service is lost in the case of a configuration O1.
Support of EDGE feature
If EDGE is required, an eDRX module must be replaced by an eDRX module.
Replacing a DRX by an eDRX or a DRX
If EDGE is not required, a failing DRX can be replaced by an eDRX or a DRX. In this case,
a lock/unlock TRX must be done to ensure that the coherence of the notifications sent to
the OMC--R.
The DRX modules are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--6, Figure 2--30 and Figure 2--36.
The DRX modules are located on Figure 2--45.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
b. Set the transceiverEquipment object associated with the faulty DRXto locked
at the OMC--R.
c. Put the switch of the associated PA in the O position or disconnect the power
cable of the PA from the PA--ICO.
d. Disconnect the coaxial cables and the connectors on the front panel (PWR,
FH--PCM, TX, RXM, RXD). Disconnect the PWR power lead first (cable on the
DRX INTERCO panel first, then on the DRX).
e. For the left DRX, cut the Rilsan ties.
3 Removal of a DRX module
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the DRX module.
b. Extract the DRX with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a DRX module
a. Check the hardware version number of the DRX, identified by its PEC code, is
compatible with the sWVersionRunning parameter on the
transceiverEquipment object at the OMC--R. DO NOT try to put the DRX into
service if this condition is not fulfilled.
CAUTION
Check the software version of the DRX is compatible with the
COAM.
b. Insert the DRX into the cabinet with the extraction tool.
c. Tighten the four fixing screws (see Figure 6--79 and Figure 6--80).
6--222
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables and the connectors on the front panel.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Connect the cables imperatively in the given order.
The tightening torque of the terminals (TX, RXD, RXM) must be
0.7 N--m 0.1. Use the 8--mm SMA torque wrench.
b. Connect the following cables: FH--PCM, TX, RXM, RXD, PWR.
c. Reconnect the PWR power lead part (cable on the DRX final, then on the DRX
INTERCO panel).
d. For the left DRX, attach the cables with Rilsan ties.
e. Put the switch of the associated PA in the I position or reconnect the power
cable of the PA to the PA--ICO.
f. Set the transceiverEquipment object to unlocked at the OMC--R.
g. Check the DRXis up on the MMI and no unexpectednotification appears during
the maintenance action.
h. Check the state of the LEDs. They are on. Then take the following states:
5 V LED on
RES1 LED off
AMNU LED off
BDT LED off
LI LED off
TX LED off
ALA LED off
DRX LED on
SPU LED off
BTSTS LED off
CL LED off
RX LED off
ALA
DRX
SPU
TX
CL
RX
+5V
RES1
AMNU
BDT
LI
TX
RESET
TEST
FH--PCM
PWR
TX OUT
RXD IN
RXM IN
Legend : Red LED
Green LED
Yellow LED
Screws
Figure 6--79 DRX module
6--224
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
SPU
DRX
ALA
BIST
LI
TX
RESET
TEST
FH--PCM
PWR
TX OUT
RXD IN
RXM IN
Legend : Red LED
Green LED
Yellow LED
Screws
RX
5V
Figure 6--80 eDRX module
6.2.37 Replacement of an external alarm primary lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 2 hours 30 minutes (for 20 lightning protectors).
Tools required
One tubular socket wrench
One flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The external alarm primary lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit.
6--226
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
If not done yet, open the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
3 Removal of a lightning protector
a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector and mark them
(see Figure 6--81).
b. Undo the ground nut.
c. Remove a lightning protector.
4 Reinsertion of a lightning protector
a. Insert a new lightning protector (see Figure 6--81).
b. Tighten the ground nut.
c. Reconnect the two wires, following the marks made on them beforehand.
Close the plinth or the kit according to the site configuration.
Two wires
Ground
connection
Ground nut
Figure 6--81 View of the external alarm primary lightning protectors of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--228
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.38 Replacement of the external alarm secondary lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
Lightning protectors -- A0666945
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 15 minutes (full configuration).
Tools required
One screwdriver for recessed--head screws
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The external alarm secondary lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
3 Removal of the external alarm secondary lightning protector
If there is one board (see Figure 6--82).
i. Undo the four screws of the board.
ii. Undo the two screws of the connector no.1.
iii. Remove the two connectors no.2.
iv. Undo the ground screw.
v. Remove the board.
If there are two boards.
i. Undo the four screws of the board.
ii. Undo the two screws of the connector no.1.
iii. Remove the two connectors no.2.
iv. Undo the ground screw.
v. Remove the board.
vi. Do the five precedent operations for the second board.
4 Reinsertion of the external alarm secondary lightning protector
If there is one board (see Figure 6--82).
i. Install the new board.
ii. Connect the two connectors no.2.
iii. Tighten the ground screw.
iv. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.1.
v. Tighten the four screws of the board.
6--230
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
NORTEL
Ground
screw
Screws of
the board
Board
Two screws of
the connect no.1
Two connectors no.2
Figure 6--82 View of the external alarm secondary lightning protector of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
If there are two boards.
i. Install the new board.
ii. Connect the two connectors no.2.
iii. Tighten the ground screw.
iv. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.1.
v. Tighten the four screws of the board.
vi. Do the five precedent operations for the second board.
6--232
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.39 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA36GA
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA36GA
CPC code: A0758428
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes per string.
Tools required
Wrench
Location
The external batteries are located on Figure 2--26.
None, provided the BTS remains powered from the mains.
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
The S8000 battery cabinet remains supplied with the mains power
supply.
The operational state of the btsSiteManager object is enabled.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
DANGER
Danger of explosion if the batteries are incorrectly replaced.
CAUTION
The four batteries must be identical (brand, date--code,
reference number--NMC). So the whole set must be replaced.
Replace the batteries only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer
instructions.
a. Open the battery cabinet door.
b. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet, in the O
position.
6--234
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DANGER
Electric shock
Be careful: even if the batteries are powered off, they always supply
--48 V.
3 Removal of the external batteries
a. Remove the four clamps (see Figure 6--83).
b. Identify cables no.1 to no.8.
c. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, both cables no.1, both cables
no.2, both cables no.3, both cables no.4, and then the cables no.5, no.6, no.7
and no.8.
d. For each battery (see Figure 6--83):
i. Unscrew nut no.2, which connects the black cable located on the left side
of the cabinet.
ii. Unscrew the nut no.1, which connects the blue cable located on the right
side of the cabinet.
e. Remove the four batteries.
4 Reinsertion of the external batteries
a. Place the new batteries in the cabinet.
b. For each battery:
i. Screw nut no. 1, which connects the blue cable located on the right side of
the cabinet.
ii. Screw nut no. 2 which connects the black cable located on the left side of
the cabinet.
iii. Connect, imperatively in the following order, the inter--battery cables no. 8,
no. 7, no. 6 and no. 5 and then both cables no. 4, both cables no. 3, both
cables no. 2, both cables no. 1.
c. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, located at the bottom of the cabinet, in the I position.
b. Close the cabinet door.
DC
Climatic unit
AC
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Nut no.1
Wires no.1
Nut no.2
Black
Terminal
DC
breaker
HVU
breaker
Blue
Terminal
AC breaker
Clamps
Plinth
Wires no.2
Wires no.3
Wires no.4
Wire no.5
Wire no.6
Wire no.7
Wire no.8
6--236
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.40 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA92BB (SBS 60)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA92BB
CPC code: A0809687
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 30 minutes per string.
Tools required
Wrench
Location
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
supply.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
DANGER
CAUTION
instructions.
position.
6--238
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DANGER
Electric shock
--48 V.
a. Identify cables no.1 to no.8 and cables no.1 bis to no.4 bis.
b. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, cables no.1 and no.1 bis, cables
no.2 and no.2 bis, cables no.3 and no.3 bis, cables no.4 and no.4 bis, and then
cables no.5, no.6, no.7 and no.8.
c. Remove the four clamps (See Figure 6--84).
d. For each battery:
i. Unscrew nut no.2, which connects the blue cable located on the left side
of the cabinet.
ii. Unscrew nut no.1, which connects the black cable located at the right side
of the cabinet.
e. Remove the the four batteries.
4 Insertion of the new external batteries
b. For each battery.
i. Screw nut no.1, which connects the black cable located at the right side of
the cabinet.
ii. Screwnut no.2, which connects the blue cable located at the left side of the
cabinet.
c. Connect, imperatively in the following order, cables no.8, no.7, no.6, no.5, and
then cables no.4 and no.4 bis, cables no.3 and no.3 bis, cables no.2 and no.2
bis, and cables no.1 and no.1 bis.
d. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet, in the I
position.
DC
box
Nuts no. 2
Plinth
Nut no. 1
Clamp
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 5 1 bis
2 6 2 bis
3 7 3 bis
4 8 4 bis
Blue cable
Black cable
Figure 6--84 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS 60 batteries)
6--240
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.41 Replacement of the external batteries NTQA92EA (SBS C11)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA92EA
CPC code: A0809688
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately one hour per string.
Tools required
Wrench
Location
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
supply.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
DANGER
CAUTION
instructions.
position.
6--242
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DANGER
Electric shock
--48 V.
a. Identify straps no.1 to no.8, and straps no.1 bis to no.4 bis.
b. disconnect, imperatively in the following order, straps no.1 and no.1 bis, straps
no.2 and no.2 bis, straps no.3 and no.3 bis, straps no.4 and no.4 bis, and then
straps no.5, no.6, no.7 and no.8.
c. Remove the four clamps (see Figure 6--85).
d. For each battery:
i. Disconnect lug no.2, which connects the blue cable located on the left side
of the cabinet.
ii. Disconnect lug no.1, which connects the black cable located on the right
side of the cabinet.
e. Remove the four batteries.
4 Insertion of the new external batteries
b. For each battery:
i. Connect lug no.1, which connects the black cable located on the right side
of the cabinet.
ii. Connect lug no.2, which connects the blue cable located on the left side of
the cabinet.
iii. Connect, imperatively in the following order, straps no.8, no.7, no.6, no.5,
and then straps no.4 and no.4 bis, straps no.3 and no.3 bis, straps no.2 and
no.2 bis, and straps no.1 and no.1 bis.
c. Replace the four clamps.
a. Put the breakers, which are located at the bottom of the cabinet, in the I
position.
DC
box
Plinth
DC breaker
AC box
AC breaker
1 1 bis 5
2 2 bis 6
3 3 bis 7
4 4 bis 8
Strap
Black cable
Blue cable
Lug no. 2
Clamp
Lug no. 1
Figure 6--85 External battery cabinet of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (SBS C11 batteries)
6--244
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.42 Replacement of the external battery circuit breaker (Battery cabinet
NTQA36AA)
Product reference
Breaker CPC Code
DC Breaker (90A) A0791366
AC Breaker (15A) A0682963
Tools required
Screwdriver
Wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains power supply.
Location
The external battery circuit breaker is located on Figure 2--26.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Put the external battery circuit breaker in the O position (see Figure 6--86).
b. Switch off the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
3 Removal of the external battery circuit breaker
a. Locate and insulate the external battery cables.
b. Remove the four screws from the plastic cover on the same side as the black
cable.
c. Remove the no.1 screw from the black cable.
d. Removethefour screws fromtheplastic cover onthesamesideasthebluewire.
e. Remove the no.2 screw fastening the blue cable.
f. Remove the two no.1 hexagonal screws on the DC drawer.
g. Remove the DC drawer.
h. Remove the four no.2 hexagonal screws fastening the circuit breaker.
i. Locate the cables (see Figure 6--87).
j. Remove the four nuts.
k. Disconnect the cables.
l. Remove the circuit breaker.
6--246
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
4 Reinsertion of the external battery circuit breaker
a. Connect the external battery cables to the circuit breaker.
b. Tighten the four screws at the back of the circuit breaker.
c. Insert the circuit breaker in its slot.
d. Tighten the four no.2 hexagonal screws from the front of the circuit breaker.
e. Insert the DC drawer.
f. Tighten the two no.1 hexagonal screws on the DC drawer.
g. Connect the no.2 blue cable.
h. Tighten the four screws on the plastic cover on the same side as the blue wire.
i. Connect the no.1 black cable.
j. Tighten the four screws on the plastic cover on the same side as the black wire.
a. Check the following circuit breakers are in the I position:
PA
F converters
BCF and PSCMD converters
PCU and rectifier
b. Check the climatic system circuit breaker is in the I position.
c. Switch on the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
d. Put the external battery circuit breaker in the I position.
DC
Climatic unit
AC
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Battery compartment
Nut no.1
Wires no.1
Nut no.2
Black
Terminal
DC
breaker
HVU
breaker
Blue
Terminal
AC breaker
Clamps
Plinth
Wires no.2
Wires no.3
Wires no.4
Wire no.5
Wire no.6
Wire no.7
Wire no.8
Figure 6--86 External battery cabinet NTQA36AA of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
(NTQA36GA batteries)
6--248
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Nut Alarm wire
Figure 6--87 External battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.43 Replacement of the DC breaker (battery cabinet)
Product reference
CPC code: A0791366
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Hexagonal Wrench
None as far as there is no AC power cut.
Location
See Figure 6--88 to locate the DC breaker.
Warning
DANGER
Electric shock
6--250
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
a. Put the battery cabinet DC breaker in the 0 position.
b. Put the battery cabinet AC breaker in the 0 position.
c. Disconnect and insulate the blue wire from each battery stack.
2 Exchange of the DC breaker
a. Unscrew the panel holding the circuit breaker (3 cross--head screws). Then,
unscrew the breaker itself (2 smaller cross--head screws).
b. Disconnect the DC cables two by two (one black an one blue at the same time)
from the faulty breaker and reconnect them the same way to the new breaker.
c. Disconnect both alarmwires and reconnect themidentically to the newbreaker.
d. Screw the breaker to its holding panel and then, screwthe panel to the cabinet.
e. Check the new battery circuit breaker is in the 0 position.
a. Reconnect the blue wires to each battery stack.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals must be 3.9 N.m.
b. Put the battery cabinet AC breaker in the I position.
c. Put the battery cabinet DC breaker in the I position.
DC
box
AC breaker
Plinth
DC breaker
AC box
Blue wire
Figure 6--88 DC breaker of the battery cabinet
6--252
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.44 Replacement of the fan filter (S8000 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA6550
CPC code: A0680258
Intervention time
Tools required
Cross--head screwdrivers
DANGER
Electric shock
The cabinet remains supplied with the mains power supply.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Push down or up the two locks of the fan unit (see Figure 6--89).
b. Remove the cover.
3 Removal of a fan filter
a. Undo the two right screws (see Figure 6--89).
b. Slide the fan filter and the retainer towards the right.
c. Remove the retainer.
d. Remove the fan filter.
4 Reinsertion of a fan filter
a. Reinsert the new fan filter on the right side (see Figure 6--89).
b. Slide the fan filter towards the left.
c. Insert the retainer.
d. Tighten the two screws.
a. Reinsert the cover.
b. Push the cover.
6--254
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Filter
Retainer
Screws
Figure 6--89 View of the fan filter of the S8000 Indoor BTS
6.2.45 Replacement of an F--type converter
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA57AA
CPC code: A0651999
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
The F--type converters are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--6, Figure 2--30 and
Figure 2--36.
The F--type converters are located on Figure 2--45.
6--256
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
b. Put the switch of the F--type converter in the O position.
3 Removal of a F--type converter
a. Disconnect all the cables on the front panel of the F--type converter.
b. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the F--type converter (see
Figure 6--90).
c. Extract the F--type converter with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a F--type converter
a. Insert the F--type converter into the cabinet.
c. Reconnect all the cables.
Put the switch of the F--type converter in the I position.
Test points
LEDs
Switch
Power in
Power
out/alarms
Screws
--15V
--15V
0V
+15V
+15V
I
O
Figure 6--90 F--type converter
6--258
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.46 Replacement of a ground fault interrupter (S8000 Outdoor BTS with
AC mains box)
Product reference
Single--phase AC Box NTQA90BA
NTQA90BB
A0772600
Single--phase AC Box NTQA90BC
NTQA90BE
A0736729
Tri--phase AC Box NTQA90CA
NTQA90CB
NTQA90CC
NTQA90CD
NTQA90FA
A0682000
Single--phase AC Box NTQA90AA
NTQA90AB
NTQA90AC
A0693143
CPC codes:
A0772600 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90BA and NTQA90BB
A0736729 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90BC and NTQA90BE
A0682000 for the tri--phase AC box NTQA90CA, NTQA90CB, NTQA90CC, NTQA90CD,
and NTQA90FA
A0693143 for the single--phase AC box NTQA90AA, NTQA90AB, and NTQA90AC
Intervention time
Tools required
10mm torque wrench
Flat screwdrivers
CAUTION
The operationalState of the btsSiteManager object is disabled.
Location
The ground fault interrupter is located inside the AC box.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
For a single--phase mains power supply, perform the following actions.
ii. Switch off the main circuit breaker.
For a tri--phase mains power supply, perform the following actions.
3 Open the AC box
For a single--phase AC box, perform the following actions.
i. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box.
ii. Disconnect the rectifier cable.
iii. Undo the seven or eight securing screws on the AC box side and remove
the small cover (see Figure 6--91).
iv. Disconnect the input AC cable by unscrewing the screws no.4 on the
terminal block.
Remove the input AC cable gland by unscrewing the large nut (see
Figure 6--91).
6--260
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
v. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the ACbox top and on the
AC box front panel.
vi. Disconnect the ground cable by removing the nut.
vii. Remove the AC box.
viii. Undo the sixteen screws on the left side cover of the AC box (see
Figure 6--93) and remove the big cover.
i. Disconnect the alarm cable located on top of the tri--phase AC box.
ii. Disconnect the rectifier cable.
iii. Undo the seven or eight securing screws on the box side and remove the
small cover.
iv. Locate the following wires:
three phases
neutral ground
ground
v. Make a note of the wire positions.
vi. Locate the four lightning protector wires.
vii. Disconnect the four lightning protector wires.
viii. Disconnect the AC input cable gland by removing the four nuts on the filter
and the nut on the ground terminal.
ix. Remove the input cable gland by unscrewing the large nut.
x. Undo the two securing screws no.1 and no.2 on the ACbox top and on the
AC box front panel (see Figure 6--92).
xi. Disconnect the ground cable by removing the nut.
xii. Remove the AC box.
xiii. Undo all the screws on the left side cover of the ACbox and remove the big
cover.
4 Removal of a ground fault interrupter
i. Mark and disconnect the four wires by undoing the four screws.
ii. Undo the two nuts of the ground fault interrupter (see Figure 6--93).
iii. Remove the ground fault interrupter.
i. Unscrewthetwo front screws no.1of theservice socket circuit breaker (see
Figure 6--95).
ii. Identify each lead and disconnect the cables.
iii. Unscrew the two screws no.2 of the DIN rail.
iv. Remove the ground fault interrupter.
5 Reinsertion of a ground fault interrupter
i. Insert the ground fault interrupter.
ii. Tighten the two nuts.
iii. Reconnect the four wires by tightening the four screws, following the marks
made on them beforehand.
i. Insert the ground fault interrupter.
ii. Tighten the two screws no.2 of the DIN rail.
iii. Tighten the two front screws no.1 of the mains connector circuit breaker.
6--262
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable
C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Main breaker
Figure 6--91 Single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Seven or eight
screws
Large nut
Battery circuit
breaker
Alarm cable
Rectifier
cable
Screw no. 2
Ground cable
Screw no. 1
General stop
button
Figure 6--92 Tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--264
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Nut
Wire
Ground fault
interrupter
Figure 6--93 View of the ground fault interrupter of the single--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Ground fault
interrupter
Electrical outlet
no. 1
Electrical outlet
no. 2
Electrical outlet
circuit breaker
Figure 6--94 View of the ground fault interrupter of the tri--phase AC box of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--266
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DIN rail
Screws
no. 2
Screws
no. 1
Figure 6--95 Internal and external views of the tri--phase ground fault interrupter of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6 Close the AC box
a. Insert the big cover.
b. Tighten the sixteen screws on the AC box side.
c. Push the AC box.
d. Install the input AC cable gland and tighten the large nut. Connect the input AC
cable on the terminal block and the ground connection (see Figure 6--91).
e. Connect the rectifier cable.
f. Connect the ground cable with the nut.
g. Connect the alarm cable on the AC box.
h. Insert the little cover.
i. Tighten the seven or eight screws on the AC box side.
j. Tighten the two screws no.1 and no.2 on the ACbox top and on the ACbox front
panel.
Ensure the power supplies of the cabinet are put into service in the following order:
a. Check the main breaker of the single--phase AC box is set to the O position
or the general stop button is switched off.
b. Check the switches of the following modules are set to the I position:
PAs
F power supplies
BCF power supplies and PSCMD
PCU
Rectifiers
c. Check the circuit breakers of the climatic unit are set to the I position.
d. Check the circuit breaker of the rectifiers is set to the I position.
e. Put the main breaker of the single--phase AC box in the I position or put the
electrical outlet breaker of the tri--phase AC box in the I position.
f. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
g. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
6--268
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.47 Repair or replacement of the hood gasket (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
6.2.47.1 Repair of the hood gasket (procedure applicable on site and in the warehouse)
Tools required
Glue LOCTITE 454
Impact of the replacement on the service
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The hood gasket is located on Figure 6--96.
Repair
Inject a spot of glue LOCTITE 454 on the gasket every about 2 cm.
Put in place the gasket and press on each sport of glue with the finger for a least ten
seconds.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
Close the hood.
6.2.47.2 Replacement of the hood gasket
Product reference
CPC codes:
Environmental gasket: R0117842
ACU exhaust gasket: P0870315 (two per cabinet)
EMI gaskets for the bulkheads: R0117841
Tools required
Lint free cloth
Knife
Quick set adhesive Permabond 105
Roller hand 3/4 wide 60 durometer
Safety glasses
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The hood gasket is located on Figure 6--96.
Intervention time
6--270
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Door gasket
Hood gasket
Figure 6--96 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the ACUs
Door gasket
Figure 6--97 View of the gaskets of the S8000 Outdoor BTS with the DACS
6--272
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
If not done yet, open the doors or the hood.
3 Removal of a gasket
a. Remove the old gasket from the aluminum surface (see Figure 6--96
and Figure 6--97).
DANGER
i. Use a lint freecloth applicator moistened withsolvents MEKor AcetoneIPA
to wash the aluminum surface until the pressure sensitive adhesive is
removed.
c. Determine the length of the gasket required and cut it with a knife tothe sizewith
a 45 angle at each extremity.
4 Reinsertion of a gasket
a. Remove the release liner three to four inches at a time.
b. Put the gasket adhesive in place by pressing firmly on the surface
c. Roll the gasket with a moderate pressure to glue it with a rubber roller 3/4 wide.
d. Repeat the last operation but this time with enough force to collapse the D
portion of the gasket. This pressure will ensure a full contact of the pressure
sensitive adhesive to the aluminum surface.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Ensure the alignment of the roller to the top of the gasket surface.
This rolling of the gasket shall be done at least two times on the
entire length of the gasket.
e. Achieve a full adhesive strength of the bond within 12 hours.
f. Join the corners by using a quick set adhesive (Permabond 105).
g. Inspect visually if the unbounded areas of the gasket are remaining.
h. Close the doors one by one and check visually if the gasket compression is
correct everywhere.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
Close the doors or the hood.
6--274
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.48 Replacement of the internal batteries (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA36FA
CPC code: A0758427
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 20 minutes for each battery.
Tools required
Stepladder
Wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
CAUTION
However, if the AC box breaks down during the replacement, the
service is lost.
Location
The internal batteries are located on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
DANGER
CAUTION
instructions.
a. Put the battery circuit breaker of the AC mains box or of the DCU of the GIPS
in the OFF position.
b. Lift the hood.
DANGER
Electric shock
Be careful: even if the batteries are powered--off, they always
supply --48V.
6--276
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3 Removal of the internal batteries
a. Lift the cover and tie it on the hood with the safety cable.
b. Take care to mark the cables before and isolate them with the safety cable.
c. For each battery located in the upper cabinet compartment (see Figure 6--98),
i. Unscrew the nut no.1 connecting the black cable and the gray cable.
ii. Unscrew the nut no.2 connecting the blue cable.
iii. Unscrew the nuts no.3 connecting the black cables.
iv. Grasp the battery using front and behind module edges.
v. Remove the battery from its compartment.
d. Remove the four batteries.
4 Reinsertion of the internal batteries
a. Place the new batteries.
b. For each battery, perform the following actions.
i. Screw the nuts connecting the black cables.
ii. Screw the nut connecting the blue cable.
iii. Screw the nut connecting the black cable and the gray cable.
c. Untie the cover from the hood and push it down.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Push the hood down.
b. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
Cover
Black cable
Nut n 2
Nut n 1
Nut n 3
Blue cable Black cable
Probe (gray cable)
Top view
Figure 6--98 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--278
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.49 Replacement of the internal battery circuit breaker
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0682059
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately one hour.
Tools required
Screwdriver
Wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The internal battery circuit breaker is located on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. At the OMC--R, set the administrativeState of the btsSiteManager object to
shuttingDown.
b. Put the battery circuit breaker of the AC mains box or of the ADU of the GIPS
in the OFF position.
c. Switch off the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
d. Lift the cabinet hood (see Figure 6--99).
e. Lift the battery cover and tie it to the cabinet hood with the safety cable.
f. Locate and insulate the battery cables.
g. Disconnect the battery cables.
h. Remove the no.1 nut fastening the black cable and the gray cable.
i. Remove the no.2 nut fastening the blue cable.
3 Removal of the internal battery circuit breaker
a. For the GIPS, in case of internal battery circuit breaker failure, replace the GIPS
rack (refer to paragraph)
Otherwise, perform the following actions.
b. Remove the six screws from the panel allowing access to the circuit breaker.
c. Remove the two screws fromthe front of the circuit breaker (see Figure 6--100).
d. Pull the top of the panel forward.
e. Identify the power cables.
f. Remove the four nuts.
g. Disconnect the power cables.
h. Disconnect the alarm wires.
i. Remove the circuit breaker.
4 Reinsertion of the internal battery circuit breaker
a. Obtain a new circuit breaker.
b. Tighten the two screws on the front of the new circuit breaker.
c. Connect the four power cables.
d. Tighten the four nuts.
e. Connect the alarm wires.
6--280
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
f. Place the circuit breaker panel in its slot.
g. Tighten the six screws on the panel where the circuit breaker is located.
Nut no.2
6 Nuts no.3
Nut no.1
Cover
Figure 6--99 Internal batteries of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--282
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw
Nut Alarm wire
Figure 6--100 Internal battery circuit breaker of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals must be 3.9 N--m.
CAUTION
paragraph 5.2.2.
a. Tighten the no.1 nut attaching the black cable and the gray cables.
b. Tighten the no.2 nut fastening the blue cable.
c. Untie the cover from the hood and close it.
d. Close the cabinet hood.
e. Check all the switches of the following modules are in the I position:
rectifiers
FAN supply on the PCU or DACS supply on the DCU
PA supply on the PCU or on the DCU
F--type converters
DRX supply on the PCU or on the DCU
BCF supply on the PCU or on the DCU
BCF power supplies and PSCMD board, if any
f. Check the PAswitches are in I position or connect the power cables of the PAs
to the PA--ICO.
g. Check the climatic system circuit breaker of the AC mains box or of the ADUof
the GIPS is in the ON position.
h. Switch on the cabinet power supply from the operator box.
6--284
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the BTS in the OFF position.
j. At the OMC--R, set the administrativeState of the btsSiteManager object to
unlocked.
6.2.50 Replacement of the lightning protectors of the 48 V box
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0671776
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The lightning protectors of the 48 V box are located at the plinth or the kit according to the
site configuration.
6--286
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Disconnect the two wires of a lightning protector and mark them
(see Figure 6--101).
b. Undo the ground nut.
c. Remove a lightning protector.
a. Insert a new lightning protector.
Figure 6--101 View of the 48 V box lightning protector of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--288
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.51 Replacement of a PCM lightning protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC code: A0666945
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 20 minutes (for 12 lightning protectors).
Tools required
One tubular socket wrench
One flat screwdriver
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The PCM lightning protectors are located at the plinth or the kit.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Disconnect the two wires of the lightning protector and mark them
b. Unscrew the ground nut.
c. Remove the lightning protector.
a. Insert the new lightning protector (see Figure 6--102).
6--290
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Two wires
Ground
connection
Ground nut
Figure 6--102 View of the PCM lightning protectors of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.52 Replacement of the AC lightning protector (battery cabinet)
Product reference
CPC code: A0773606 (phase plug--in protection module)
CPC code: A0773608 (neutral plug--in protection module)
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
Location
See Figure 6--103 to locate the battery cabinet AC box.
Warning
CAUTION
6--292
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
a. Check the battery cabinet DC breaker is in the I position.
b. Switch off the mains at the battery cabinet level (AC breaker to 0).
c. Switch off the mains (battery cabinet breaker only) at the operator box level.
2 Opening of the AC box
3 Exchange of the lightning protection module(s)
a. Unplug the dead module(s).
b. Plug instead the new one(s).
4 Closing of the c--AC box
Screw back the cover.
a. Switch on the mains at the operator box level.
b. Switch on the mains at the battery cabinet level (AC breaker).
Figure 6--103 Internal view of the AC box (battery cabinet)
6--294
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.53 Replacement of a power amplifier (PA) module
PA for GSM 900 NTQA50PA A0659885
PA for GSM (GSM--R and
900)
NTQA50PB A0724497
PA for GSM--R NTQA50PC
NTQA80PD
A0800537
A0835133
PA for GSM 1800 NTQA50HA
NTQA50HB
A0655060
A0800541
PA for GSM 1900 NTQA50BA
NTQA50DA
NTQA50DB
A0729151
A0790178
A0806545
ePA for GSM 900 NTQA50EA A0845798
ePA for GSM 1800 NTQA50FA A0875359
ePA for GSM 1900 NTQA50GA A0845800
HePA for GSM 1900 NTQA50RA A0898263
HePA for GSM 900 NTQA50SA N0001950
ePA for GSM 850 NTQA37AA A0867496
PA module for GSM--R NTQA50PC
NTQA50PD
A0800537
A0835133
ePA for GSM 900 NTQA10HA A0666906
HePA for GSM 900 NTQA50SA N0001950
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
0.7N--m 0.1 SMA torque wrench
1.5N--m 0.1 N torque wrench
CAUTION
The service is reduced.
However, the service is lost in the case of a configuration O1.
Thepower amplifiers arelocatedonFigure 2--5, Figure 2--6, Figure 2--30, andFigure 2--36.
The power amplifiers are located on Figure 2--45.
Identification of the PA type
At the OMC--R, identify the type of the faulty power amplifier (PA, ePA or HePA). The type
of the faulty power amplifier determines the type that should be used to replace it:
Faulty amplifier type Replacement amplifier type
PA PA, ePA
ePA PA, ePA
HePA HePA
The replacement of a PA/ePA with a HePA is an upgrade of the configuration, not a
maintenance operation. If you want to make such a replacement, you must refer to the
relevant upgrade documentation.
Procedure
Step Action
6--296
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
b. If incomplete, set the transceiverEquipment object associated with the faulty
DRX to locked at the OMC--R.
c. Disconnect the PA power supply:
For theType--1PA: put thePOWER switchof thePAin theO position(see
Figure 6--104 according to the face plate).
For the Type--2 PA: unplug the PS cable of the PA (PA side) (see
Figure 6--105).
d. Disconnect, imperatively in the following order, the coaxial cables and the
connectors on the front panel:
i. the POWER IN power lead (cable on the PA INTERCO panel first, then
the PA or ePA)
ii. then the DATA I/0, TX--in, TX--out cables and connectors
3 Removal a power amplifier
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the power amplifier
(see Figure 6--104 or Figure 6--105).
b. Extract the power amplifier with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of a power amplifier
a. Check the hardware version number of the element according to the current
release of the system.
b. Before putting the power amplifier in place, check the DC power cable is above
the PCM link.
c. Insert the power amplifier into the cabinet.
d. Tighten the four fixing screws.
D
A
T
A
I
/
O
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
I O
P
O
W
E
R
R
F
O
U
T
R
F
S
A
M
P
L
E
R
F
I
N
F
U
S
E
1
0
A
Note: In the S8000 Indoor BTS, the front panel is inverted
compared to the figure presented
F1 Fuse
10A
250V time delay
Figure 6--104 Power amplifier (type 1)
6--298
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
D
A
T
A
I
/
O
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
R
F
O
U
T
R
F
I
N
Figure 6--105 Power amplifier (type 2)
D
A
T
A
I
/
O
P
O
W
E
R
I
N
R
F
O
U
T
R
F
I
N
Figure 6--106 High Power Amplifier (HePA)
6--300
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Reconnect, imperatively in the following order, the coaxial cables and the
connectors on the front panel:
i. the DATA I/O, RF IN, RF OUT cables and connectors
ii. and last, the POWER IN power lead (cable on the PA or ePA first, then
on the PA INTERCO panel)
CAUTION
Tightening torques
Thetighteningtorqueof theterminal RFIN must be0.7N--m0.1.
Use the 8--mm SMA torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal RF OUT must be 1.5 N--m
0.1. Use the 19--mm N torque wrench.
b. Connect the PA power supply:
For the Type--1 PA: put the POWER switch of the PAin the I position (see
For theType--2PA: plugthePScableof thePA(PAside) (seeFigure 6--105).
c. Reset the corresponding DRX with its reset button (see Figure 6--79 and
Figure 6--80).
d. Set the transceiverEquipment object to unlocked at the OMC--R.
e. Ensure that the OMC--Rparameter bsTxPwrMax has the correct value for the
amplifier type that you have installed:
PA: bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
ePA: bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
HePA (mixed configuration with (e)PAs in a normal cell):
bsTxPwrMax <= 30W
HePA (other configurations): bsTxPwrMax <= 60W
6.2.54 Replacement of the power supply rack of the seven--rectifier type
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NT5C90AO
CPC code: B0252521
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
The service is lost for 4 hours.
Location
Thepower supply rack is locatedinthesystemcompartment onFigure 2--5andFigure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
If the mains power supply is the single--phase or split single--phase one,
If the mains power supply is the tri--phase one, perform the following actions.
6--302
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
3 Removal of the power supply rack
a. Disconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
b. Disconnect the battery cables.
c. Disconnect the rectifier cable from the AC box.
d. Open the front panel by unscrewing the two screws (Figure 6--107).
e. Remove each rectifier as described in Paragraph 6.2.56.
f. Remove the cover of the distribution module.
g. Before disconnecting the ground and battery cables (blue and black), take care
to mark them.
h. Disconnect the ground and battery cables by unscrewing the screw no.1 and
no.3.
i. Disconnect the cable Probe 2.
j. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the battery circuit
breaker.
k. Unscrew the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
l. Remove the front panel.
m. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
n. Push the battery circuit breaker.
o. Take care to mark the four vertical wires and the five horizontal wires and
unscrew them.
p. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel.
q. Move forward the panel lightly.
r. Undo the two fixing screws no.1 and disconnect the battery lugs
s. Before disconnecting the eight DC power cables from the distribution module,
take care to mark them.
t. Unscrew the eight fixing screws no.2 and disconnect the cables.
u. Remove the power supply rack.
4 Reinsertion of the power supply rack
a. Insert the power supply rack in the cabinet.
b. Reconnect the DCpower cables on the distribution module and tighten the eight
screws no.2.
c. Reconnect the battery lugs and tighten the two screws no.1.
d. Screw the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel.
e. Reinsert the DRXs removed as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
f. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
g. Tighten the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
h. Tighten the six screws which holds the battery circuit breaker.
i. Connect the cable Probe 2.
j. Put the cover of the distribution module.
k. Close the front panel of the power supply rack and tighten the two screws.
l. Reconnect the rectifier cable on the AC box.
m. Reconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
i. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
ii. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
i. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
6--304
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
RECT #1 RECT #2
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
RECT #3 RECT #4 RECT #5 RECT #6 RECT #7
LVD
BOD
FA
LV
HI CUR
CTRL
THSD
TP (VOLT)
TP (0.025V/AMP)
TP (COM)
+
--
L1
+
--
L2
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
1
2
65A load
Distribution
Module
7 x (500W Rectifier) Controller
Module
AC cable Screws
HELIOS
Figure 6--107 Power supply rack (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Cover
Screw
no. 1
Screw
no. 2
Screw
no. 1
Screw
no. 2
6--306
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
O
F
F
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
TB1
1 2
MODE
SW1
C1
E1
E3
E10
B
A
T
--
B
A
T
+
L
O
A
D
R
E
T
U
R
N
(
+
)
Load 1
Test points
Load 2
Test points
Screw no. 1
Battery (--)
Screw no. 1
Battery (+)
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output
returns
Screw no. 3
Ground
Screw
no. 2
(--)
Screw
no. 2
(+)
Figure 6--109 Top view of the PCU (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.55 Replacement of the power supply rack of the six--rectifier type
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA9101
CPC code: A0651996
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 3 hours.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
Location
Thepower supply rack is locatedinthesystemcompartment onFigure 2--5andFigure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
6--308
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Disconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
b. Disconnect the cables from the batteries.
c. Disconnect the rectifier cable from the AC box.
d. Remove each rectifier as described in Paragraph 6.2.57.
e. Before disconnecting the battery cables (blue and black), take care to mark
them.
f. Disconnect the ground cable and the battery cables.
g. Unscrew the two fixing screws no.1 and disconnect the battery lugs
h. Unscrew the fixing screw for the cable Probe 2.
i. Unscrew the six fixing screws no.2 on the front panel which holds the battery
circuit breaker.
j. Unscrew the two fixing screws of the battery circuit breaker.
k. Remove the front panel.
l. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
m. Push the battery circuit breaker.
n. From the top of the power supply rack, disconnect the eight cables of the PCU,
taking care to mark them (see Figure 6--114).
o. Unscrew the eight screws, fixing the cables.
p. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel and pull it lightly.
q. Disconnect the two D--sub connectors.
r. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the power supply rack.
s. Remove the two fillers.
t. Disconnect the Abis board.
u. Remove the power supply rack.
4 Reinsertion of the power supply rack
a. Insert the power supply rack in the cabinet.
b. Put the fillers in their place.
c. Screw the four fixing screws of the power supply rack.
d. Connect the Abis board.
e. Connect the two D--sub connectors.
f. Screw the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel.
g. Reinsert the DRXs as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
h. Screw the two screws of the battery circuit breaker.
i. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker (see Figure 6--112).
j. Tighten the six fixing screws no.2.
k. Screw the ground and battery cables.
l. Reconnect the cable Probe 2.
m. Insert all the rectifiers.
n. Reconnect the rectifier cable on the AC box.
o. Reconnect the battery cables.
p. Reconnect the mains power supply on the operator box.
i. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
i. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
6--310
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
1
J4
J5
Figure 6--110 Power supply rack (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)
1
J4
J5
6--312
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw no. 1
Screw no. 2
Battery cable
Ground cable
Front panel with
battery circuit breaker
Screw no. 1
Screw no. 2
Battery cable
Ground cable
Front panel with
battery circuit breaker
6--314
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
L1
L2
L3
L4
BCF output
Figure 6--114 Top view of the PCU (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)
L1
L2
L3
L4
BCF output
Figure 6--115 Top view of the PCU (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 2)
6--316
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.56 Replacement of a rectifier of the seven-- rectifier type (500W rectifier
module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NT5C15BC
CPC code: A0638313
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
Open the front panel of the power supply rack by unscrewing the two screws
3 Removal of a rectifier
Extract the failed rectifier and remove it (see Figure 6--117).
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
RECT #1 RECT #2
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
PWR ON/RFA
AC fail
RECT #3 RECT #4 RECT #5 RECT #6 RECT #7
LVD
BOD
FA
LV
HI CUR
CTRL
THSD
TP (VOLT)
TP (0.025V/AMP)
TP (COM)
+
--
L1
+
--
L2
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
1
2
65A load
Distribution
Module
7 x (500W Rectifier) Controller
Module
AC cable Screws
HELIOS
6--318
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
PCU
cover
Screw
no. 1
Screw
no. 2
Screw
no. 1
Screw
no. 2
Figure 6--117 Rectifier (seven--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
4 Reinsertion of a rectifier
Insert the new rectifier into the rack and push it .
Close the front panel of the power supply rack and tighten the two screws.
6--320
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.57 Replacement of a rectifier of the six--rectifier type (600W rectifier
module) (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA91AA
CPC code: A0651991
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 2--5 and Figure 2--6.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
On the front panel of the failed rectifier, put the switch of the faulty rectifier in the
O position.
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of the rectifier (see Figure 6--118).
b. Extract the rectifier with the extraction tool and remove it.
Screws
AL
ON
Figure 6--118 Rectifier (six--rectifier type) of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (type 1)
6--322
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Insert therectifier withits switchinO position, intothecabinet andput it inplace
by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
Put the switch of the rectifier in the I position.
6.2.58 Replacement of the GIPS (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code:
GIPS with ADU: NTQA9108
GIPS without ADU: NTQA9109
CPC code:
GIPS with ADU: A0996401
GIPS without ADU: A0517945
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately 3 hours.
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
CAUTION
Location
The power supply rack is located on Figure 2--2.
Procedure
Step Action
6--324
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
ii. Put the BTS site circuit breaker in the O position.
a. Disconnect the cables from the batteries.
b. Disconnect the AC main cable from the AC box.
c. Remove the ADU of the GIPS (refer to Paragraph 6.2.60).
d. Remove each rectifier as described in Paragraph 6.2.59.
e. Before disconnecting the battery cables (blue and black), take care to mark
them.
f. Disconnect the ground cable and the battery cables above the DCU.
g. Unscrew the two fixing screws and disconnect the battery lugs.
h. Disconnect the cable Probe 2.
i. Remove at least the first four DRXs as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
j. From the top of the GIPS, disconnect the eight cables of the DCU, taking care
to mark them.
k. Unscrew the eight screws, fixing the cables.
l. Unscrew the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel and pull it lightly.
m. Disconnect the D--sub connector.
n. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the GIPS.
o. Remove the filler.
p. Disconnect the Abis board.
q. Remove the GIPS.
4 Reinsertion of the GIPS
a. Insert the GIPS in the cabinet.
b. Put the filler in their place.
c. Screw the four fixing screws of the GIPS.
d. Connect the Abis board.
e. Connect the D--sub connector.
f. Screw the four screws of the Rx--splitter panel.
g. Reinsert the DRXs as described in Paragraph 6.2.36.
h. From the top of the GIPS, reconnect the eight cables of the DCU.
i. Insert the panel above the GIPS.
j. Tighten the six fixing screws.
k. Screw the ground and battery cables.
l. Reconnect the cable Probe 2.
m. Insert all the rectifiers.
n. Insert the ADU of the GIPS (refer to the Paragraph 6.2.60).
o. Reconnect the AC main cable on the AC box.
p. Reconnect the battery cables.
i. Put the BTS site circuit breaker in the I position.
6--326
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--119 GIPS
Figure 6--120 View of the DCU
6--328
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.59 Replacement of a rectifier of the GIPS (680W rectifier module)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
680W rectifier NTQA91HA A0996402
rectifier filler NTQA91DA A0518068
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Pozidrive screwdriver
None.
Location
The rectifiers are located in the system compartment on Figure 2--1.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
On the front panel of the failed rectifier, put the switch of the faulty rectifier in the
O position.
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel of therectifier (seeFigure 6--122).
b. Extract the rectifier with the extraction tool and remove it.
Screw
ON
Figure 6--121 680W rectifier of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--330
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Insert therectifier withits switchinO position, intothecabinet andput it inplace
by pushing on the top and bottom edges.
Put the switch of the rectifier in the I position.
6.2.60 Replacement of the AC Distribution Unit (ADU) (S8000 Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA19AA
CPC code: A0504894
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Pozidrive screwdriver
CAUTION
The BTS does not remain supplied with the power supply.
Location
The ADU is located in the GIPS in the system compartment.
Procedure
Step Action
1 Safety instruction
CAUTION
ESDS handling precaution
6--332
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Put the three circuit breakers in the OFF position.
Disconnect the BTS site breaker.
Disconnect the mains cable from the AC box.
3 Removal of the ADU
a. Unscrew the four fixing screws of the ADU front plate.
b. Extract the ADU and insert it into the fourth rectifier slot.
c. Remove the cable clamp from the DACS cable.
d. Disconnect the DACS connector.
e. Remove the ADU.
4 Reinsertion of the ADU
a. Insert the ADU into the fourth rectifier slot.
b. Connect the DACS connector.
c. Screw the cable clamp of the DACS cable.
d. Reinsert the ADU in the ADU slot.
e. Screw the four screws of the ADU front plate.
a. Connect the mains cable into the AC box.
b. Put the three circuit breakers of the ADU in the ON position.
c. Reconnect the BTS site breaker.
Figure 6--122 View of the ADU of the GIPS
6--334
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.61 Replacement of a (CC8) remote tunable cavity combiner
(S8000 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA52SA
CPC code: A0802416
Intervention time
Tools required
19--mm N torque wrench
CAUTION
Location
The CC8 module is located on Figure 2--41.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Observe the state of the cell
b. Put the switch of the associated PA(s) in the O position or disconnect the
power cable of the PA from the PA interconnections module.
c. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.
d. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
the power cable (Power)
the coaxial cables (TX_in)
3 Removal of the cavity combiner module
a. Undo the ten fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 6--123).
b. Extract the module with the extraction tool and remove it.
4 Reinsertion of the cavity combiner module
b. Insert the cavity combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the ten fixing screws.
6--336
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables.
CAUTION
Equipment damage
Connect the following cables on the front panel:
the coaxial cables (TX_in)
the power cable (Power)
b. Put the switch of the associated PA(s) in the I position or connect the power
cable of the PA to the PA interconnections module.
c. Verify the LED is green for the power and the PCMs
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
o
u
t
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
T
X
--
i
n
L
o
c
a
l
R
S
2
3
2
R
e
m
o
t
e
P
C
M
P
o
w
e
r
T
e
s
t P
a
r
k
i
n
g
T
u
n
e
Figure 6--123 Remote tunable cavity combiner (CC8)
6--338
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.62 Replacement of a RF--combiner module (DP, H2D or H4D)
900 RF--Combiner Module Duplexer LNA:
Manufacturing Discontinued
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51SA
NTQA51VA
NTQA59BA
NTQA59AA
A0671022
A0684509
A0842529
A0842528
900 RF--Combiner Module H2D LNA:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51PA
NTQA51QA
NTQA59HA
NTQA59GA
A0659887
A0684508
A0842535
A0842534 with VSWR
AMPS CONT:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA59GA
NTQA51PB
NTQA51QB
NTQA59MA
NTQA59LA
A0842534
A0743003
A0743004
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
AMPS:
-- without VSWR costing
-- with VSWR costing
New products
-- without VSWR AMPS
-- with VSWR AMPS
NTQA52QA
NTQA52QB
NTQA59PA
NTQA59NA
NTQA52QC
NTQA52QD
NTQA59TA
NTQA59SA
A0688927
A0688930
A0842541
A0844250
A0743053
A0743054
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51KA
NTQA51MA
NTQA59DA
NTQA59CA
A0671021
A0684507
A0842531
A0842530
Equipments CPC codes PEC codes
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51HA
NTQA51JA
NTQA59KA
NTQA59JA
A0659886
A0684506
A0842537
A0842536
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA52JA
NTQA52JB
NTQA59RA
NTQA59QA
A0688926
A0688929
A0842543
A0842542
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51DA
NTQA51FA
A0671020
A0684505
1900 RF-- Combiner Module H4D LNA:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA52BA
NTQA52BB
A0688925
A0688928
1900 RF--Combiner Module H2D LNA (not
compatible with HePA)
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
1900 RF--Combiner Module H2D LNA (HePA
handling):
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51AA
NTQA51BA
NTQA38KA
NTQA38LA
A0651986
A0657058
A0501390
A0501391
-- without VSWR (Part band) SMR cositing
-- with VSWR (Part band) SMR cositing
-- without VSWR (Full band)
-- with VSWR (Full band)
NTQA38CA
NTQA38DA
NTQA38GA
NTQA38FA
A0867499
A0867500
A0998581
A0998538
-- without VSWR (Part band)
-- with VSWR (Part band)
-- without VSWR (Full band)
-- with VSWR (Full band)
NTQA38BA
NTQA38AA
NTQA38JA
NTQA38HA
A0867498
A0867497
A0998593
A0998582
850 RF--Combiner Module H4D SMR:
without VSWR
with VSWR
NTQA38NA
NTQA38MA
6--340
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Equipments CPC codes PEC codes
R--GSM RF--Combiner Module Duplexer LNA
V1:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA51XA
NTQA51XB
NTQA59FA
NTQA59EA
A0688142
A0688144
A0842533
A0842550
R--GSM DUPLEXER V2:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
-- H2D without VSWR
-- H2D with VSWR
NTQA51XC
NTQA51XD
NTQA59ZA
NTQA59YA
NTQA61BA
NTQA61AA
A0743018
A0743019
A0842551
A0842550
E--GSM H2D
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA62AA
NTQA62BA
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA59BA
NTQA59AA
A0842529
A0842528
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA59HA
NTQA59GA
A0842535
A0842534
Intervention time
Tools required
7/16 torque wrench
8--mm SMA torque wrench
CAUTION
The service is reduced: in fact, the service is lost for the calls of the
faulty RF--combiners.
The RF--combiner modules are located on Figure 2--5 to Figure 2--12 and Figure 2--30 to
Figure 2--42.
The RF--combiner modules are located on Figure 2--45.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
b. Disconnect the PA power supply:
For Power Amplifier (Type 1): put the POWER switch of the PA in the O
position (see Figure 6--104 according to the face plate).
For Power Amplifier (Type 2 ): unplug the PS cable of the PA (PA side) (see
Figure 6--105).
6--342
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
c. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.
d. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
CAUTION
Equipment damage
The connections of the other RF--combiners can hamper the
disconnection of the cables.
for the duplexer RF--combiner module:
the power cable (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
the coaxial cables (Int _0, Antenna, TX_in)
for the H2D RF--combiner module:
the coaxial cables (PA in, Int_0, Antenna)
for the H4D RF--combiner module (for S8000 BTS only) :
3 Removal of a RF--combiner module
a. Undo the fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 6--124 to Figure 6--126):
four screws for the duplexer and H2Dmodules, six screws for the H4Dmodules
(H4D is not used in S8003 BTS).
I
n
t
_
0
I
n
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
0
F
w
d
T
e
s
t
A
n
t
e
n
n
a
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
T
X
_
i
n
R
e
v
V
S
W
R
l
o
o
p
F
w
d
R
e
v
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
Always provided
with VSWR meter
Screws
Figure 6--124 RF--combiner (duplexer)
6--344
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
I
n
t
_
0
I
n
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
0
F
w
d
T
e
s
t
A
n
t
e
n
n
a
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
T
X
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
T
X
_
o
u
t
R
e
v
V
S
W
R
l
o
o
p
Always provided
with VSWR meter
F
w
d
Screws
R
e
v
Figure 6--125 RF--combiner (H2D)
P
w
r
/
R
e
v
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
I
n
t
_
0
I
n
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
0
F
w
d
R
e
v
A
n
t
e
n
n
a
T
X
_
i
n
T
X
_
o
u
t
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
A
l
a
r
m
V
S
W
R
F
w
d
Screws
Cables always provided
with VSWR meter
Figure 6--126 RF--combiner (H4D with VSWR)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS)
6--346
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
P
w
r
/
R
e
v
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
I
n
t
_
0
I
n
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
1
E
x
t
_
0
F
w
d
R
e
v
A
n
t
e
n
n
a
T
X
_
i
n
T
X
_
o
u
t
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
P
A
_
i
n
A
l
a
r
m
V
S
W
R
F
w
d
Screws
Figure 6--127 RF--combiner (H4D without VSWR)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS and S8000 Indoor BTS)
4 Reinsertion of a RF--combiner module
b. Insert the RF--combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the four or six fixing screws.
a. Reconnect the coaxial cables.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal Antenna must be
25 N--m --0.1/+0.2. Use the 7/16 torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminals Int_0, Int_1, Ext_0 and
Ext_1 must be 0.7N--m 0.1. Usethe 8--mmSMAtorquewrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal TX_in of the duplexer, of the
terminals PA in of the H2D and H4D RF--combiners must be
1.5 N--m 0.1. Use the 19--mm N torque wrench.
for the duplexer RF--combiner module:
the coaxial cables (Int _0, Antenna, TX_in)
for the H2D RF--combiner module:
for the H4D RF--combiner module (not used in S8003 BTS):
6--348
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.63 Replacement of a Rx--splitter
Rx--splitter S4 for GSM 900 NTQA10PA A0666907
Rx--splitter S4 for GSM 1800 NTQA10HA A0666906
Rx--splitter S4 for GSM 1900 NTQA10AA A0660099
Rx--splitter for GSM 850 NTQA88XA A0868934
PA module for GSM--R NTQA50PC A0800537
Rx splitter module for GSM 1800 NTQA10HA A0666906
Tx filter module for GSM 1800
Intervention time
Tools required
Flat screwdriver
Torque wrench
CAUTION
faulty RF--combiners.
The Rx--splitters are located on Figure 2--5, Figure 2--6, Figure 2--30 and Figure 2--36.
6--350
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
The Rx--splitters are located on Figure 2--45.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
b. Unscrew the RF cables from the right side to the left side to have some place
to put the extraction tool.
c. Undo the two fixing screws no.1 on the higher Rx--splitter, if it is to be replaced.
Note: For the S8003 BTS: due to the RF--cables number and location,
the following two steps (2--d and 2--e) are not imperative. Do them
only if necessary.
d. Undo the two fixing screws no.2 on the lower Rx--splitter. DO NOT
DISCONNECT THE RF CABLES.
e. Grasp and pull the lower splitter using the top and bottom edges.
f. Grasp and pull the higher splitter using the top and bottom edges, if it is to be
replaced.
3 Removal of a Rx--splitter
a. Disconnect the RF cables on the faulty Rx--splitter.
b. Remove the Rx--splitter.
4 Reinsertion of a Rx--splitter
b. Insert the module into the cabinet.
c. Reconnect the RF cables.
a. Push the lower and possibly the higher Rx--splitter into the cabinet.
b. Tighten the two fixing screws no.2 on the lower Rx--splitter.
c. Tighten possibly the two fixing screws no.1 on the higher Rx--splitter.
d. Tighten the RF cables from the left side to the right side.
6--352
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
RX0 RX1 IN RX2 RX3
Figure 6--128 Rx--splitter
RX0 RX1
RX0 RX1 RX0 RX1 IN RX2 RX3
RX0 RX1 IN RX2 RX3
RF cables Higher splitter
Lower splitter Ty--wrap
Screw no. 1
Screw no. 2
Figure 6--129 Higher and lower Rx--splitter
6--354
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.64 Replacement of the secondary lightning protector
Product reference
Lightning protectors -- A0666945
Intervention time
Tools required
One screwdriver for recessed cross--head screws
One stepladder
DANGER
Electric shock
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Removal of the secondary lightning protector
a. Remove the two connectors no.1 (see Figure 6--130).
b. Undo the four nuts of the secondary lightning protector cover.
c. Undo the two screws of the connector no.2.
d. Undo the four cross--head screws.
e. Undo the ground screw.
f. Remove the board.
3 Reinsertion of the secondary lightning protector
a. Insert the board (see Figure 6--130).
b. Tighten the ground screw.
c. Tighten the four cross--head screws.
d. Tighten the two screws of the connector no.2.
e. Insert the two connectors no.1.
f. Tighten the four nuts of the secondary lightning protector cover.
6--356
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Cover
Connector
no.1
Nut
Connector
no.2
Ground screw
Figure 6--130 View of the secondary lightning protector (ALPRO board) of the
S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS
6.2.65 Replacement of the ADU AC surge protector (S8000 Outdoor BTS
with GIPS)
This procedure applies to the ACsurge protector in the ADU. This surge protector protects
theGIPSandtheBTSfromdamagecausedby voltageor current transients onthe ACinput
line.
Product reference
ADU for S8000 GIPS
PEC code: NTQA19AA
CPC code: A0504894
Procedure
Step Action
1 Replace the ADU module of the GIPS (See Paragraph 6.2.60).
2 Replace the user AC plug if it is used (see Paragraph 6.2.66).
6--358
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.66 Replacement of the user AC plug (S8000 Outdoor BTS with GIPS)
Product reference
kit E type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18BA A0501183
kit F type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18DA A0501185
kit UK type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18CA A0501184
kit US type plug (GIPS/AC Box) NTQA18EA A0501193
Intervention time
Tool required
Star screwdriver
10 mm torque wrench
7 mm torque wrench
CAUTION
The cabinet is operating on its battery power supply. If this is not the
case, the cabinet does not remain supplied with the mains power
supply and the service will be lost.
For batteries, performthe procedure without interruption, due tothe
limited autonomy of the batteries.
Location
The user AC plug is located above the AC box / GIPS.
Procedure
Step Action
a. Check the battery circuit breaker located above the GIPS is in the I position.
b. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
2 Removal of the user AC plug
a. Unscrew the four screws of the AC box cover and remove.
b. Inside the ACbox on the top left and right, unscrewthe two screws maintaining
the user AC plug kit.
c. Inside the AC box, disconnect the three wires (neutral, phase, and ground)
connected from the user AC plug.
d. Unscrew the screw on the top of the user AC plug.
e. Remove the user AC plug.
3 Reinsertion of the user AC plug
a. Insert the new user AC plug above the AC box.
b. Align the two small punch on the ACbox with the two small holes of the user AC
plug.
c. Inside the AC box on the top left and right, screw the two screws fixing the user
AC plug.
d. Screw the screw on the top of the user AC plug.
e. Reconnect the three wires (phase, neutral, and ground) according to the label
inside the AC box.
f. Put in place the AC box cover.
g. Screw the four screws fixing the AC box cover.
a. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
6--360
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.67 Replacement of the single--phase AC lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)
Product references
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
PEC CODE CPC CODE PEC CODE CPC CODE PEC CODE CPC CODE
Single--phase
NTQA90BA A0662896
NTQA90BC A0731697 NTQA90BE A0771948
Single--phase
AC box NTQA90BB A0724617
NTQA90BC A0731697 NTQA90BE A0771948
Single--phase
AC lightning
protector
A0830159* A0797207 A0797207
Neutral plug--in Neutral plug--in
Cartridge
A0773608 A0773608
Cartridge
Phase plug--in Phase plug--in
A0773606 A0773606
* Replacement KIT
PEC CODE CPC codes
Single--phase lightning protector replacement kit NTQA90KA A0828534
Single--phase AC lightning protector A0830159
Alarm cable NTQA9214
Ground cable NTQA9215
Split Single--
phase AC
phase AC
box
NTQA90AA A0651990 NTQA90AB A0731695 NTQA90AC A0771947
Split
Single--phase
AC lightning
protector
A0681514 A0747999 A0747999
Cartridge
A0773608 A0773608
Cartridge
A0773606 A0773606
Intervention time
Tools required
Screwdriver
Wrench
CAUTION
Location
The AC lightning protector is located inside the AC box.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Check the battery circuit breaker, located above the rectifier shelf, is in the I
position.
b. Put the main circuit breaker in the O position.
c. Switch off the mains power supply on the operator box.
d. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box and the rectifier cable.
6--362
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
e. Undo the seven or eight securing screws no.4 on the AC box side and remove
the small cover (see Figure 6--131 and Figure 6--134).
3 Actions on lightning protector depending on the single phase AC box type1, type
2 or type 3 and on split--single--phase AC box.
For a lightning protector of a single--phase AC box type 1, see procedure
paragraph 6.2.74.
For a lightning protector of single--phase AC type 2 or type 3, perform the
following actions:
Removal of the lightning protector
i. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them.
ii. Disconnect each cable from the lightning protector by unscrewing the
screws no.5 (see Figure 6--133 and Figure 6--136).
iii. Disconnect the alarm cables from the terminal block on the lightning
protector by unscrewing the screws no.6.
iv. Pull the plastic piece to remove the lightning protector from the rail din.
Reinsertion of the lightning protector
i. Install the new lightning protector.
ii. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector by screwing the two
screws no.2.
iii. Connect each cable on the lightning protector by screwing the three screws
no.1.
For a lightning protector of split--single--phase AC box type 1, type 2 or
type 3, perform the following actions:
Removal of the lightning protector
i. Take care to mark the cables before.
ii. Disconnect each cable from the terminal block, by unscrewing the
screws no.3 (see Figure 6--132 and Figure 6--135).
iii. Disconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector terminal block.
iv. Undo the two nuts securing the lightning protector.
v. Remove the lightning protector.
Reinsertion of the lightning protector
i. Connect the alarm cable on the lightning protector
ii. Connect the lug of the ground cable
iii. Install the new lightning protector.
iv. Screw the two nuts securing the lightning protector.
v. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector terminal block.
vi. Reconnect each cable on the terminal block, by screwing the screws no.2.
a. Put the small cover back on.
b. Tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 6--131 and Figure 6--134).
c. Connect the alarm cable on the AC box and the rectifier cable.
d. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
e. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
6--364
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable
C01
Seven or eight
screws no. 4
Main breaker
Figure 6--131 Single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Lightning
protector
Phase
Varistor
nuts
Neutral
Ground
connection
Terminal
block
Eight
screws no. 4
Large nut
Screws
no. 3
Input
AC cable
(three wires)
Lug
Figure 6--132 Single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--366
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Large nut
Nuts
Ground
connection
Figure 6--133 Single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Screw no.1
Rectifier cable
Screw no.2
Ground cable
Alarm cable
Seven or eight
screws
Large nut
Main breaker
Input AC cable
(four wires)
Figure 6--134 Split single--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--368
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Neutral
(white wire)
Ground
connection
Lightning
protector
Phase
L2
Varistor nuts
Phase L1
Terminal
block
Screws
no. 3
Eight
screws
Large nut
Figure 6--135 Split single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Large nut
Nuts
Lug
Ground
connection
Screws no. 5
Screws no. 6
Figure 6--136 Split single--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--370
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.68 Replacement of the thermostats (S8000 Outdoor BTS)
Product reference
CPC codes: high temperature thermostat: A0664132
low temperature thermostat: A0664133
Intervention time
The intervention time is approximately four hours.
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
For a single--phase or split single--phase mains power supply, perform the
following actions.
iii. Remove the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement procedure
in Paragraph 6.2.14) or the DACS (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.20).
iv. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel holding the battery circuit
breaker.
v. Remove the front panel.
vi. If necessary, remove:
some DRXs (see the replacement procedure in Paragraph 6.2.36)
someRx--splitters (seethereplacement procedureinParagraph6.2.63)
the power supply rack (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.54 or 6.2.55)
iii. Remove the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement of one
climatic unit (ACU)) or the DACS (see the replacement of the DACS).
iv. Unscrew the six fixing screws on the front panel holding the battery circuit
breaker.
v. Remove the front panel.
vi. If necessary, remove:
some DRXs (see the replacement procedure in Paragraph 6.2.36)
some Rx--splitters (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.63)
the power supply rack (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.54 or 6.2.55)
3 Removal of the thermostats
a. Unscrew the two fixing screws holding the high temperature thermostat.
b. Disconnect the two lugs fixed on the high temperature thermostat.
6--372
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
c. Remove the high temperature thermostat.
d. Unscrew the two fixing screws holding the low temperature thermostat.
e. Disconnect the two lugs fixed on the low temperature thermostat.
f. Remove the low temperature thermostat.
4 Reinsertion of the thermostats
a. Insert the high temperature thermostat.
b. Connect the two lugs fixed on the high temperature thermostat.
c. Screw the two fixing screws holding the high temperature thermostat.
d. Insert the low temperature thermostat.
e. Connect the two lugs fixed on the low temperature thermostat.
f. Screw the two fixing screws holding the low temperature thermostat.
i. If necessary, insert the DRX modules, the Rx--splitters and the power
supply rack.
ii. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
iii. Screwthe six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the battery circuit
breaker.
iv. Install the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.14) or the DACS (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.20).
v. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
vi. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
i. If necessary, insert the DRX modules, the Rx--splitters and the power
supply rack.
ii. Insert the panel which holds the battery circuit breaker.
iii. Screwthe six fixing screws on the front panel which holds the battery circuit
breaker.
iv. Install the right climatic unit of the ACU (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.14) or the DACS (see the replacement procedure in
Paragraph 6.2.20).
v. Put the battery circuit breaker in the I position.
vi. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
6.2.69 Replacement of the tri--phase AC lightning protector
(S8000 Outdoor BTS with AC main box)
Product references
Tri--phase
Tri--phase
AC box
NTQA90CA A0681891
NTQA90CC A0731698 NTQA90CD A0771949
NTQA90CB A0724618
NTQA90CC A0731698 NTQA90CD A0771949
Tri--phase
AC
lightning
protector
kit
NTQA90LA
A0797205 A0797205
Cartridge
A0773608 A0773608
Cartridge
A0773606 A0773606
Component of the kit NTQA90LA
PEC CODE CPC codes
Tri--phase AC lightning protector A0830189
Alarm cable NTQA9214
Ground cable NTQA9215
Intervention time
Tools required
Screwdriver
Wrench
Drill machine (5--mm drill bit)
Punch tool with a hammer
6--374
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
CAUTION
CAUTION
Location
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Check the battery circuit breakers, if any, are in the I position.
b. Press the general stop button.
c. Switch off the mains power supply of the cabinet from the operator box
d. Disconnect the alarm cable from the AC box and the rectifier cable.
e. Remove the seven or eight screws on the side of the tri--phase AC box and
remove the small cover.
3 Removal of the lightning protector
For a lightning protector of AC box type 1, perform the following actions.
i. Make a note of the wire positions (see Figure 6--138).
ii. Disconnect the cables connected on the filters by unscrewing the four nuts.
protector.
iv. Remove the four screws securing the lightning protector.
v. Remove the lightning protector.
For a tri--phase lightning protectors replacements perform the following
actions.
i. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them
ii. Disconnect the cables connected on the filters by unscrewing the four nuts.
iii. Disconnect the connector of the alarm cable.
iv. Disconnect the ground cable from the ground connection.
v. Remove the four screws securing the lightning protector.
vi. Remove the lightning protector.
For a lightning protector of AC box type 2 or type 3, perform the following
actions.
i. Before disconnecting the cables, take care to mark them
ii. Disconnect each cable from the lightning protector by unscrewing the five
screws no.5.
protector by unscrewing the screws no.6.
iv. Pull the plastic piece to remove the lightning protector from the rail din.
4 Reinsertion of the lightning protector
For a lightning protector of AC box type 1, perform the following actions.
6--376
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
ii. Tighten the four fixing screws.
iii. Connect the lightning protector alarm wires.
iv. Connect the cables by tightening the four nuts.
For a tri--phase lightning protectors replacement kit perform the following
actions.
i. Install the tri--phase lightning protectors replacement kit.
ii. Crimp the terminal lugs on each AC wires of the lightning protector.
iii. Crimp the terminal lugs on each ground wires of the lightning protector.
iv. Remove the metallic support of the new surge arrestor and place it on the
external face of the AC box.
v. Tighten the two lower screws.
vi. Mark withafelt--tipthroughthetwoupper clinchnuts of the metallic support.
vii. Remove the metallic support from the external face of the AC box and
replace it on the new surge arrestor.
viii. Make a punch mark on each felt--tip mark with a punch tool with a hammer.
ix. Drill a hole on each punch mark.
x. Burr the holes and and clean the filings from the AC box and the BTS.
xi. Connect the alarm cables lug to position 2 on the lightning protector.
xii. Connect the smaller lug of the ground cable to position 3 on the lightning
protector.
xiii. Install the new lightning protector.
xiv. Tighten the four fixing screws.
xv. Connect the biggest lug of the ground cables to ground connection.
xvi. Connect the connector of the alarm cables.
xvii. Connect the cables of phases and neutral.
xviii.Tighten the four nuts.
For a lightning protector of AC box type 2 or type 3 perform the following
actions.
ii. Reconnect the alarm cables on the lightning protector by screwing the two
screws no.2.
iii. Connect each cable on the lightning protector by screwing the five screws
no.1.
a. Put the small cover back on.
b. Tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 6--137).
c. Reconnect the alarm cable on the AC box and the rectifier cable.
d. Switch on the mains power supply on the operator box.
e. Put the circuit breakers of the AC box in the I position.
6--378
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Seven or eight
screws
Large nut
Battery circuit
breaker
Alarm cable
Rectifier
cable
Screw no. 2
Ground cable
Screw no. 1
General stop
button
Figure 6--137 Tri--phase AC box of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Nut (phase 1)
Nut (neutral: white wire)
Ground connection
Nut (phase 3)
Nut (phase 2)
Figure 6--138 Tri--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 1 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6--380
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Screws no. 6
Plastic piece
Nuts
Ground
connection
Screws no. 5
Seven screws
no. 4
Lightning
protector
Figure 6--139 Tri--phase AC lightning protector of AC box type 2 of the
S8000 Outdoor BTS
6.2.70 Replacement of a Tx--filter module (TX--F)
(S8000 Outdoor BTS, S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product references for S8000 BTS
900 RF--Combiner Module Tx--filter:
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA52RA
NTQA52RB
NTQA59VA
NTQA59UA
A0688933
A0729306
A0842547
A0842546
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
New products
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA52KA
NTQA52KB
NTQA59XA
NTQA59WA
A0688932
A0729305
A0842549
A0842548
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA52CA
NTQA52CB
A0688931
A0729304
-- without VSWR (Part Band)
-- with VSWR (Part Band)
-- without VSWR (Full Band)
-- with VSWR (Full Band)
NTQA39AA
NTQA39BA
NTQA39CA
NTQA39DA
A0867505
A0867506
A0500688
A0500689
Product references for S8003 BTS
-- without VSWR
-- with VSWR
NTQA59VA
NTQA59UA
A0842547
A0842546
Intervention time
Tools required
Extraction tool P0850747
6--382
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7/16 torque wrench
CAUTION
Service reduction
faulty Tx--filters.
Location
The Tx--filter modules are located on Figure 2--11, Figure 2--12, Figure 2--41 and
Figure 2--42.
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
b. Disconnect the PA power supply:
For theType--1PA: put thePOWER switchof thePAin theO position(see
For the Type--2 PA: unplug the PS cable of the PA (PA side) (see
Figure 6--105).
c. Disconnect the following cables on the front panel:
CAUTION
Equipment damage
The connections of the other RF--combiners can hamper the
disconnection of the cables.
i. the power cable (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
ii. the coaxial cables (PA in, Antenna)
3 Removal of a Tx--filter module
a. Undo the four fixing screws on the front panel (see Figure 6--140).
4 Reinsertion of a Tx--filter module
b. Insert the RF--combiner module into the cabinet.
c. Tighten the four fixing screws.
a. Reconnect the cables fromthe following information (except for PA power cable
in case of Type--2 PA):
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal Antenna must be
25 N--m --0.1/+0.2. Use the 7/16 torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal of the terminal PA must be
i. the coaxial cables (Antenna, PA in)
ii. the power cable (Pwr/Alarm VSWR)
6--384
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
P
A
_
I
N
T
e
s
t
l
o
o
p
F
w
d
R
e
v
R
e
v
F
w
d
P
w
r
/
A
l
a
r
m
A
n
t
e
n
n
a
Screws
Figure 6--140 Tx--filter
6--386
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.71 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 Indoor BTS and S8003
Indoor BTS)
Product reference S8000
PEC code CPC code
Adaptation Box 75 ohm evol NTQA17DL A0548929
Product reference S8003
PEC code CPC code
Adaptation Box 75 ohm evol NTQA17DL A0548929
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The 75 kit is located on the cabinet top of the S8000 Indoor BTS and the S8003 Indoor
BTS (see Figure 6--141 and Figure 6--142).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Removal of a 75 ohms kit
a. Disconnect all wires leading to or from the 75 ohms kit and mark them.
b. Undo the screws attaching the 75 ohms kit to the cabinet top.
c. Remove the kit.
3 Reinsertion of a 75 ohms kit
a. Place a 75 ohms kit in the correct position on the cabinet top.
b. Attach the 75 ohms kit to the cabinet top by tightening the screws previously
removed.
c. Reconnect all wires leading to or fromthe kit, following the marks made on them
beforehand.
6--388
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
--48V
0V
ALPRO 0
ALPRO 1
Equipotentiality
stud
ALPRO 1
connector
RF connector
ALPRO 0
connector
Terminal blocks
Optional
75 kit
Ground
bar
Figure 6--141 S8000 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top
Ground bolt
Terminal blocks
75 Ohms kit
RF connector
--48V input
0V input
Ground
ABIS connector
ALPRO 0
Connector
ALPRO 0
Ground bolt
Figure 6--142 S8003 Indoor BTS: Cabinet top
6--390
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.72 Replacement of the 75 Ohms kit (S8000 BTS Outdoor)
Product reference
IP 67 75 ohms adaptation module
(L=5.5m without PCM)
NTQA17RB N0002200
(L=1.5m without PCM)
NTQA17RC N0002201
(L=5.5m with PCM)
NTQA17RD N0002202
(L=1.5m with PCM)
NTQA17RA N0002199
Intervention time
Tools required
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The 75 kit is located in one of two types of adaptation module. These are located in the
plinth of the S8000 Outdoor BTS (see Figure 6--143 and Figure 6--144).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. Open the plinth according to the site configuration.
3 Open the 75 ohms adaptation module
4 Removal of the 75 ohms kit
a. Disconnect all wires leading to or from the 75 ohms kit and mark them.
b. Undo the screws attaching the 75 ohms kit to the adaptation module.
c. Remove the kit.
5 Reinsertion of a 75 ohms kit
a. Place a 75 ohms kit in the correct position in the adaptation module.
b. Attach the 75 ohms kit to the adaptation module by tightening the screws
previously removed.
c. Reconnect all wires leading to or fromthe kit, following the marks made on them
beforehand.
6 Close the 75 ohms adaptation module
a. Close the plinth according to site configuration.
6--392
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
To the BSC
(75 PCM)
Ground
To the BTS
(120 PCM)
Figure 6--143 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module
To the BSC
(75 PCM)
To the BSC
(75 PCM)
To the BTS
(120 PCM)
Ground
Figure 6--144 View of the 75 Ohms adaptation module
6--394
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
6.2.73 Replacement of the air filter (S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Air filter P0604420
Intervention time
Tools required
--head screwdrivers
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
The air filter is located on the door of the cabinet (see Figure 6--145).
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Removal of an air filter
a. Undo the six nuts of the mechanical frame (see Figure 6--145) containing the air
filter.
b. Remove the mechanical frame.
c. Dissociate the air filter from the mechanical frame.
d. Remove the air filter.
3 Reinsertion of an air filter
a. Reinsert the new air filter (in any direction) in the mechanical frame (see
Figure 6--145).
b. Put the mechanical frame on the cabinet door on the opposite page of its
fastening holes.
c. Tighten the six nuts of the mechanical frame.
6--396
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
2 vertical gaskets
Air outlets
Mechanical
frame
containing
the air filter
2 horizontal
gaskets
6 screws
1 partition gasket
Figure 6--145 View of the air filter of the S8003 Indoor BTS
6.2.74 Replacement of a fan (S8003 Indoor BTS)
Product reference
Fan S8003 Indoor NTE682AA A0512639
Intervention time
Intervention time is approximately 30 minutes when changing all four fans.
CAUTION
Overtemperature
During this procedure, the cabinet operates without the cooling
system. This does not generate trouble because the intervention
time is not long.
If the procedure is prolonged for an extended period of time (for any
reason), the temperature increases: thecabinet thermostat triggers
an alarm when the cabinet temperature exceeds 45 _C. The PA
alarm appears when the cabinet temperature exceeds 60 _C,
causing a loss of service.
Tools required
--head screwdrivers
Flat head screwdrivers
When changing only one fan, there is no loss of service. Whenchanging all four, theservice
can be lost.
Location
The four fans are located in the fan tray of the cabinet (see Figure 6--146).
6--398
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
DANGER
Electric shock
CAUTION
DANGER
To avoid injury, wait until the fan stops rotating before removing the
fan tray.
a. This replacement procedure is required in two cases:
After a test of the fans, if the test result requires changing one or more fans.
The operator notes the position of the faulty fan(s).
During a systematic and periodic replacement procedure of the fans. In this
case, the four fans must be changed.
b. Open the door.
3 Removal of the fan tray (see Figure 6--146):
a. Unplug the connector of the power supply cable fromthe fan tray. REMEMBER
THE CABLE CONNECTOR REMAINS SUPPLIED WITH --48V.
b. Undo the two screws securing the fan tray in the cabinet.
c. Extract the fan tray as follows:
Pull the fan tray forward until the first two fans are exposed.
WAIT UNTIL THE FAN STOPS ROTATING.
Remove the fan tray.
d. Turn the fan tray upside down and place on a table.
4 Removal of the faulty fan(s) (see Figure 6--147):
a. Undo the four screws maintaining the fan on the fan tray.
b. Cut the ty--wrap maintaining the two PSwires of the faulty fan with the PSwires
of the other fans.
c. Unplug its two PS wires from the connection box by using a small flat head
screwdriver as follows:
Insert the screwdriver in the empty slot nearest the wire slot.
Push the screwdriver towards the middle axe of the connection box opening
the connector jaws.
Extract the wire.
Push the screwdriver in the opposite direction of the middle axe of the
connection box to shut the connector jaws.
d. Remove the faulty fan. Remove other fans as needed.
5 Installation of a new fan on the fan tray (see Figure 6--147):
a. Put the spare fan in place. The two PS wires must be grouped with the PSwires
of the other fans.
b. Tighten the four fan screws in order to maintain the fan on the tray.
c. Plug its two PS wires on the connection box by using a small flat head
screwdriver as follows:
Insert the screwdriver in the empty slot nearest the wire slot.
Push the screwdriver towards the middle axe of the connection box opening
the connector jaws.
6--400
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Insert the wire termination
Push the screwdriver in the opposite direction of the middle axe of the
connection box to shut the connector jaws.
d. The fan is installed. Install other fans as needed.
e. Install the ty--wrap maintaining the two PS wires of the fan with the six other PS
wires.
6 Installation of the fan tray in the cabinet (see Figure 6--146):
a. Turn the fan tray right side up and insert it completely in the cabinet.
b. Plug the PS cable connector in the tray PS connector. REMEMBER THE
CABLE CONNECTOR REMAINS SUPPLIED WITH --48V.
7 Check the fan operation (see Figure 6--146)
a. Partially extract the fan tray as follows:
Pull the fan tray forward, without unplugging the PS connector, until the four
fans are exposed.
b. Check the four fans for rotation:
In case of failure, note the position of the faulty fan(s), re--insert the tray in
its slot, and go to step 3.
Otherwise, re--insert the tray in its slot.
c. Tighten the two screws securing the fan tray on the cabinet.
Power supply cable
Fan tray containing 4 fans
Figure 6--146 Extraction of the fan tray from the S8003 Indoor BTS cabinet
6--402
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Power
4 screws
Supply
Connector
Fan tray
containing
4 fans
to open
connector
jaws
to shut
connector
jaws
Tie wrap
Fan
Figure 6--147 Removal of an S8003 Indoor fan from the fan tray
6.2.75 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC single phase
lightning protector
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA90KA
CPC code: A0830159
Intervention time
Tools required
Flashlight
Flat screwdriver 2.5 mm (length: 150 mm)
Cross--head screwdriver #3 and #4
Open end wrench #10
Crimping--plier for cable 1.5 to 2.5 mm2
Drill machine and drill bit 5 or 6 mm
Automatic center punch or a punch tool with a hammer
Multimeter
Inspection mirror in plastic frame
Retrofit kit NTQA90KA
Impact of the installation on service
CAUTION
The battery backup must be available for one hour.
Location
Note: to remove the old AC lightning protector, refer to Paragraph 6.2.67.
6--404
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Connect the alarm cables lug (NTQA9214, refer to Figure 6--143) to the position
2 on the lightning protector (refer to Figure 6--144).
3 Connect the smaller lug of alarmof GNDcable (NTQA9215, refer to Figure 6--143)
to the position 3 on the lightning protector (refer to Figure 6--144).
4 Install the new single phase AC lightning protector.
5 Tighten the four fixing screws (refer to Figure 6--133).
6 Connect the biggest lug of GND cable NTQA9215 (refer to Figure 6--143) to the
ground connection (refer to Figure 6--133).
7 Connect the sub--D connector of the alarm cable NTQA9214.
8 Connect the cables of phase (brown) and neutral (blue) on the terminal block (refer
to Figure 6--133).
9 Reconnect the alarm cable (connector C01) and rectifier cable (connector C02)
from AC box.
10 Turn on the following breakers:
a. The site breaker dedicated to the cabinet.
b. The Main circuit breaker CB01 of the AC box.
c. The Climatic System circuit breaker CB03 on the AC box.
d. The Rectifier circuit breaker CB02
11 Check the LED with an inspection mirror if necessary. If the LEDis not illuminated,
the lightning protector is defective and must be replaced.
12 Remove the old label and stick the new one on the AC box following the type and
release :
PEC code Impacted release
New release after
retrofit
NTQA90BA 06 07
NTQA90BB 05 06
PEC code
New release after
retrofit
Impacted release
NTQA90CA 02 03
NTQA90CB 01 03
NTQA90CB 02 04
13 Put in place the cover and tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 6--131 and
Figure 6--134).
6--406
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--148 Lightning protector cables
Figure 6--149 Single phase AC lightning protector
6.2.76 Installation of the new S8000 Outdoor BTS AC three phase lightning
protector
Product reference
PEC code: NTQA90LA
CPC code: A0830189
Intervention time
Tools required
Flashlight
Flat screwdriver 2.5 mm (length: 150 mm)
Felt tipped marker
Cross--head screwdriver #3 and #4
Open end wrench #10
Crimping--plier for cable 1.5 to 2.5 mm2
Drill machine and drill bit 5 or 6 mm
Automatic center punch or a punch tool with a hammer
Multimeter
Inspection mirror in plastic frame
Retrofit kit NTQA90LA
Impact of the installation on service
CAUTION
The battery backup must be available for one hour.
Location
Note: to remove the old AC lightning protector, refer to Paragraph 6.2.69.
6--408
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
2 Crimp the terminal lugs on each AC and GND wires of the AC lightning protector
(refer to Figure 6--149).
3 Remove the metallic support of the new surge arrestor and place it on the external
side of the AC box and tighten the two lower screws (refer to Figure 6--137).
4 Mark with a felt--tipped marker through the two upper clinch nuts of the metallic
support.
5 Remove the metallic support fromthe external side of the ACbox and replace it on
the new surge arrestor.
6 Makeapunchmark oneachfelt--tipmark withanautomaticcenter punchor apunch
tool with hammer.
7 Drill a hole (5 or 6 mm of diameter) on each punch mark.
8 Burr the holes and clean the filings from the AC box and the S8000 Outdoor BTS.
9 Connect the alarm cables lug (NTQA9214, refer to Figure 6--148) to position 2 on
the AC lightning protector (refer to Figure 6--149) .
10 Connect the smaller lug of the GND cable NTQA9215 (refer to Figure 6--148) to
position 3 on the AC lightning protector (refer to Figure 6--149).
11 Install the new AC lightning protector.
12 Tighten the four fixing screws.
13 Connect the biggest lug of GND cable (NTQA9215, refer to Figure 6--148) and
green and yellow wire of lightning protector to ground connection (refer to
Figure 6--137).
14 Connect the sub--D connector of the NTQA 9214 alarm cable (refer to
Figure 6--148).
15 Connect the four phase cables (brown, 1, 2, 3) and neutral blue cable by tightening
the four nuts (refer to Figure 6--137).
16 Reconnect the alarm cable (connector C01) and rectifier cable (connector C02)
from AC box.
17 Turn on the following breakers:
a. The site breaker dedicated to the cabinet.
b. The ACU0 circuit breaker (CB02) and ACU1 circuit breaker (CB03) on the
AC box.
c. The Rectifier circuit breaker (CB01) on three phase AC box.
18 Check the LED with an inspection mirror if necessary. If the LEDis not illuminated,
the lightning protector is defective and must be replaced.
19 Remove the old label and stick the new one on the AC box following the type and
release :
PEC code Impacted release
New release after
retrofit
NTQA90BA 06 07
NTQA90BB 05 06
NTQA90CA 02 03
NTQA90CB 01 03
NTQA90CB 02 04
20 Put in place the cover and tighten the seven or eight screws (see Figure 6--131 and
Figure 6--134).
6--410
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Figure 6--150 Lightning protector cables
Figure 6--151 Single phase AC lightning protector
On--site TIL use Nortel Networks Confidential 7--1
7 ON--SITE TIL USE
7.1 Introduction
This chapter presents the actions to be taken in case of fault number 1067on theDRX
or PA equipment.
The TIL can be used on--site to confirmthe faults at the OMC--R. The available TIL
menus are described in NTP <051>.
This chapter presents the on--site maintenance actions for the following causes of
fault number 1067:
for the PA equipment:
(6815745) Hardware
(6815746) DRX/PA connection
for the DRX equipment (the term DRX refers to DRX and eDRX, unless the
context indicates otherwise)
(9437185) RX fault
(9437190) BBFILTER ASIC fault
(9437193) Self test failed
(9437194) Major fault on TX
(9437206) DRX link
(9437216) The TX has not acknowledged the power consign request
(9437217) PA DRX control loop fault
7.2 Preliminary actions
7.2.1 Actions at the OMC--R
Before any intervention, confirm the alarm at the OMC--R:
Switch the transceiverEquipment object to locked.
Switch the transceiverEquipment object to unlocked.
Check for a change in the alarm.
7.2.2 On--site actions
Perform the following actions to identify the alarms.
On--site TIL use
7--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.2.2.1 TIL connection
Log on to the TIL (using the link Ethernet connected to the active CMCF board).
Refer to NTP <051>.
7.2.2.2 Alarm identification
When the cabinet is displayed, perform the following actions.
click on the DRX object
display the options
choose Alarms
Thirteen different alarms are possible:
High temperature alarm
High current alarm
Low power alarm
VSWR alarm
Automatic Level Control alarm
PA power shutdown alarm
Main RX connector alarm
Diversity RX connector alarm
Diversity loss -- main channel alarm
Diversity loss -- diversity channel alarm
RX PLL alarm
TX alarm
BB filter alarm
7.3 Corrective action sheets
These sheets are given in the following pages.
7.3.1 Alarm: High temperature alarm
Reaction of the system
This alarm indicates an excessively high temperature on the PA.
On--site maintenance
Step Action
1 Checks
Check the running of the DACS climatic system.
a. If it is correct, go to step 2.
b. If it is not correct, perform a corrective action on the DACS.
2 FRU replacement
a. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the faulty PA to
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
In most cases, the TRX and one TDMA are lost.
b. Replace the faulty PA according to the replacement procedure (see Paragraph
6.2.53).
c. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the replaced PA to
unlocked.
d. Ensure the ALARM LED of the PA is green.
e. Make sure the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm history
file of the OMC--R).
f. Go to step 3.
On--site TIL use
7--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.2 Alarm: High current alarm
This alarm indicates errors concerning the PA power supply.
It concerns the following errors:
errors on the DC/DC converters of the PA
errors of an excessive power consumption of the PA
Step Action
1 FRU replacement
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
6.2.53).
unlocked.
f. Go to step 2.
7.3.3 Alarm: Low power alarm
This alarm indicates a weak transmission level at the PA output.
Note: The alarm threshold is equal to the nominal cell power (--6dB).
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the RF cables between the DRX and the PA.
b. Using the TIL, have the DRX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell frequency (see
Paragraph 7.4).
If the problem persists, go to step 2.
If the problem disappears, go to step 3.
2 FRU replacement
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
6.2.53).
unlocked.
f. Go to step 3.
On--site TIL use
7--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.4 Alarm: VSWR alarm
This alarm indicates VSWR errors at the PA output.
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check all the cables of the chain: PA--duplexer--feeder--antenna.
b. If necessary, tighten the cables at the PA output.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminal RF IN must be 0.7 N--m
0.1. Use the 8--mm SMA torque wrench.
The tightening torque of the terminal RF OUT must be
c. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell frequency (see
Paragraph 7.4).
If the problem disappears, go to step 3.
If the problem persists, go to step 2.
2 FRU replacement
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
6.2.53).
unlocked.
f. Go to step 3.
On--site TIL use
7--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.5 Alarm: Automatic level control
This alarm indicates the power closed--loop control of the DRX/PA couple is reaching
saturation (high or low).
The alarm cause can be:
a problem in the DRX
a problem on the RF cable between the DRX and the PA
a problem in the PA
a problem on the DATA cable between the PA and the DRX
RF cable
DRX PA
DATA cable
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the RF and DATA cables.
b. If necessary, tighten the RF cable.
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque must be 0.7 N--m0.1. Use the 8--mmSMA
torque wrench.
c. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell frequency (see
Paragraph 7.4).
If the alarm persists, go to step 2.
If the alarm disappears, go to step 6.
2 PA replacement
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
6.2.53).
unlocked.
e. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell frequency (see
Paragraph 7.4).
3 DRX replacement
a. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the faulty DRX to
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
On--site TIL use
7--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
b. Replace the faulty DRX according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.36).
c. After DRX start--up, check the following LEDs:
i +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
ii BIT, SPU and ALA are OFF
iii DRX is blinking
d. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the replaced DRX to
unlocked.
Paragraph 7.4).
4 Cable replacement
a. Replace the following cables:
i the FH--PCM cable between the DRX and the DRX--ICO
ii the DATA I/O cable between the DRX and the PA
iii the RF cable
CAUTION
Tightening torques
The tightening torque of the terminals of the RF cables must be
0.7 N--m 0.1. Use the 8--mm SMA torque wrench.
b. Go to step 1.
5 New PA replacement
a. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the PA to locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
b. Replace the new PA with the old one according to the replacement procedure
c. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the PA to unlocked.
Paragraph 7.4).
If the alarm persists, the old PA and the old DRX are not correct. Go to
step 2.
If the alarm disappears, the old PA is correct and the old DRX is not correct.
Go to step 6.
On--site TIL use
7--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.6 Alarm: PA power shutdown alarm
This alarm indicates an excessively high input level on the PA.
Step Action
1 Checks
a. Check the RF wiring between the DRX and the PA.
b. Using the TIL, have the TX transmit in BCCH mode at the cell frequency (see
Paragraph 7.4).
2 FRU replacement
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
6.2.53).
unlocked.
f. Go to step 3.
7.3.7 Alarm: Main RX connector alarm
This alarm corresponds to a fault in the reception amplifier of the main path, located in the
Rx--splitter. A current overload is detected on the main path. It may be due to a hardware
problem on the cable.
Step Action
Check the RF cabling between the DRX and the RX splitter.
If it is correct, replace theRXsplitter according tothe replacement procedure
If it is not correct, replace the cable between the DRX and the RX splitter.
Make sure the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm history
The procedure is complete.
On--site TIL use
7--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.8 Alarm: Diversity RX connector alarm
This alarm corresponds to a fault in the reception amplifier of the diversity path, located in
the Rx--splitter. A current overload is detected on the diversity path. It can be caused by
a hardware problem on the cable.
Step Action
Check the RF cabling between the DRX and the RX splitter.
If it is correct, replacethe RXsplitter accordingtothereplacement procedure
If it is not correct, replace the cable between the DRX and the RX splitter.
Make sure the fault is cleared (the alarms are transferred to the alarm history
The procedure is complete.
7.3.9 Alarm: Diversity loss -- main channel alarm
This alarm indicates the DRX is detecting a received signal level difference between the
main path and the diversity path.
Step Action
1 Check the antenna reception route: RF--combiner, Rx--splitter, DRX.
If any cables are removed, re--insert them. Go to step 2.
2 Check the cables and the connectors are correctly tightened.
If the cables are not correctly tightened, tighten them.
If the cables are correctly tightened and if the alarm persists, go to step 3.
3 Replace the DRX module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.36
Analyze the alarm.
If the alarm has disappeared, go to step 5.
4 Replace the RF--combiner (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.62
Analyze the alarm.
If the alarm persists, replace the Rx--splitter (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.63
On--site TIL use
7--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.10 Alarm: Diversity loss -- diversity channel alarm
This alarm indicates the DRX detects a received signal level difference between the main
path and the diversity path.
Step Action
1 Check the antenna reception route: RF--combiner, Rx--splitter, DRX.
If any cables are removed, re--insert them. Go to step 2.
2 Check the cables and the connectors are correctly tightened.
If the cables are not correctly tightened, tighten them.
If the cables are correctly tightened and if the alarm persists, go to step 3.
3 Replace the DRX module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.36
Analyze the alarm.
4 Replace the RF--combiner (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.62
Analyze the alarm.
If the alarm persists, replace the Rx--splitter (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.63
7.3.11 Alarm: RX PLL alarm
This alarm indicates the TRX is no longer operational.
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.
2 Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the faulty DRX to
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
3 Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX (DRX--ICO side).
4 Check the fuse of the DRX--ICO unit.
If it is correct, replace the faulty DRX according to the replacement procedure
If it is not correct, replace the fuse (Shop Replaceable Unit). Go to step 5.
5 After DRX start--up, check the following LEDs:
+5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
BIST, SPU, and ALA are OFF
DRX is blinking
6 Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the replaced DRX to
unlocked. Go to step 6.
On--site TIL use
7--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.12 Alarm: TX alarm
This alarm indicates a problem on the DRX.
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.
2 Set the administrativeState of the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to
the faulty DRX to locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
In most cases, the transceiverEquipment and one transceiver
object are lost.
3 Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX (DRX--ICO side).
4 Check the fuse of the DRX unit.
If it is correct, replace the faulty DRX module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.36
Go to step 6.
If it is not correct, replace the fuse (Shop Replaceable Unit). Go to step 6.
5 After DRX start--up, check the following LEDs:
+5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
BIST, SPU and ALA are OFF
DRX is blinking
6 Set the administrativeState of the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to
the faulty DRX to unlocked.
7 Replace the PA module (Field Replaceable Unit). Refer to:
Paragraph 6.2.53
8 Check the cable between the PA and the DRX.
If it is correct, go to step 9.
If it is not correct, replace it (Shop Replaceable Unit). Go to step 9.
On--site TIL use
7--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
7.3.13 Alarm: BB filter alarm
This alarm indicates a hardware problem.
Step Action
1 Reset the DRX.
2 DRX replacement
a. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the faulty DRX to
locked.
CAUTION
Service reduction
b. Disconnect the PWR cable on the front panel of the DRX (DRX--ICO side).
c. Replace the faulty DRX according to the replacement procedure (see
Paragraph 6.2.36).
d. After DRX start--up, check the following LEDs:
i +5V for DRX, or PWR for eDRX is ON
ii BIST, SPU and ALA are OFF
iii DRX is blinking
e. Switch the transceiverEquipment object corresponding to the replaced DRX to
unlocked.
7.4 TX test
7.4.1 Introduction
This test enables a TX to be configured in a special test mode in order to monitor its
transmission power in a given channel.
The following procedure is performed either in standalone mode (BTS not operational) or
in connected mode after TX isolation (see NTP <051>).
7.4.2 TX test procedure
Step Action
1 TX isolation
a. If the BTS is in connected mode, isolate the TX.
b. Install the test bench of the power measurement.
2 Equipment installation
Install the measuring equipment on the transmission channel and check the
transmitter load is correct (see Figure 7--1).
3 Checks
a. For the TXtobe examined, run theBCCHconfiguration menu of the PAobject.
b. Enter the value 44 (maximum output power in dBm).
c. Enter the value of the selected channel. Enter either the value of the frequency
of the TX being measured, or one of the following central values:
62 for PGSM
975 for EGSM
965 for RGSM
190 for GSM 850
699 for GSM 1800
66 for GSM 1900
When the TX receives the information, a message indicates the correct
configuration. The TX begins to transmit.
d. Read the value displayed by the measuring device.
e. Add the attenuation caused by the measurement and the attenuation caused by
the combiner and the internal cables.
On--site TIL use
7--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
f. Check the final result corresponds to the theoretical value.
g. Stop the DRX Transmission using Transmission stop command.
4 TX de--isolation
De--isolate the TX.
N--Male/Male Adaptor
or cable (for more usability)
URV Probe
Female/Female N adaptor
5W/50 Ohms Load Termination
30dB/50W up
to 2GHz Attenuator
4.1/9.5 coax adaptor
TX shelf
PC running TIL
Ethernet cable
C
M
C
F
N--Male Termination N--Female Termination Legend:
Milliwattmeter
Figure 7--1 Installation for the TX test procedure
On--site TIL use
7--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual Nortel Networks Confidential 8--1
8 DACS AND LOW NOISE DACS TECHNICAL
MANUAL
This chapter gives technical and operational descriptions and covers the
troubleshooting for the following:
the Direct Ambient Cooling System (DACS)
the Low Noise Direct Ambient Cooling System (Low Noise DACS)
DACS and Low Noise DACS Maintenance is described in Chapter 5 in this guide.
The DACS and Low Noise DACS are used for cooling the Nortel Networks GSM
base station cabinets. These cabinets may be located in most environments,
normally outdoor.
DACS and Low Noise DACS technical manual
8--2
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Cubicle
Outlet vent
DACS unit
Hood
Plinth (optional)
Figure 8--1 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit in the S8000 Outdoor BTS
Water ingress
control fins
Temperature
control element
Heater thermostat
Transformer
Terminal block TB1
Modulating damper
motor and linkages
Twin blowers
Inlet air filter
Twin blowers
Alarm LEDs
Printed circuit assembly
(PCA) for control and
power distribution
Heater
Rectifier/capacitor
assembly
Air--directory
damper Drain pan
Figure 8--2 DACS or Low Noise DACS unit
8--4
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.1 DACS technical manual
8.1.1 Technical aspects
8.1.1.1 Construction
The DACS cabinet is constructed from zinc-coated sheet steel (Galvatite 600). The
metalwork is left unpainted to ensure good electrical bonding between the
component parts, essential for the control of electromagnetic radiation from and
into the unit. To avoid corrosion, no parts are welded. The filter is accessed through
the small plate at the front of the unit, while internal components may be reached
through the removable top lid. Both lid and plate are secured by quick release,
quarter-turn fasteners.
Figure 8--2 shows the key internal components.
8.1.1.2 Twin blowers
The blowers serve to circulate air through the BTS cabinet, to cool the internal
loads. The blowers are brushless DC types, driven either by the internal
transformer/rectifier unit at low temperatures, by the rectifier at normal
temperatures or by the internal battery during mains failure conditions.
They incorporate a soft-start feature ramping up their speed slowly and minimizes
inrush currents. Each provides a fan running signal (5Vsquare wave), employed to
announce a fan failure.
8.1.1.3 Air-directing damper
The damper, which rotates around a pivot point close to the base, is used to control
air movement within the DACS unit. When fully closed, the damper excludes
outside air and air is circulated within the BTS cabinet; at the other extreme, when
the damper is fully open, there is no recirculation and the cooling unit operates by
drawing in ambient air which is then routed through the BTS cabinet and ejected
through the outlet ducts at the two sides of the DACS.
At intermediate positions, the damper is adjusted automatically to give a mix of
recirculated and fresh air and therefore obtain the internal working temperature of
40C.
8.1.1.4 Modulating damper motor and linkages
The damper is controlled by the modulating motor using suitable linkages.
Operation of the damper between extreme positions is achieved within a motor
rotation of approximately 70C, so the motor is not limited by its end stops in either
direction. This guarantees a very good seal against outside or recirculated air, since
the motor can apply maximum pressure to the sealing gaskets.
The DC motor driving the gearbox of the actuator, is brushed and rated for
continuous operation under stalled conditions; its life expectancy is in excess of five
years. The actuator is equipped witha feedbackpotentiometer usedby the controller
to control damper position. The damper motor can exert a maximum closing force
of 5.6N--m.
8.1.1.5 Inlet air filter
The EU4 filter is employed to remove unwanted particles from the incoming air.
Because of the possibility of high humidity, it is encased within a metal frame. Since
the service life of the filter is influenced by the local weather conditions, the local
air quality and the rate of heat rejection required by the cooled equipment, it will
vary considerably. Under no circumstances is the time period between inlet filter
replacements to exceed 1 year.
8.1.1.6 Air inlet clogged switch
A pressure differential switch, which functions by operating a micro--switch in
response to movements of a large area diaphragm induced by pressure differences
either side of it, monitors the air inlet. The switch is factory--adjusted to provide a
contact closure to the control board when the pressure drop across the air inlet
exceeds 150 Pascal. The use and purpose of the air inlet clogged switch is described
in Paragraph 8.1.2.11.
8.1.1.7 Water ingress control fins
Aset of vertical metal fins, situatedalong the front of the DACS, serves toannihilate
the kinetic energy of water drops deflected by the incoming louvres on the lid of the
BTS cabinet. This water then runs down the fins into the drain pan beneath.
8.1.1.8 Drain pan
The front part of the base is configured as a drain pan extending under the water
control fins and filter frame. Collected water is directed out of the DACS using a
series of holes near the cabinet front.
8.1.1.9 Temperature control element
Temperature control of the unit is effected by a high quality thermistor, having an
accuracy of +/-0.2C between 0 and 70C. The element is encased in epoxy resin
within an aluminum case. The device is located in the left hand exit duct above a
9.5mm hole on the duct side; this hole ensures the thermistor is always in a moving
air stream, regardless of damper position.
8.1.1.10 Heater
The heater element, used to heat the BTS cabinet between temperatures of -40 and
+15C, is located in the fan outlet duct. It has a rating of 2.5kWat the nominal input
of 230V AC. The element is equipped with stainless steel fins, to maximize heat
transfer.
8--6
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.1.1.11 Heater thermostat
The heater element is protected against over temperature, generated by air failure
or blockage within the BTScabinet, by a manual-reset thermostat located on the top
of the fan discharge duct and over the element. It is set to alarm at 65C.
Under particular cold weather conditions, some erratic heating commands might
conduce to a safety thermostat tripping. Because the current thermostat has a
manual reset, the customer must send people on site to recover the Dacs heating
feature. The modification consists of replacing the manuel reset thermostat (CPC#
A0724335/NTQA98KA) with an automatic reset thermostat (CPC#
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.1.1.12 Rectifier/capacitor assembly
The transformer/rectifier unit consists of tworectifier bridges and storage capacitor,
mounted on an anodized aluminum bracket, and situated at the left rear of the
cabinet. This arrangement, which is powered by the main transformer, provides
approximately 45V DC, and is used to supply the blowers at temperatures below
0C when the main rectifier is inactive. Heat generated by the rectifier bridges is
dissipated by the aluminum, enhanced by air flow into the blower inlet nearby.
8.1.1.13 Transformer
The transformer is a torroidal type, encapsulated in resin to protect it from the
effects of high humidity likely in the interior of the DACS. It has an output of 35V
at 9A and a voltage regulation of less than 5%.
8.1.1.14 Terminal block TB1
The terminal block situated in the middle fan duct is used as the interface for AC
power between the DACS and the BTS cabinet; terminal designations are clearly
marked on the adjacent label.
8.1.1.15 Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control and power distribution
Control of the DACS and power distribution therein is accomplished by this
assembly and is described below in later paragraphs. The control assembly is
tropicalized to afford protection against the effects of high humidity.
8.1.1.16 Alarm LEDs
The alarm LEDs, which may be viewed from the top of the DACS through a
windowin the lid, are normally illuminated when healthy and extinguish on alarm.
They are red for fan failure, yellow for heater circuit failure and green for clogged
filter.
8.1.2 DACS operation
8.1.2.1 General Principle
Figure 8--1 shows a sectional view of the DACS installed in the BTS cabinet. For
normal outside temperatures, the inner cabinet aims to run at 40C. Once achieved,
the air damper opens to admit external air, and controls the inner cabinet
environment by mixing appropriate amounts of outside and recirculated air. The
blowers drive air down the rear duct and into the equipment enclosure using slots
at the rear. Return air to the DACSis routed through the two sets of holes in the base,
with excess air being rejected from vents either side of the DACS.
8.1.2.2 Specific Modes
The DACS functions in four operational modes, dictated solely by information
from the thermistor located in the left hand vent duct.
Low temperature (-40 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 15 degrees Celsius)
In this region, the heater is energized, the damper is closed to the outside, and air
is recirculated through the holes in the base of the DACS. The total area of these
holes is chosen to maintain a near-constant static pressure on the blowers,
irrespective of damper position, and to balance air flowin the two sides of the BTS
internal equipment cubicle.
Medium temperature (15 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 40 degrees Celsius)
Once the cabinet temperature has reached 15C, the heater is switched off, the
damper remains closed, and further heating of the equipment enclosure is achieved
solely by the internal equipment loading.
Normal temperature (Tcab = 40 degrees Celsius)
The control circuitry aims to run the cabinet at 40C, whenever the conditions of
load and external temperature allow. In this regime, the damper position is
controlled automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of
recirculated and external air to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is
rejected from the DACS from vents either side of the DACS cabinet.
High temperature (Tcab > 40 degrees Celsius)
At higher outside temperatures, although the damper is fully open, the DACS is
unable to keep the cabinet temperature to 40C which now rises in sympathy with
the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 50C, the internal cabinet
will rise to a nominal 60C under fully loaded conditions.
8--8
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.1.2.3 Control and Power Distribution Assembly
This paragraph deals with the detailed workings of the printed circuit assembly
(PCA). This assembly is not only responsible for control and supervision of the
DACS, but also for directing both AC and DC power within the equipment. The
reader is referred to schematics when following the replacement procedures
(see Paragraph 6.2.24), the PCA silk screen, which shows the component layout.
8.1.2.4 Power Distribution
The alternating supply, which enters the DACS using terminal block TB1 on the
base of the unit, is routed to P2-1 and P2-2. It then passes through an EMC filter,
comprising capacitors C10, C11, C12, C13 and common mode inductor L1, to feed
the heater element on pins P2-3, P2-4 and main transformer T1 on pins P2-5 and
P2-6. The heater is protected against over temperature by a manual reset thermostat,
HRS.
A0520118/NTQA8111).
The secondary winding of T1 feeds bridge rectifier BR1 whose DC output is
smoothed by the computer-grade electrolytic capacitor C1. The resulting voltage
level (45V DC at the nominal 230V AC input) is then routed back to the printed
circuit assembly (PCA) on P3-3 and P3-5 to supply power to the board and
direct-drive blowers.
Power from the BTS battery also feeds the PCA on plug P3; the positive pole is
connected directly to pin P3-4, while the negative pole is routed to pin P3-2 using
a diode for a bridge rectifier BR2. For cabinet temperatures between -40 and +7C,
DCpower to the DACS is supplied by the internal transformer-rectifier unit (TRU).
Above 7C, the main TRU in the BTS cabinet, which float-charges the battery at
a voltage of 54.4V, becomes active. Because of its higher output voltage and the
diode effect of the two rectifiers, this TRU now takes over the running of the unit
and the internal TRU is left on, but idling only.
In the event of an AC supply failure, the power to the DACS is transferred
automatically, without interruption, to the battery. Under these conditions, all
control and alarm functions will continue as normal. At a battery discharge level of
45V the internal control shuts off all radio transmission equipment and at 42V all
power is switched off.
The blowers, fed from plugs P4Aand P4B, are fused individually so a catastrophic
failure of one blower will not affect the other. The fuse links F1 and F2, which are
10A, fast blow ceramic types, must be replaced by exact equivalents.
8.1.2.5 Control Power Supplies
The control board operates from a 24V DC supply, produced from the raw
rectified/battery supplies by regulator REG1and associatedcomponents. Settingup
of the 24V level is effected by means of potentiometer VR1, the only adjustment
on the board; this level may be measured on tests points TP1 and TP2. A center
supply of 12V is provided by IC1/1, R1, R2 and C1.
8.1.2.6 Temperature Sensing
Measurement of the cabinet temperature is carried out by a close-tolerance
thermistor (+/-0.2C in the range 0 to 70C), linearized by the parallel resistor R6.
The combination is driven by a constant current of 0.5mA, generated by
components R3, R4, R5, IC1/2 and Q1. The resulting temperature-dependent
voltage is buffered by IC1/4 to give an output of 46mV/C at pin 14 of IC1. To
ensure a rapid response fromthe thermistor, it is mounted over a hole inthe side duct
of the DACS guaranteeing a supply of recirculated air across the device at all times.
8.1.2.7 40 degrees Celsius Reference
The reference voltage (-1.74V) for 40C operation is set by resistors R7, R8 and
IC1/3 and appears on pin 8 of the amplifier package. This is offset against the
temperature output (with resistors R9 and R10) to give a zero input to the error
amplifier when the cabinet temperature equals 40C.
8.1.2.8 Error Amplifier
The error amplifier, comprising components IC2/1, R9, R19, R11 and C2, has a
proportional gain of 30 and an output of 1.38V/C measured at pin 1 of IC2. This
voltage, together with the buffered output of the feedback potentiometer in the
damper motor, is fed to a differential amplifier consisting of IC2/3, R14, R15, R16
and R17. At balance conditions, when the actuator has reached its required position,
the voltage at pin 8 of IC2 will be zero with respect to the 12V rail.
8.1.2.9 Damper Motor Drive
The damper motor driver is made up of amplifiers IC2/4, IC3/1 and IC3/2, together
with resistors R18, R19, R20, R21, R22, R23, R24, R25, diodes D10, D11 and
transistors Q2, Q3. Q4 and Q5. This circuit is capable of driving the motor in either
direction as well as stopping it at any position, when the outputs (pins 1 and 7) of
IC3 are both low. This balance occurs when the voltage from the error amplifier
matches the buffered output from the feedback potentiometer of the damper motor.
8--10
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Amplifiers IC3/1 and IC3/2 both have a DC gain of 100 facilitating a fine
modulation of the motor close to its aiming point. At balance, since the bases of
transistors Q2 and Q3 are both low, the transistors are in a conducting state and are
effective, in conjunction with the reverse power flow diodes D10 and D11, in
providing dynamic braking to the actuator motor. This prevents unwanted damper
movements by forces imposed on the damper by the static pressure generated at the
suction inlets of the blowers.
Since the active voltage across the 5k.ohm potentiometer is approximately 3V, the
temperature change required to drive the damper from a fully closed to fully open
position is 2C or +/-1C on the nominal setting of 40C. To prevent the damper
from responding to very small changes, the control also incorporates a dead zone
of +/-0.3C, set up by the resistors R20 and R21. This and the current limiting
imposed by R28 during stalled motor conditions, serves to maximize the life of the
actuator motor.
Connections to the modulating motor are effected by connector P5.
8.1.2.10 Heater Drive Circuit
The temperature-dependent voltage from pin 14 of IC1 is compared with the 15C
reference voltage (3.05V), set by resistors R35 and R36, by means of amplifier
IC3/3. The output at pin 8 is fed to the relay driver comprising IC3/4, resistors R37,
R38, R39, transistor Q7 and relay HTR. The relay is energized for all temperatures
below 15C.
IC3/4 is provided with a large amount of hysteresis, to prevent erratic operation of
the relay. Energization of the relaypowers the heater usinga normally-opencontact,
the current transformer CT1 and manually reset, overheat thermostat.
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.1.2.11 Alarms
All alarm relays (RA1, RA2 and RA3) and respective LEDs are energized when
healthy. The alarm LEDs may be viewed, without removal of the lid, through a
windowontop of the unit. Volt-free, normally-closedcontacts for the critical alarms
are routed to pins 5 and 6 of connector P6 while those for the maintenance alarm
are fed to pins 3 and 4. One side of each alarm output is grounded (pins 4 and 5).
Communication to Nortel Networks equipment is by means of a D type connector
which also carries an alarm for the main cabinet hood.
Critical Alarm 1 - Heater Failure
Alarm relay RA1 is kept normally energized using transistor Q6, in turn driven by
the series combination of R31, D12 and R31. On a call for heating, generated by
cabinet temperatures below 15C, the collector of transistor Q7 goes low and, by
means of diode D13, removes the drive from Q6. However, if current is present in
the heater circuit, the drive to Q6 is taken over by the rectified output of current
transformer CT1. Capacitor C4, in conjunction with R31, creates a time delay to
hold on RA1 during the switch over period.
Since this alarm requires current in the heater, it registers any fault in the heater
circuit, including element failure, open-circuit thermostat or fractured wire.
Critical Alarm 2 - Fan Failure
The DC blowers, connected to plugs P4A and P4B, each generate a square wave
signal to pin 3 of their respective connector during healthy operation. Since these
signals can end up either high or low in the event of a fan failure, the signals are
capacitively coupled and then rectified. If both fans are running correctly,
transistors Q11 and Q12 are both conducting and relay RA2 is energized by
transistor Q9, held in saturation by R41. If however, a fan fails, Q11 or Q12 is turned
off and transistor Q8 is driven by diode D7 or D9. This action shorts out the drive
to Q9 and relay RA2 de-energizes.
Warning Alarm -- Air Inlet Clogged Switch
An adjustable diaphragm switch (factory pre--set to the specified static pressure
drop) monitors the pressure drop across the air inlet. When static pressure across the
air inlet is detected as too high, the air inlet is deemed clogged, the switch closes,
de--energizes alarm relay RA2 and an alarm is given.
Note: The air inlet clogged switch alarm function must not be used as a substitute
for the planned periodic replacement of the air inlet filter
Note: When fan speed control mode is chosen, this alarm is inhibited at high fan
speed.
8--12
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.1.3 Troubleshooting
This paragraph is included to assist the service person - it is not meant to be an
exhaustive list of possible faults since service personnel are well trained on the
functioning of the unit.
DANGER
Electric shock
Symptom Possible Cause Check or Remedy
Heater alarm Thermostat tripped Reset stat, find cause Heater alarm Thermostat tripped
Fractured or disconnected wire
Reset stat, find cause
Make good connection Fractured or disconnected wire
Faulty control board
H l i i
Make good connection
Change board
R l l
y
Heater element open circuit
g
Replace element
Air inlet clogged Blocked filter Change filter Air inlet clogged
switch alarm
Blocked filter
Maladjusted switch
Change filter
Readjust switch switch alarm Maladjusted switch
Faulty clog switch
Readjust switch
Change switch Faulty clog switch
Cabinet inlet louvers obstructed
Change switch
Clear obstruction Cabinet inlet louvers obstructed
Ingress control fins obstructed
Clear obstruction
Clear obstruction
Fan failure alarm Blown fuse on board Change fuse, check Fan failure alarm Blown fuse on board
Broken connection
Change fuse, check
Check plugs, wires Broken connection
Faulty blower
F l b d
Check plugs, wires
Change blower
Ch b d
y
Faulty board
g
Change board
Fans inoperative Check AC/DC supplies Rectify Fans inoperative Check AC/DC supplies
Both fuses blown
Rectify
Change and check Both fuses blown
Faulty board
Change and check
Change board
Damper not open Loose linkage Reset and tighten p p g
Open circuit thermistor
Faulty board
g
Check thermistor/plug
P1 Faulty board
Faulty actuator
P1
Change board Faulty actuator Change board
Check/change
Damper not closed Loose linkage Reset and tighten p g
Short--circuit thermistor
Faulty board
g
Check thermistor/plug
P1 Faulty board
Faulty actuator
P1
Change board Faulty actuator Change board
Check/change
Poor temp Loose linkage Reset and tighten Poor temp
regulation
Loose linkage
Faulty board
Reset and tighten
Change board regulation Faulty board
Intermittent thermistor
F l
Change board
Check plug P1
Ch k/ h Faulty actuator
p g
Check/change
Incorrect cab temp Board 24V DC incorrect Check TP1,TP2/adjust
Under particularly cold weather conditions, some erratic heating commands might
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.1.3.1 Re--activation of the DACS thermostat (S8000 outdoor BTS)
Reminder
Once the thermostat is tripped, the BTS send a notification to the OMC--R. This notification
is the following : fault number 1067, cause 7864322.
Note: If you do not find the notification, it may be because the event appeared
more than 7 days ago (it depends on the OMC--R configuration).
Note: If this notification is not taken into account immediately, retrieve it by
using the following tool:
/OMC/base/tools/shell
DisplayNotif.sh --day 20010614 --BSSall --SQLwherecodano=1067and
cause=7864322 > /home/OMC/notif_1067
It is necessary to go on site to re--activate the thermostat. The re--activation procedure is
described below.
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
8--14
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Location
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
a. In the case of an AC mains box, perform the following actions.
position.
iv. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and carefully
remove it .
b. In the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
ii. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the OFF position.
iii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the OFF position.
iv. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
v. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and carefully
remove it .
c. Open the hood and the doors of the cabinet.
3 Re--activation of the thermostat
Note: The thermostat is located between the blowers. It is fixed on the
heater cover (refer to Figure 8--3).
a. Press the red button which is located at the top of the thermostat.
ii. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
c. in the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
ii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the ON position.
iii. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the ON position.
iv. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
8--16
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
Re--activation of the thermostat
press the red button
Thermostat
Blower
Blower
Figure 8--3 Re--activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
8.2 Low Noise DACS technical manual
8.2.1 Technical aspects
8.2.1.1 Construction
The Low Noise DACS cabinet is constructed from sheet steel, coated with an
aluminum/zinc/silicon alloy (Aluzinc 185 or Galvalume 0.55 oz/ft
2
) or coated with
zinc (Galvatite 600). The metalwork is left unpainted to ensure good electrical
bonding between the component parts, essential for the control of electromagnetic
radiation from and into the unit. To avoid corrosion, no parts are welded. The filter
is accessed through the small plate at the front of the unit, while internal components
may be reached by the removable top lid. Both lid and plate are secured by quick
release, quarter--turn fasteners.
8.2.1.2 Twin blowers
The blowers serve to circulate air through the BTS cabinet, to cool the internal
loads. The blowers are brushless DC types, driven either by the internal
transformer/rectifier unit at low temperatures, by the rectifier at normal
temperatures or by the internal battery during mains failure conditions.
The blowers incorporate a soft--start feature ramping up speed slowly to minimize
inrush. Eachprovides a fan runningsignal (5Vsquare wave), employed toannounce
a fan failure. The blower speed is controlled by a 0--10VDC signal.
8.2.1.3 Air--directing damper
The damper, which rotates around a pivot point close to the base, is used to control
air movement within the Low Noise DACS unit. When fully closed, the damper
excludes outside air and air is circulated within the BTS cabinet; at the other
extreme, when the damper is fully open, there is no recirculation and the cooling
unit operates by drawing in ambient air which is then routed through the BTS
cabinet and ejected by the outlet ducts at the two sides of the Low Noise DACS.
At intermediate positions, the damper is adjusted automatically to give a mix of
recirculated and fresh air and therefore to obtain the internal working temperature.
8.2.1.4 Modulating damper motor and linkages
The damper is controlled by the modulating motor by suitable linkages. Operation
of the damper between extreme positions is achieved within a motor rotation of
approximately 45C, so the motor is not limited by its end stops in either direction.
This guarantees a very good seal against outside or recirculated air, since the motor
can apply maximum pressure to the sealing gaskets.
8--18
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
The DC motor driving the gearbox of the actuator, is brushed and rated for
continuous operation under stalled conditions; its life expectancy is in excess of five
years. The actuator is equipped witha feedbackpotentiometer usedby the controller
to control damper position. The damper motor can exert a maximum closing force
of 5.6N--m.
8.2.1.5 Inlet air filter
The EU4 filter is employed to remove unwanted particles from the incoming air.
Because of the possibility of high humidity, it is encased within a metal frame. Since
influenced by the local weather conditions, the local air quality, and the rate of heat
rejection required by the cooled equipment, the service life of the filter will vary
considerably. Under no circumstances is the time period between inlet filter
replacements to exceed 1 year.
8.2.1.6 Air inlet clogged switch
A pressure differential switch, functions by operating a micro--switch in response
to movements of a large area diaphragm induced by pressure differences either side
of it, monitors the air inlet. The switch is factory--adjusted to provide a contact
closure to the control board when the pressure drop across the air inlet exceeds 150
Pascal. The use and purpose of the air inlet clogged switch is described in
Paragraph 8.2.2.12.
8.2.1.7 Water ingress control fins
Aset of vertical metal fins, situated along the front of the LowNoise DACS, serves
to annihilate the kinetic energy of water drops deflected by the incoming louvers
on the lid of the BTS cabinet. This water then runs down the fins into the drain pan
beneath.
8.2.1.8 Drain pan
The front part of the base is configured as a drain pan extending under the water
control fins and filter frame. Collected water is directed out of the LowNoise DACS
by a series of holes near the cabinet front.
8.2.1.9 Temperature control elements
Temperature control of the unit is effected by two high quality thermistors, having
an accuracy of +/--0.2C between 0 and 70C. The elements are encased in epoxy
resin within an aluminum case.
The first device (connected to plug P1 on the PCA controller) is located in the left
hand exit duct above a hole on the duct side; this hole ensures the thermistor is
always in a moving air stream, regardless of the damper position. The thermistor
measures the temperature of the internal equipment cabinet.
The other thermistor (connected to plug P7 on the PCA controller), is located
between the inlet air filter and the water ingress control fins and measures the
ambient air temperature. When fan speed control mode is chosen (see
Paragraph 8.2.2.13), this information is employed to control the speed of the
blowers. The blowers are switched to high speed for ambient above 45C. They are
switched to low speed operation once the temperature has dropped to 40C.
8.2.1.10 Heater
The heater element, used to maintain the BTS cabinet above +10C, is located in
the fan outlet duct. It has a rating of 2,5kW at the nominal input of 230V AC and
is equipped with stainless steel fins, tomaximize heat transfer. The element is turned
off at +15C, for rising temperature, and energized at 10Cfor falling temperature.
8.2.1.11 Heater thermostat
The heater element is protected against over temperature, generated by air failure
or blockage within the BTS cabinet, by a manual--reset thermostat located on the
top of the fan discharge duct and over the element. It is set to alarm at 65C.
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.2.1.12 Rectifier/capacitor assembly
The transformer/rectifier unit consists of tworectifier bridges and storage capacitor,
mounted on an aluminum bracket, and situated towards the rear of the cabinet. This
arrangement, which is powered by the main transformer, provides approximately
45VDC, andis usedto supplythe blowers at temperatures below0Cwhen the main
BTS rectifier is inactive. Heat generated by the rectifier bridges is dissipated by the
aluminum, enhanced by air flow into the blower inlet nearby.
8.2.1.13 Transformer
The transformer is a torroidal type, encased in epoxy resin against the effects of high
humidity likely in the interior of the Low Noise DACS. It has an output of 37V at
9A and a voltage regulation of less than 5%.
8.2.1.14 Terminal block TB1
The terminal block situated in the middle fan duct is used as the interface for AC
power between the Low Noise DACS and the BTS cabinet; terminal designations
are clearly marked on the adjacent label.
8--20
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.2.1.15 Printed circuit assembly (PCA) for control and power distribution
Control of the LowNoise DACS and power distribution therein is accomplished by
this assembly and is described below in later paragraphs. The control assembly is
tropicalized to afford protection against the effects of high humidity.
8.2.1.16 Alarm LEDs
The alarm LEDs, which may be viewed from the top of the Low Noise DACS
through a windowin the lid, are normally illuminated when healthy and extinguish
on alarm. They are red for fan failure, yellowfor heater circuit failure and green for
clogged filter.
8.2.2 Low Noise DAC operation
8.2.2.1 General Principles
Figure 8--1 shows a sectional view of the Low Noise DACS installed in the BTS
cabinet. For normal outside temperatures, the inner cabinet aims to run at a constant
temperature, as defined by the setting on the control assembly. Once achieved, the
air damper opens to admit external air, and controls the inner cabinet environment
by mixing appropriate amounts of outside and recirculated air. The blowers drive
air down the rear duct and into the equipment enclosure through slots at the rear.
Return air to the Low Noise DACS is routed through the set of holes in the base,
with excess air being rejected from the exhaust duct either sides of the Low Noise
DACS.
8.2.2.2 Specific Modes
The Low Noise DACS functions in four operational modes, dictated solely by
information from the thermistor located in the left hand vent duct. The required
cabinet temperature is defined as Ts.
Low temperature (--40 degrees Celsius < Tcab < 15 degrees Celsius)
In this region, the heater is energized, the damper is closed to the outside, and air
is recirculated through the holes in the base of the LowNoise DACS. The total area
of these holes is chosen to maintain a near--constant static pressure on the blowers,
irrespective of damper position.
Medium temperature (15 degrees Celsius < Tcab < Ts)
Once the cabinet temperature has reached 15C, the heater is switched off, the
damper remains closed, and further heating of the equipment enclosure is achieved
solely by the internal equipment loading.
Normal temperature (Tcab = Ts)
The control circuitry aims to run the cabinet at Ts, whenever the conditions of load
and external temperature allow. In this regime, the damper position is controlled
automatically by the modulating motor, mixing appropriate amounts of recirculated
and external air to maintain a constant temperature. Excess air is ejected from the
Low Noise DACS from vents on either sides of the Low Noise DACS cabinet.
High temperature (Tcab > Ts)
At higher outside temperatures, although the damper is fully open, the Low Noise
DACS is unable to keep the cabinet temperature to Ts which nowrises in sympathy
with the external temperature. At an outside temperature of 50C, the internal
cabinet will rise to a nominal 60C under fully loaded conditions.
8--22
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.2.2.3 Fan Speed Control
This feature is activated when fan speed control mode is chosen on the printed
circuit assembly (PCA) (see Paragraph 8.2.2.13). As long as the cabinet
temperature is at, or below, Ts, the fans are running at their lower speed setting.
However, for ambient temperatures above Ts, the damper is fully open and, when
45C is reached, the fan speed is increased automatically to minimize the
temperature rise in the internal equipment cubicle. As the outside temperature falls,
the fans revert to low speed operation at an ambient temperature of 40C.
This feature is important, since it reduces the acoustic noise during the majority of
the year and, more especially at night, when the call density (or cabinet loading) and
outside temperature are likely to be at their lowest level.
8.2.2.4 Control and Power Distribution Assembly
This paragraph deals with the detailed workings of the printed circuit assembly
(PCA). This assembly is responsible not only for control and supervisionof the Low
Noise DACS, but also for directing both AC and DC power within the equipment.
The reader is referred Paragraph 6.2.24 when following the replacement
procedures.
8.2.2.5 Power Distribution
The alternating supply, which enters the LowNoise DACSthrough a terminal block
at the rear of the unit, is routed to plug P2 on the printed circuit assembly (PCA).
It then passes through an EMC filter, to feed the heater element and main
transformer T1. The heater is protected against over temperature by a manual reset
thermostat, HRS.
A0520118/NTQA8111).
The secondary winding of T1 feeds bridge rectifier BR1, the DC output of which
is smoothed by the computer--grade electrolytic capacitor C1. The resulting voltage
level (approximately 45V DC at the nominal 230V AC input) is used to provide
power to the direct--drive, DC blowers and PCA control and supervisory circuitry.
DCpower fromthe BTSrectifier/batteryalso feeds the PCAon plugP3; the positive
pole (grounded in the BTS cabinet) is connected directly, while the negative pole
is routed through a diode of bridge rectifier BR2. For cabinet temperatures between
--40 and +0C, DC power to the Low Noise DACS is supplied by the internal
transformer--rectifier unit (TRU). Above 0C, the main TRU in the BTS cabinet,
which float--charges the battery at a voltage of 54.5V, becomes active. Because of
its higher output voltage and the diode effect of the two rectifiers, this TRU now
takes over the running of the unit and the internal TRU is left on, but idling only.
In the event of an AC supply failure, the power to the Low Noise DACS is
transferred automatically, without interruption, to the battery. Under these
conditions, all control and alarm functions will continue as normal. At a battery
discharge level of 45V the BTS internal control starts to shed load until the entire
cabinet switches off at a voltage of 42V DC.
The blowers, fed from plugs P4Aand P4B, are fused individually so a catastrophic
failure of one blower does not affect the other. The fuse links F1 and F2, which are
10A, fast blow ceramic types, must be replaced by exact equivalents.
8.2.2.6 Control Power Supplies
The control board operates from a 24V DC supply, produced from the raw
rectified/battery supplies by regulator REG1and associatedcomponents. Settingup
of the 24V level is effected by means of potentiometer VR1, the only adjustment
on the board; this level may be measured on tests points TP1 and TP2. The voltage
level is factory set and is not altered except in extraordinary circumstances. Acenter
supply of 12V is also used.
8.2.2.7 Temperature Sensing
Measurement of the cabinet temperature is carried out by a close--tolerance
thermistor (+/--0.2C in the range 0 to 70C), linearized by a parallel resistor. The
combination is driven by a constant current of 0.5mA. The resulting
temperature--dependent voltage is buffered togive anoutput of 46mV/C. Toensure
a rapid response from the thermistor, it is mounted over a hole in the left exhaust
duct of the Low Noise DACS guaranteeing a supply of recirculated air across the
device at all times.
8.2.2.8 Ts Reference
The reference voltage relevant to the cabinet internal temperature is selected by
means of DIL switch SW1. SW1/1 off and SW1/2 on run the cabinet at 35C, while
SW1/1 and SW1/2 both on give a Ts of 25C. The setting is defined by Nortel
Networks and is dependent on the prevailing weather conditions in the operational
area.
8--24
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
8.2.2.9 Error Amplifier
Information from the cabinet thermistor is offset against the voltage from the
actuator feedback potentiometer and fed to an error amplifier. The output of the
error amplifier controls the damper motor drive circuitry.
8.2.2.10 Damper Motor Drive
The damper motor drive is capable of driving the motor in either direction as well
as stopping it at any position, as directed by the output of the error amplifier. This
balance occurs when the voltage from the error amplifier matches the buffered
output from the feedback potentiometer of the damper motor.
Diodes D1 and D2 provide dynamic braking to the actuator motor. This action
prevents unwanted damper movements by forces imposed on the damper by the
static pressure generated at the suction inlets of the blowers.
The temperature change required to move the damper fromone extreme to the other
is approximately 2C. To prevent the damper from responding to very small
changes, the control also incorporates a dead zone of 0.6C. This, and the current
limiting imposed by the series resistor during stalled motor conditions, serves to
maximize the life of the actuator motor.
Connections to the modulating motor are effected by connector P5.
8.2.2.11 Heater Drive Circuit
Information from the cabinet sensor is also used to control the operation of the
heater. For rising cabinet temperature, the heater is de--energized at +15C and
re--energized at +10C as the temperature falls. The 5Chysteresis prevents erratic
operation of the heater. The element is powered by means of relay HTRthrough the
current transformer CT1 and heater safety thermostat HRS. The thermostat is
manually reset following a trip.
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.2.2.12 Alarms
The control board features three alarm circuits, two critical and one maintenance.
The alarm relays (RA1, RA2) and respective LEDs are energized when healthy.
The alarm LEDs may be viewed, without removal of the lid, through a windowon
top of the unit.
Volt--free, normally--closed contacts for the alarms are routed, through connector
P6, to the D type connector. The maintenance alarm appears on pins 3 and 4 of
connector P6, while the critical alarms are summarized and fed to pins 5 and 6 of
connector P6. The alarmcontacts open to alarm. In the event of power failure to the
printed circuit assembly (PCA), both alarms will be activated.
Critical Alarm 1 -- Heater Failure
On a call for heating, generated by cabinet temperatures below 10C, drive to the
alarm relay RA1 is held in an energized state provided current is detected in the
heater element. If there is no current, the relay drops out and an alarmis given. Since
this alarm requires current in the heater, it registers any fault in the heater circuit,
including element failure, open--circuit thermostat or fractured wire.
Critical Alarm 2 -- Fan Failure
The DC blowers, connected to plugs P4A and P4B, each generate a square wave
signal during healthy operation. These signals are used to reset the counters IC6 and
IC7; if either counter times out, the alarm relay RA1 is de--energized and an alarm
is given.
Note: When fan speed control mode is chosen (see Paragraph 8.2.2.13), if either
fan fails, the other is automatically driven at the higher speed.
Warning Alarm Air Inlet Clogged Switch
An adjustable diaphragm switch (factory pre--set to the specified static pressure
drop) monitors the pressure drop across the air inlet. When detecting static pressure
across the air inlet as too high, the air inlet is deemed clogged, the switch closes,
de--energizes alarm relay RA2 and an alarm is given.
Note: The air inlet clogged switch alarmfunction is not be used as a substitute for
the planned periodic replacement of the air inlet filter (see Chapter 5,
Preventive Maintenance).
Note: When fan speed control mode is chosen, this alarm is inhibited at high fan
speed.
8.2.2.13 PCA Controller Options
Switch SW1 has three positions -- the first two define Ts, the cabinet working
temperature. For 35C operation, set SW1/1 to off and SW1/2 to on; for 25C
operation, set both positions to on. The factory pre--setting is 35C. The choice of
cabinet temperature is location dependent.
The third position over--rides the fan speed control and constrains the blowers to run
always at high speed -- with this set--up, the air inlet clogged switch is not inhibited.
For this, set SW1/3 to on.
8--26
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
The header H1 has four positions and is used to define the high and low fan speeds.
For the Low Noise DACS unit, the shorting links are in positions 1 and 3.
8.2.3 Troubleshooting
This paragraph is included to assist the service person -- it is not meant to be an
exhaustive list of possible faults since it is expected for service personnel to be well
trained on the functioning of the unit.
DANGER
Electric shock
Symptom Possible Cause Check or Remedy
Heater alarm Thermostat tripped
Fractured or disconnected wire
Faulty control board
Heater element open circuit
Reset stat, find cause
Make good connection
Change board
Replace element
alarm
Blocked filter
Maladjusted switch
Faulty clog switch
Cabinet inlet louvers obstructed
Ingress control fins obstructed
Change filter
Readjust switch
Change switch
Clear obstruction
Clear obstruction
Fan failure alarm Blown fuse on board
Broken connection
Faulty blower
Faulty board
Change fuse, check
Check plugs, wires
Change blower
Change board
Fans inoperative Check AC/DC supplies
Both fuses blown
Faulty board
Rectify
Change and check
Change board
Damper not open Loose linkage
Open circuit thermistor
Faulty board
Faulty actuator
Reset and tighten
Check thermistor/plug P1
Change board
Check/change
Damper not closed Loose linkage
Short--circuit thermistor
Faulty board
Faulty actuator
Reset and tighten
Check thermistor/plug P1
Change board
Check/change
Poor temp regulation Loose linkage
Faulty board
Intermittent thermistor
Faulty actuator
Reset and tighten
Change board
Check plug P1
Check/change
Incorrect cab temp Board 24V DC incorrect Check TP1,TP2/adjust
8--28
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
A0520118/NTQA8111).
8.2.3.1 Re--activation of the Low Noise DACS thermostat
Reminder
Once the thermostat is tripped, the BTS send a notification to the OMC--R. This notification
is the following : fault number 1067, cause 7864322.
Note: If you do not find the notification, it may be because the event appeared
more than 7 days ago (it depends on the OMC--R configuration).
If this notification is not takeninto account immediately, retrieve it byusing
the following tool:
/OMC/base/tools/shell
DisplayNotif.sh --day 20010614 --BSSall --SQLwherecodano=1067and
cause=7864322 > /home/OMC/notif_1067
It is necessary to go on site to re--activate the thermostat. The re--activation procedure is
described below.
Note: Replacement Procedure of Auto--reset DACS heater thermostat is
described in Chapter 6 paragraph 6.2.30.
Intervention time
Tools required
Stepladder
Flat screwdriver
Allen wrench
DANGER
Electric shock
Location
Procedure
Step Action
CAUTION
position.
iv. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and carefully
remove it .
i. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
ii. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the OFF position.
iii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the OFF position.
iv. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the OFF position.
v. Unscrew the four quarter turn fasteners of the DACS cover and carefully
remove it .
3 Re--activation of the thermostat
Note: The thermostat is located between the blowers. It is fixed on the
heater cover (refer to Figure 8--4).
8--30
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
a. Press the red button which is located at the top of the thermostat.
ii. Put the main circuit breaker in the I position.
c. in the case of a GIPS, perform the following actions.
i. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
ii. Put the DACS circuit breaker of the ACU in the ON position.
iii. Put the rectifier circuit breakers of the ADU in the ON position.
iv. Put the battery circuit breaker of the DCU in the ON position.
Re--activation of the thermostat
press the red button
Thermostat
Blower
Blower
Figure 8--4 Re--activation of the DACS thermostat of the S8000 Outdoor BTS
8--32
PE/DCL/DD/0048
411--9001--048
S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance Manual
Copyright 1999--2005 Nortel Networks, All Rights Reserved
NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL:
The information contained in this document is the property of Nortel
Networks. Except as specifically authorized in writing by Nortel
Networks, the holder of this document shall keep the information
contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part
from disclosure and dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation,
operation and maintenance purposes only.
You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the
information contained herein in any way or in any form without prior
written consent of Nortel Networks.
The following are trademarks of Nortel Networks: *NORTEL
NETWORKS, the NORTEL NETWORKS corporate logo, the NORTEL
Globemark, UNIFIED NETWORKS, BSC6000, S2000, S4000, S8000.
GSM is a trademark of France Telecom.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Publication Reference
PE/DCL/DD/0048 411--9001--048
15.37/EN
April 2005
Originated in France
For more information, please contact:
For all countries, except USA:
Documentation Department
Parc dactivit de Magny--Chateaufort
CHATEAUFORT
78928 YVELINES CEDEX 9
FRANCE
Email : umts--gsm.ntp@nortelnetworks.com
Fax : (33) (1) 39--44--50--29
In the USA:
2221 Lakeside Boulevard
Richardson TX 75082
USA
Tel: 1--800--4 NORTEL
1--800--466--7838 or (972) 684--5935
Internet Address:
http://www.nortelnetworks.com

411-9001-048.15.37-BTS 8000 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

411-9001-048.15.37-BTS 8000 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wireless Service Provider Solutions

S8000/S8003 BTS Maintenance

You might also like